Cyclotron Info

Design Guide

560 design rules for small and tabletop cyclotrons, extracted from the amateur-relevant accelerator literature — from Livingston & Blewett to undergraduate machine theses. Each rule carries its formula where the source gives one, a verbatim quote, and a page-level citation. Applicability notes are calibrated to a concrete reference point: where a note says “the reference machine”, it means a representative, publicly documented amateur build of the tabletop class — roughly 0.6 T on 8-inch poles, ~150 keV protons — used as a worked example so the numbers are concrete, not abstract. Where a note says “Mark II”, it means a prospective next iteration of such a machine (higher field, tighter gap).

Verify before use. These rules were machine-extracted from the literature, in part from freshly OCR'd scans. Quotes and numbers were checked against page images where the OCR looked suspect, but transcription errors can survive. Any rule that drives a real design decision — and every safety-critical number — should be re-read at the cited page of the source before you commit metal, money, or high voltage to it.

  1. Momentum-analyze the beam to separate H+ from H2+ using a bending field and defining slit: 10 cm bend radius, 4 cm wide poles with 1 cm gap at up to 18 kG, and a 0.5 x 1 cm slit selects one species with a small energy spread.

    r = 10 cm, gap 1 cm, B up to 18 kG; slit 0.5 cm x 1 cm

    beam-measurementmagnet dg-001

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    A slit Y, 0.5 cm by 1 cm, serves to define the deflected beam and sort out a given kind of ion with a small range of energies.

    259.full (1).pdf — p. 262

    Tabletop: In a cyclotron the machine itself is the analyzer, but any external beamline species check on the Mark II can copy these modest slit and pole proportions.

  2. Compute achievable proton energy as T(MeV) = 3.12e-4 x B^2(kilogauss) x R^2(inches), where R is the radius of usable UNIFORM field, not the physical pole radius.

    T(MeV) = 3.12e-4 * B^2(kG) * R^2(in) for protons; 1.56e-4 for deuterons

    beam-dynamicsmagnet dg-002

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Protons: T (Mev) = 3.12 x 10-4 B2R2 ... the radius R applies to the extent of the uniform magnetic field; the physical radius of pole faces must be larger by about one-half the gap length.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 158

    Tabletop: For 8-in poles at 5.9 kG with ~1.5-in gap, usable R is roughly 3.25 in, predicting ~115 keV; a wider pole or smaller gap directly buys energy as B^2R^2.

  3. Keep the field index n = -(r/B)(dB/dr) between 0 and 1 everywhere ions circulate; both axial and radial oscillations are stable only in this band.

    B = B0*(r0/r)^n; stability requires 0 < n < 1; f_axial = sqrt(n)*f0, f_radial = sqrt(1-n)*f0

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-003

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    for particle oscillations about an equilibrium orbit to be stable for both axial and radial coordinates, the value of n must be in the range 0 < n < 1.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 161

    Tabletop: Map n(r) on the 8-in poles; any region where field rises with radius (n<0) defocuses axially and kills the beam.

  4. Shape the field to fall approximately linearly with radius by a total of 3 to 4 percent (small machines with relatively high dee voltage and few turns) or ~2 percent (medium 15-20 MeV machines) from center to the exit radius.

    total radial field decrease: 3-4% (small cyclotrons), ~2% (15-20 MeV), ~1% (very large)

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-004

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the total decrease below the value of the central field out to the exit slit is about 2 per cent. The radial decrease can be larger (3 to 4 per cent) in small machines in which D voltage is relatively high.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 161

    Tabletop: The reference machine is the 'small, few-turn' case: aim for a smooth 3-4% droop center-to-edge rather than a flat field.

  5. Design the n(r) profile to rise roughly linearly from 0 at center to ~0.02 where fringing begins, reaching ~0.4 at the exit-slit radius and 1.0 at the maximum-energy radius; place the septum just inside the max-energy radius.

    MIT: n = 0 -> 0.02 at r = 0.8*R_pole, 0.40 at exit slit (18.75 in), 1.0 at 19.25 in

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-005

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The n value rises almost linearly from zero at the center to 0.02 at 15 in. (where fringing effects start), then increases rapidly to 0.40 at 18.75 in. (exit-slit location) and to 1.0 at 19.25 in.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 161-183

    Tabletop: Scale directly: on 8-in poles keep n tiny out to ~3 in radius and take the beam off where n has climbed to ~0.4.

  6. Machine pole faces parallel to about 1 part in 50,000 of the pole diameter; a rigid stack of machined blocks needs few bolts, with dowel pins for alignment.

    parallelism tolerance ~ D_pole / 50,000

    magnetfabrication dg-006

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Precise machining of the surfaces in contact is necessary to make pole faces accurately parallel. The required machine tolerance is about 1/50,000 of the pole diameter.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 193

    Tabletop: For 8-in poles that is ~0.00016 in (~4 um) parallelism - a surface-grinder job; non-parallel poles show up as the sinusoidal azimuthal error in field maps.

  7. Taper the poles so flux density stays roughly constant along their length; a designed 18 kG gap field needs a pole base about 24 percent larger in diameter to stay under ~20 kG in the iron.

    42-in pole face at 18 kG -> ~52-in base; keep B_iron < ~20 kG (saturation)

    magnet dg-007

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    For a designed flux density of 18 kilogauss in the gap of a 42-in. cyclotron ... the pole base would have to be about 52 in. in diameter to keep flux density in the base of the pole below the practical limit.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 193

    Tabletop: At 5.9 kG straight cylindrical poles are fine; only if Mark II pushes past ~12-15 kG does pole taper start paying for itself.

  8. Size the magnet gap around 1/8 of pole diameter when energy matters (5-6 in gaps on 42-in poles, 8-9 in on 60-in); excitation power grows roughly as gap length squared and a wider gap loses usable radius to fringing.

    g/D_pole ~ 0.12-0.14; magnet power ~ g^2

    magnet dg-008

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the longer the magnet gap the larger is the power required for excitation, varying approximately with the square of gap length ... use of 5- to 6-in. gaps for 42-in. poles and 8- to 9-in. gaps for 60-in. poles.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 194

    Tabletop: On 8-in poles the historical ratio suggests a ~1-in gap; every extra 1/4 in of gap costs both field (amp-turns) and usable radius.

  9. Regulate magnet current to better than 1 part in 1000 (sense a series standard resistor against a voltage reference and feed back); a drifting field detunes resonance before anything else does.

    dI/I < 1e-3

    magnetbeam-measurement dg-009

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The magnet field must be accurately regulated to maintain a steady beam ... A constant-current regulator is needed, capable of reducing fluctuations to better than 1/1000.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 194

    Tabletop: A modern current-regulated supply meets this easily, but verify ripple and thermal drift: 0.1% of 5.9 kG is 6 G, comparable to the whole shim budget.

  10. Create the radial field droop with a flat pyramidal stack of thin iron disk shims of graded diameter in the shimming gaps between chamber and poles (MIT: four 0.020-in soft-iron disks of 6, 14, 18, and 22 in diameter for 38-in usable field).

    graded-diameter 0.020-in soft iron disks, largest ~ pole diameter, stacked concentrically

    magnetfabrication dg-010

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    obtained by the use of such stacks in the two shimming gaps, each consisting of four disks of 0.020-in. soft iron sheet of 6, 14, 18, and 22 in. diam.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 195

    Tabletop: Scaled to 8-in poles: a stack of 0.020-in disks of roughly 1.2, 2.8, 3.6, 4.4 in diameter is a proven starting recipe for the 2-4% droop.

  11. Fasten soft-iron ring shims to the extreme pole edge to hold off fringing droop, but size them cautiously: oversized rings (or correct rings run at lower field) produce a local field minimum that defocuses.

    MIT optimum edge-ring section: 3/4 in x 1/4 in on 42-in poles

    magnet dg-011

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    At MIT the optimum ring section was 3/4 by 1/4 in. ... Shims which are too large produce a minimum in the radial field plot which would cause defocusing.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 196

    Tabletop: A small edge ring (order 0.15 x 0.05 in scaled, or trimmed empirically) can extend the reference machine's usable radius, but re-check the field plot at every operating current.

  12. Hold azimuthal field variation below 0.1 to 0.2 percent on every circle of constant radius, most critically near the exit radius; correct with sector- and wedge-shaped shims after mapping.

    max azimuthal variation < 0.1-0.2% of B; MIT reduced 2% as-built errors to <0.1%

    magnetbeam-measurement dg-012

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Most operators agree that a variation of less than 0.1 to 0.2 per cent is desirable ... After careful correction by use of sector-shaped and wedge-shaped shims, the errors were reduced to less than 0.1 per cent.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 196-197

    Tabletop: At 5.9 kG this means holding azimuthal wobble to ~6-12 G; an azimuthal bump acts like a field error that pumps radial oscillation amplitude.

  13. Find the magnetic median plane (it can sit well off the geometric midplane - 1/2 in at MIT) with a pair of opposed identical search coils, and recenter it by trimming excitation of the upper coil relative to the lower.

    two identical coils in series opposition straddling midplane; balance point = magnetic median plane

    magnetbeam-measurement dg-013

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the uncorrected field showed a median plane displaced 1/2 in. below the central plane ... adequately corrected by reducing excitation in the upper magnet windings relative to the lower ones.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 197

    Tabletop: The beam follows the magnetic plane, not the machined one; with separate top/bottom coil circuits (or a resistor across one layer) the builder can steer it back to mid-gap.

  14. When empirical shimming stalls, stop and run a full measurement campaign (radial plots, azimuthal circles at many radii, median-plane survey, spot checks for local flaws like blowholes); MIT's measured-then-corrected field beat years of cut-and-try on the first try.

    magnetbeam-measurement dg-014

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    When this program was completed, the cyclotron was reassembled and on the first operation gave the highest beam intensities ever obtained, with no further empirical shimming.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 197

    Tabletop: The single strongest process lesson for Mark II: map first, shim from data - a weekend of Hall-probe mapping replaces months of trial-and-error beam chasing.

  15. Local field defects have local fixes: a 0.5 percent weak spot (e.g., casting blowhole) is corrected with a small spot shim; a fundamental (once-around) azimuthal sinusoid means non-parallel poles or an off-center measurement pivot.

    magnet dg-015

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    A local weak spot in the field (0.5 per cent low) was observed in the MIT magnet which was presumed to be due to a blowhole in the pole casting; it was corrected by a local spot shim.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 197-284

    Tabletop: Read the harmonic content of azimuthal maps like a diagnosis chart: 1st harmonic = tilt/centering, higher harmonics = discrete iron defects needing taped-on trial shims, then permanent installation.

  16. Below ~10 kilogauss the gap field is linear in excitation, B = mu0*Ni/g; above that apply an efficiency factor K (about 0.73 at 18 kG) because iron reluctance and leakage grow.

    B = K*mu0*Ni/g; K ~ 1 below 10 kG, ~0.73 at 18 kG; 10 kG in a 10 cm gap needs 7.95e4 ampere-turns

    magnetcoils dg-016

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    To produce a field B of 1 weber/m2 (10 kilogauss) in a gap of 10 cm length, the number of ampere-turns required is 7.95 x 10^4 ... At 18 kilogauss ... the observed value of B is 0.73 of that predicted.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 258-260

    Tabletop: At the reference machine's 5.9 kG the linear formula is trustworthy: ~1.4e4 ampere-turns for a 3 cm gap; headroom for a hotter Mark II field is cheap until ~10 kG, expensive after.

  17. Expect the usable field to end about half a gap-length inside the pole edge (0.45g with edge shims, 0.6g without), where 'usable' means field within ~2 percent of central value.

    R_useful ~= R_pole - (0.45 to 0.6)*g; boundary moves inward at high B due to pole-corner saturation

    magnet dg-017

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the edge of the usable region is inside the pole boundaries by about one-half the gap length ... Without shims the useful region was inside the pole edge by 0.6g; with the chosen ring-shaped shims it was inside by 0.45g.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 260

    Tabletop: With a 1.2-in gap on 8-in poles the builder loses ~0.6 in of radius to fringing; shrinking the gap or adding ring shims recovers usable radius.

  18. Map the field with a small search coil on a pivoted radial arm feeding an integrating fluxmeter; a full-circle sweep must return to zero deflection, which doubles as the amplifier drift check.

    typical exploring coil: ~1000 turns fine wire, ~1/2 in ID x 1 in OD; Q = (Na/R)*dB

    beam-measurementmagnet dg-018

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    A typical 'exploring' coil for a cyclotron magnet would have about 1000 turns of fine wire ... Total deflection should be zero after a full circle; this provides a check on the stability of the amplifier.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 283-285

    Tabletop: A pivoted-arm coil (or a modern Hall probe on the same fixture) sweeping circles at fixed radii is exactly the mapping jig an 8-in machine needs before shimming.

  19. Use the running cyclotron itself as a magnetometer: at resonance the RF frequency and e/m give the average field to high precision, but only the average - assigning it to a specific radius risks ~0.5 percent error.

    B_avg = 2*pi*f*m/e at observed resonance

    beam-measurementmagnet dg-019

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the magnetic field can be determined with high precision ... this resonance frequency represents an average value of the magnetic field from the center out to the exit radius ... an error of the order of 0.5 per cent is possible.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 287-288

    Tabletop: The reference machine's observed resonance peak vs magnet current is a magnetization-curve measurement of their own magnet - log it at every retune.

  20. A 'dished' (saucer-shaped) median plane indicates asymmetric iron, asymmetric coil placement, or a shorted turn; flatten it by paralleling a resistor across one coil layer to trim its current.

    magnetcoils dg-020

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    a common phenomenon ... is to find the median plane dished into a shallow saucer shape caused by asymmetries in the magnet iron or of the reinforcing iron in the foundations ... At MIT such a 'dished' median plane was corrected by connecting an external resistor in parallel with one of the coil layers.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 288

    Tabletop: Rebar in the floor or a nearby steel bench can dish an H-frame tabletop field; check for it and trim electrically rather than re-machining.

  21. Field strength scales inversely with gap: shrinking the pole gap from 3.8 cm to 1.3 cm was expected to raise the same magnet from ~0.49 T to ~0.75 T; energy gain is quadratic in B so small gap reductions pay twice.

    B ~ 1/g (fixed MMF); T_final ~ B^2

    magnet dg-021

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    we will reduce the air gap between the poles of the magnet to 1.3 cm thereby increasing the magnetic field to roughly 0.75 T.

    perm_magnet_cyclotron.pdf — p. 22

    Tabletop: The cheapest field upgrade for Mark II is gap reduction (thinner chamber lids, pole pieces reaching into the chamber), before any coil or steel changes.

  22. Expect the usable uniform-field region of a flat-pole magnet to extend to only about 80% of the pole radius (measured: 0.493 T uniform to 1% out to 6.19 cm on 7.6 cm radius poles); size the dee to sit inside it.

    r_uniform(1%) ~ 0.8 * r_pole

    magnetdee dg-022

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The magnetic field is uniform at 0.493 T, to within one percent, out to a radius of 6.19 cm... The RF electrode radius is 7.14 cm containing the full uniform region.

    perm_magnet_cyclotron.pdf — p. 22-23

    Tabletop: Matches the reference machine's 8 in poles: plan for a usable beam radius of ~3.2 in unless shims extend the flat region.

  23. Characterize a repurposed electromagnet from its field-versus-gap curve before designing around it: the Varian V-3900 NMR magnet gives 2.7 T at a 1.25-inch gap, which with 8 cm radius poles yields E = q^2*B^2*r^2/(2m) ~ 1.96 MeV protons.

    KE = q^2*B^2*r^2/(2m); 2.7 T, r=0.075 m -> 1.96 MeV

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-023

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the magnet generates 2.7 T of magnetic field with a 1.25 inch pole separation... capable of accelerating protons to a maximum kinetic energy of 1.96 MeV

    22thesis10.pdf — p. 7-8

    Tabletop: The surplus-NMR-magnet route to MeV energies: small radius is fully compensated by high B (energy ~ B^2*r^2), so a 6-inch 2.7 T machine beats a 12-inch 1 T machine.

  24. Taper the pole from a wider stem to a narrower face and leave a thick shoulder at the face, then add peripherally placed steel shims for uniformity: Iowa State tapered 12-inch pole stems down to 10-inch pole faces with a 0.7-inch-thick shoulder at the face.

    12 in stem -> 10 in face (1.2:1 taper), 0.7 in shoulder at pole face, plus peripheral steel shims

    magnetfabrication dg-024

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The magnet has tapered poles, the poles being tapered from 12-inch pole stems to 10-inch pole faces. There is a 0.7 inch thick shoulder at the pole face ... peripherally placed steel shims contribute to the uniformity of the field.

    The Iowa State University 1.5 MeV Undergraduate Cyclotron — p. 6-7

    Tabletop: A concrete, machinable geometry for concentrating flux into an 8-10 inch pole face at ~1.7 T; the shoulder plus edge shims are what flatten B(r) near the outer orbit.

  25. Plan roughly 20 kW of DC coil power (water-cooled hollow copper tubing on a 2-ton mild-steel core, 33-inch-diameter coils) to hold 17 kG across a 10-inch pole gap.

    20 kW dc from motor-generator sets into water-cooled hollow-copper coils, 33 in coil diameter, 2 ton mild steel core, 2.5 tons total

    magnetcoils dg-025

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The magnet consists of coils of hollow copper tubing wound on a two-ton core of mild steel ... These deliver to the magnet 20 kilowatts of electric power, which is dissipated by water circulating through the coils.

    The Iowa State University 1.5 MeV Undergraduate Cyclotron — p. 6-7

    Tabletop: Sets the scale of the jump from the reference machine's 0.59 T solid-copper-tubing magnet to a 1.7 T machine: hollow conductor and real water cooling become mandatory, and power goes to tens of kW.

  26. A workable student-cyclotron design point for ~1.5 MeV protons: 10-inch pole faces, 17,000 gauss, 25.68 MHz RF, 10-14 kV dee-to-dee at 2 kW RF, giving 2 uA of beam (about 1.3e13 protons/s).

    10 in poles, 1.7 T, 25.68 MHz, Vdee 10-14 kV, 2 kW RF, 2 uA, 1.5 MeV

    magnetrfdeecyclotron-general dg-026

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Size: 10-inch pole diameter ... Dee voltage: 10,000 to 14,000 volts dee-to-dee; R.F. power: 2,000 watts; R.F. frequency: 25.68 megacycles ... Magnetic field strength: 17,000 gauss

    The Iowa State University 1.5 MeV Undergraduate Cyclotron — p. 9

    Tabletop: This is the closest historical analogue to a Mark II target: same pole diameter as the reference machine, ~3x their field and ~10x their dee voltage buy ~10x the energy.

  27. Regulate magnet current, not field, with a precision shunt feeding a difference amplifier against a reference: this held 17,000 gauss to +/-4 gauss (2.4e-4), which is the stability the cyclotron resonance condition demands.

    +/-4 G on 17,000 G = 2.4e-4 stability

    magnetbeam-measurement dg-027

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    This regulation system is capable of holding the 17,000 gauss field to within +/-4 gauss of its nominal value.

    The Iowa State University 1.5 MeV Undergraduate Cyclotron — p. 9

    Tabletop: Sets a concrete stability target for a home magnet supply: a few parts in 10^4, achievable with a shunt, op-amp and pass bank.

  28. Use an NMR (proton/lithium) magnetometer for absolute field, readable to 1 gauss, and reserve the Hall probe for mapping - a Hall gaussmeter alone is not accurate enough to set the resonance condition.

    NMR field meter resolution ~1 gauss on 17 kG

    magnetbeam-measurement dg-028

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    an instrument operating on the principle of nuclear magnetic resonance is used ... The instrument may be read easily to one gauss accuracy.

    The Iowa State University 1.5 MeV Undergraduate Cyclotron — p. 9-10

    Tabletop: A cheap DIY NMR gaussmeter (coil, oscillator, water sample) is a well-known amateur build and would let the builder set f = qB/2*pi*m exactly.

  29. Hold pole-gap parallelism to better than 0.005 in at any radius; gap-height error is field error.

    gap variation < 0.005 in over full pole

    magnetfabrication dg-029

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The pole gap is twenty-two inches, and, for any given radius, the gap variation is less than 0.005 inch.

    Argonne 60-inch cyclotron report — p. 10

    Tabletop: Scaled to the reference machine's 8 in poles and ~2 in gap, a few-thousandths flatness/parallelism spec is achievable on a decent mill and is the tolerance to ask a machinist for.

  30. Correct edge-region field falloff with 'Rose ring' shims - raised iron rings fastened near the pole periphery (ANL: 1/4 in thick x 2 in wide at 84-97% of pole radius) - plus external stacked pyramid discs (1/16 in steps) for the bulk profile.

    Rose rings 1/4 in x 2 in at r/R ~ 0.85-0.97; external shim pyramid of 1/16 in discs of decreasing radius

    magnet dg-030

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Magnetic shimming consists of internal Rose rings and external stepped shims... The rings are 1/4 inch thick and 2 inches wide.

    Argonne 60-inch cyclotron report — p. 10-11

    Tabletop: The classic two-knob shim architecture for extending the reference machine's flat-field region: perimeter ring for the edge, thin stacked discs for the interior gradient.

  31. Use low-carbon soft iron for all flux-path parts; the ANL forgings ran C 0.12%, Si 0.17%, P 0.014%, S 0.024%, Mn 0.39% - carbon is the impurity that most degrades permeability.

    C ~ 0.12% (low-carbon steel, 1010-1020 class or better)

    magnetmaterials dg-031

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The magnet yoke, poles and tips, acceleration chamber lids, and shims are of soft iron forgings with the impurity analysis as follows: Carbon 0.12%...

    Argonne 60-inch cyclotron report — p. 11

    Tabletop: A concrete steel spec to hand a supplier for Mark II yoke stock: 1010/1018-class low-carbon steel is fine; avoid high-carbon or unknown scrap for pole tips.

  32. Size the yoke return-path (arm) cross-section 25% larger than the pole so the arms run at only ~75% of pole flux density (1.2 T vs 1.6 T) and never saturate first.

    A_arm = 1.25 * A_pole -> B_arm = 0.8 * B_pole

    magnet dg-032

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the arms of the yoke carry a 25% smaller flux density than the maximum: only 1.2 T. This is achieved by increasing their cross-sectional area by 25%.

    cyclotron-master-document-09-09-012-3-00.pdf — p. 29

    Tabletop: A ready sizing ratio for a Mark II H-frame: make every return-path section at least 25% larger in area than the pole face.

  33. Machine a slight convex taper of about 0.02 inch from pole center to edge to create the radially decreasing field needed for weak (betatron) focusing.

    pole taper ~0.02 in (0.5 mm) center-to-edge

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-033

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    implement a .02'' convex taper from the center of the pole to the edge, to create sufficient bending of the magnetic field lines.

    cyclotron-master-document-09-09-012-3-00.pdf — p. 31

    Tabletop: A concrete starting number for 8-12 inch poles; the same 0.02 in figure was used on 12 inch poles at 1.6 T, so it scales directly to Mark II.

  34. Put a 45-degree chamfer on the pole edges to prevent local magnetic saturation at the corners and to soften the fringing field.

    45 deg edge taper

    magnetfabrication dg-034

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the edges of the pole have a 45 degree taper. This is to prevent magnetic saturation at the edges of the pole. The field due to the taper also fringes less sharply.

    cyclotron-master-document-09-09-012-3-00.pdf — p. 31

    Tabletop: Trivial machining step for Mark II pole tips that buys margin against edge saturation at higher fields.

  35. Expect and accept roughly 4-5% total field droop from center to full dee radius (1.64 T -> 1.57 T at 6 in) in a weak-focusing design; verify with a magnetostatic code like Poisson Superfish.

    dB ~ 0.08 T droop over 6 in radius at 1.6 T (~5%)

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-035

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    at a dee radius of 6'' the field is 1.57 T, a .08 T drop off from 1.64 T directly at the center.

    cyclotron-master-document-09-09-012-3-00.pdf — p. 31

    Tabletop: Gives the builder a sanity band for their own field maps: a few percent droop is by design, much more costs resonance synchronism.

  36. Size the coil from NI = B*g/mu0 using the gap alone; 1.6 T across a 2.13 in gap required 720 total turns at 110 A (~79 kA-turns).

    NI = B*g/mu0; example: 1.6 T x 0.054 m / mu0 ~ 6.9e4 A-turns (they used 720 x 110 A)

    magnetcoils dg-036

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    we used the basic equation for an electromagnet... we decided a 2.13'' gap a reasonable size... we then concluded that we needed 720 turns to reach 1.6T.

    cyclotron-master-document-09-09-012-3-00.pdf — p. 32

    Tabletop: Same sizing equation the reference machine's 538-turn magnet obeys; lets them trade gap, turns, and current for any Mark II target field on one line.

  37. Design the peak gap field no higher than about 1.6 T, since common iron/steel magnetically saturates near 1.7 T and further excitation is wasted.

    B_design <= 1.6 T; B_sat(1060 steel) ~ 1.7 T

    magnetmaterials dg-037

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Our magnet is constructed out of 1060 steel, which saturates at around 1.7 T; above this magnetic flux density the yoke is unaffected by further excitation.

    cyclotron-master-document-09-09-012-3-00.pdf — p. 6, 29

    Tabletop: Directly applicable: at 0.59 T the builder is far from saturation, but a Mark II pushing past ~1.5 T must budget yoke cross-sections against the 1.7 T ceiling.

  38. Use the permeance (magnetic Ohm's law) method for permanent-magnet circuits: judiciously divide external space into standard flux paths and sum permeances - total flux estimates come out within ~2% of computation, though local flux density may only be good to ~30%.

    Phi = F * P_total; total-flux accuracy ~2%, local B ~30%

    magnet dg-038

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    agreement to within less than two percent. In contrast, calculations of the flux density at Point G yield 0.39 T for the analogue method and 0.30 T for the computer

    ADA311457.pdf — p. 10-11

    Tabletop: If Mark II uses NdFeB anywhere (source magnets, PM cyclotron study), this back-of-envelope method sizes gap flux without FEA - but trust it for totals, not point fields.

  39. Clad the leakage surfaces of a permanent-magnet circuit with oppositely-polarized magnet material: in Leupold's horseshoe example cladding raised the gap field from 0.8 T to 2 T, and a 7 kg clad assembly outperformed a 55 kg unclad one (1.6 T) - but cladding pays only when leakage permeance dominates.

    clad: 0.8 T -> 2.0 T, 7 kg vs 55 kg; gain small (0.5->0.8 T) when gap dominates permeance

    magnet dg-039

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The latter has a gap field of 2 T, as compared with only 0.8 T for the unclad structure... 7 kg mass of such an assembly compared to the 55 kg required to produce only 1.6 T

    ADA311457.pdf — p. 15-16

    Tabletop: Mostly a curiosity at cyclotron-gap geometry (where the gap dominates and cladding gains little), but valuable for compact PM ion-source or steering assemblies.

  40. A Halbach 'magic cylinder' delivers a transverse bore field Bw = Br*ln(R2/R1); fields up to about twice the remanence (~2.0-2.5 T with NdFeB) are practicable, e.g. Br=1.2 T with 2.5 cm bore in a 15 cm OD gives 2.1 T with no power supply and no stray field.

    Bw = Br*ln(R2/R1); practical max ~2*Br

    magnet dg-040

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    fields of twice the material remanence should be practicable, namely 2.0 to 2.5 T... Bw = 1.2 ln(15/2.5) = 2.1 T

    ADA311457.pdf — p. 24-25

    Tabletop: Shows what PM technology can do at small bore: not a cyclotron gap replacement, but a zero-power option for beamline analysis/steering dipoles on a Mark II extracted beam.

  41. Open (non-enclosed) permanent magnet field sources are practical only when the required gap field is less than about half the material remanence; above that, flux confinement (cladding or closed yoke) is mandatory.

    B_gap,open <~ Br/2

    magnet dg-041

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    If the required fields are less than about half the remanence, open compact sources for fields in axially finite cavities can be made

    ADA311457.pdf — p. 33

    Tabletop: Quick feasibility screen: with Br ~ 1.3 T NdFeB, an open PM assembly tops out near ~0.6 T in a usable gap - marginally at the reference machine's current field, insufficient beyond.

  42. The infinite-permeability iron approximation used in permeance calculations fails when passive iron runs close to or above saturation - permeance bookkeeping is only valid for unsaturated pole pieces and yokes.

    magnetmaterials dg-042

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    When passive materials such as iron are operated close to or above saturation the approximation mu_p = infinity does not hold and the method of permeance estimation is not readily practicable.

    ADA311457.pdf — p. 6

    Tabletop: Same lesson as Tanabe from the PM side: all quick hand methods assume unsaturated iron, another reason to keep Mark II yoke flux under ~1.5 T.

  43. Prefer rare-earth magnets (NdFeB, Br/B0c ~ 1.05, near-linear demagnetization) over alnico: an REPM has one circuit-independent mmf, while an alnico's operating point walks down minor loops whenever the gap is widened or the magnet removed, permanently losing strength.

    magnetmaterials dg-043

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    no unique mmf can be assigned to a conventional permanent magnet... the magnet mmf will always be that corresponding to the lowest point on the demagnetization curve reached

    ADA311457.pdf — p. 8-10

    Tabletop: Practical warning: alnico horseshoe magnets salvaged for a PM gap lose field every time the circuit is opened for chamber access; NdFeB tolerates gap changes reversibly.

  44. For a permanent-magnet cyclotron the required PM material volume depends only on particle energy, gap height and PM working point - not on pole radius or average field - via (Bg*R)^2 = (Bm*mu*Hm)*Vm/(Lg*pi), and the PM works hardest at Bm = Hm = Br/2.

    Bg = (Bm*mu*Hm)*Vm/Vg; (Bg R)^2 = (Bm mu Hm) Vm/(Lg pi) ~ particle energy; max (Bm x Hm) at Bm = Hm = Br/2

    magnetmaterials dg-044

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    required volume of PM material depends only on particle energy, magnet gap and PM working point and doesn't depend on pole radius or average magnetic field value.

    MOLP09.PDF — p. 1

    Tabletop: Scaling law that makes a permanent-magnet Mark II thinkable: at ~1 MeV and a 2 cm gap the required NdFeB volume is a few percent of the 1 ton needed for 10 MeV.

  45. Take average field as high as iron saturation allows to minimize magnet size, then split it into strong hills and weak valleys for focusing: 1.4 T average from 2.3 T hills and 0.5 T valleys in a classical 4-sector, 45-degree geometry.

    <B> 1.4 T = 2.3 T hill / 0.5 T valley, 4 sectors of 45 deg, PM magnetization 1.23 T, pole dia 750 mm for 10 MeV

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-045

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    To minimize weight and size of magnet system the average magnetic field value has to be high, limited by iron saturation ... average magnetic field value was chosen as 1.4 T provided of 2.3 T and 0.5 T of hill and valley region fields

    MOLP09.PDF — p. 1

    Tabletop: The hill/valley ratio (~4.6:1) and 45-degree sector angle are directly scalable to an 8-12 inch AVF pole set; iron saturation, not coil power, is the ceiling.

  46. Choose the hill gap from beam intensity requirements and let the valley gap follow at about 5x that: 20 mm hill gap with a 100 mm valley gap for a 10 MeV PET cyclotron.

    hill gap 20 mm, valley gap 100 mm (5:1)

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-046

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    As hill gap providing enough beam intensity was chosen as 20 mm and then corresponding valley gap is 100 mm.

    MOLP09.PDF — p. 1

    Tabletop: Gives the gap ratio for a first AVF pole-tip design; a deep valley is also where an amateur puts the Dee/RF and pumping.

  47. Expect analytic/3-D calculations of average field to run a few per cent optimistic: measurement came out 5% below calculation, and the fix was reducing the valley gap from 100 mm to 70 mm while still fitting the RF cavity.

    calculated <B> 5% above measured; valley gap 100 mm -> 70 mm to recover design field

    magnetfabrication dg-047

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    disagreement with calculation was found as the calculation average field value is 5 % higher than measured one ... the valley gap height was reduced from 100 mm to 70 mm

    MOLP09.PDF — p. 2

    Tabletop: Design in adjustability (a gap or shim you can still reduce after measuring), because your FEMM answer will be a few percent optimistic too.

  48. Reach an isochronous field by iterating measurement with both pole cutting and shimming - five measure-and-machine steps were needed to converge on the design profile.

    5 measure/machine iterations from flat gap to isochronous <B>(r) over r = 0-36 cm

    magnetfabricationbeam-measurement dg-048

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Both cutting pole and shimming was applied to reach isochronous field. The resulting magnetic field strength is close to designed value and its shape is nearly isochronous

    MOLP09.PDF — p. 2

    Tabletop: Budget several map-machine-remap cycles for a Mark II pole profile; it is normal, not a sign of a bad design.

  49. For permanent-magnet designs, allow for a field temperature coefficient of about -0.07%/degC and residual field of ~560 gauss in the 'off' state; that residual is low enough that the magnet can still be disassembled by hand.

    dB/B = -0.07%/degC; residual field 560 G max at nominal-zero setting

    magnetmaterialssafety dg-049

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The temperature coefficient of gap magnetic field was measured as about -0.07%/0C. Such coefficient is acceptable for normal work of cyclotron.

    MOLP09.PDF — p. 2

    Tabletop: A PM cyclotron in an unheated garage will drift off resonance with the seasons: 10 degC swing = 0.7% field change, far more than the few-parts-in-10^4 the resonance wants.

  50. Eliminate the first harmonic of the field: an ion-source hole on one side only produced a first harmonic that grew radial oscillations to ~3 cm (risking the Qr-2Qz resonance), while the same field with the first harmonic removed gave <3 mm radial and <2 mm axial motion - the fix is a matching dummy hole on the opposite side.

    radial oscillation 30 mm with 1st harmonic vs 3 mm without; axial 2 mm; remedy: symmetric second hole opposite the ion source

    magnetbeam-dynamicsfabrication dg-050

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The reason for increased radial oscillations is big first harmonic of magnetic field, which caused by non-symmetric structure of central part of cyclotron magnet ... to make symmetric central magnet part by setup second hole on opposite side with respect to ion source hole.

    MOLP09.PDF — p. 2-3

    Tabletop: A ten-fold reduction in orbit wander for the cost of drilling a second, unused hole - directly applicable to any asymmetric feature in the reference machine's pole or chamber center.

  51. Dipole excitation per gap is NI = B*g/mu0, valid when iron path reluctance lambda/mu is negligible versus the gap; the exact form B_air = mu0*NI/(g + lambda/mu) shows when iron nearing saturation starts stealing amp-turns.

    B_air = mu0*NI/(g + lambda/mu) ~ mu0*NI/g

    magnetcoils dg-051

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Bair = mu0 NI / (g + lambda/mu); ... Approximation ignoring iron reluctance (lambda/mu << g): NI = B g /mu0

    Marks-3.pdf — p. 25

    Tabletop: The correction term is exactly what bends the reference machine's excitation curve at high current; measuring B vs I against this formula reveals where the yoke saturates.

  52. Choose yoke topology by trade-off: C-core gives easy access but needs pole shims and is less rigid; H-core is symmetric and rigid but still needs shims; window-frame gives the best field quality with no shims but worst access.

    magnet dg-052

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    'Window Frame' Advantages: High quality field; No pole shim; Symmetric & rigid; Disadvantages: Major access problems.

    Marks-3.pdf — p. 29, 31

    Tabletop: Confirms the reference machine's H-frame as the right middle choice for a cyclotron (needs chamber access on both sides), with shimming accepted as part of the deal.

  53. Add small ferromagnetic shims at the two pole edges to compensate the finite pole width; their area and shape are tuned specifically to cancel the 6-, 10-, 14-pole error harmonics that pole symmetry allows.

    shims cancel allowed harmonics n = 6, 10, 14, ... (dipole symmetry)

    magnet dg-053

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The 'shim' is a small, additional piece of ferro-magnetic material added on each side of the two poles... optimised to reduce the 6, 10, 14... pole error harmonics.

    Marks-3.pdf — p. 29, 37

    Tabletop: Edge shims are how Mark II can widen its flat-field fraction beyond the bare ~80% of pole radius without bigger poles.

  54. Judge dipole field quality with the plot (By(x)-By(0))/By(0); precision machines hold ~1e-4 over the good-field region, and a chart of the whole gap at +/-0.01% contours is the standard deliverable of a field computation.

    dB/B ~ +/-1e-4 (storage-ring grade); amateur target more like 1e-2-1e-3

    magnetbeam-measurement dg-054

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    typically +/- 1:104 within the 'good field region' of -12mm <= x <= +12 mm.

    Marks-3.pdf — p. 41, 43

    Tabletop: Sets the metric (not the number - a cyclotron needs far less) by which the builder should present their own field maps: normalized deviation over the beam region.

  55. Terminate high-field pole edges/ends with the Rogowski roll-off profile y = g/2 + (g/pi)*exp(pi*x/g - 1): it is the fastest gap increase that keeps surface flux density monotonically decreasing, i.e. no local saturation anywhere on the edge.

    y = g/2 + (g/pi)*exp((pi*x/g) - 1)

    magnet dg-055

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    This profile provides the maximum rate of increase in gap with a monotonic decrease in flux density at the surface ie no saturation

    Marks-3.pdf — p. 48-49

    Tabletop: The mathematically optimal version of the Cyclotron Kids' 45-degree chamfer; worth machining on Mark II pole edges if the builder pushes past ~1.4 T.

  56. Magnetic pressure is B^2/(2*mu0) - attractive along field lines, repulsive normal to them - and at 0.5 T it is already ~99.5 kPa = 14.4 psi, about one atmosphere pulling the poles together.

    P = B^2/(2*mu0); 0.5 T -> 99,472 N/m^2 ~ 1 atm

    magnetfabrication dg-056

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    pressure @ 0.5T 99,472 Newton/m2... ~ 1 atmosphere

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 10 — p. 10-11

    Tabletop: At the reference machine's 0.59 T the poles attract with ~1.4 atm over the 8 inch pole face (~4500 lbf) - clamps, chamber lids, and any pole-retraction scheme must be designed for that load.

  57. Estimate magnet stored energy as U = B^2/(2*mu0) * (gap volume) and inductance as L = 2U/I^2; the ramping voltage needed is V ~ B*N*a*L/dt, so turn count N is the only free knob for matching a power supply once field, gap, and ramp time are fixed.

    U = B^2/(2*mu0)*V_gap; L = 2U/I^2; V = B0*N*a*L/dt + IR

    magnetcoils dg-057

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Given the field = B0, pole width = a, Magnet Length = L and ramp time dt, the only design option available for changing the voltage is the number of turns, N.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 10 — p. 12-16

    Tabletop: Quick check on Mark II supply matching: stored energy in a 10 inch, 1 T, 5 cm gap magnet is ~100s of joules, and turns count trades current for voltage against whatever surplus supply the builder finds.

  58. Reduce unwanted fringe/leakage field primarily by making the yoke and return legs as thick as possible: the leaked field scales with (B_iron/mu) of the return path, so an unsaturated fat yoke leaks least.

    B_fringe ~ (B_iron/mu) * (L_iron/L_fringe)

    magnet dg-058

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    This reduction is accomplished by reducing the saturation by making the yoke and back leg of the septum magnet as thick as possible.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 10 — p. 17-19

    Tabletop: Justifies generous H-frame cross-section on the Mark II: extra return-path steel is the cheapest way to keep stray field away from ion gauges, turbo pumps and CRT-era instruments on the bench.

  59. The 3-D fringe field of an unchamfered dipole is longest at the pole center and shorter at the edges (roughly quadratic across the pole), so its integrated error looks like a sextupole; an approximately parabolic chamfer depth, found empirically, cancels it.

    fringe length ~ h at pole end, varying ~quadratically across width

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-059

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the fringe field is longer at the center of the magnet and drops off near the edges. This distribution is approximately quadratic and the integrated multipole field looks like a sextupole field.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 10 — p. 20-21

    Tabletop: Mostly relevant if the builder adds edge shaping for extraction: expect the field falloff at the pole rim to vary azimuthally with any non-axisymmetric pole feature, and fix it empirically with removable machined inserts.

  60. Generate the geometry point list in a spreadsheet (CONCATENATE the x,y columns into '$po x=..., y=...$' lines) rather than typing the deck by hand; and be aware POISSON's mesher is weak for detailed geometry.

    magnetfabrication dg-060

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the meshing package for POISSON is rather weak and often does not have the flexibility nor is robust enough to generate difficult detailed meshes easily.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 4 — p. 10, 19

    Tabletop: Saves hours on shim-profile studies where dozens of geometry variants are compared; also justifies using FEMM instead for fiddly shim shapes.

  61. Use the free LANL POISSON/PANDIRA/AUTOMESH/WFSPLOT chain for 2-D magnet cross-sections: AUTOMESH builds the mesh from a text file, POISSON relaxes the vector potential (PANDIRA diagonalizes instead), and WFSPLOT draws geometry and equipotentials.

    workflow: .am text file -> AUTOMESH -> Tape35 -> POISSON or PANDIRA -> WFSPLOT / OUTPOI

    magnetfabrication dg-061

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    It is a public access code (it's free), maintained under contract with DOE by Los Alamos National Accelerator Laboratory (LANL) personnel.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 4 — p. 2-4

    Tabletop: Free tool that runs on a PC and is the same code the Houghton thesis used - the standard amateur path to pole-profile design.

  62. Request a harmonic (Fourier) edit on a circle inside the good field region rather than eyeballing contours: e.g. ktype=121, nptc=31 points, rint=20 mm interpolation radius, rnorm=25 mm normalization, nterm=14 multipole terms.

    ktype=121, nptc=31, rint=20 mm, rnorm=25 mm, angle=90, nterm=14

    magnetbeam-measurement dg-062

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    nptc=31 means number of points on the circle, rint=20 means interpolation on 20 mm radius arc, rnorm=25 means multipole normalization at 25 mm ... nterm=14 means the maximum number of multipole terms.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 4 — p. 7

    Tabletop: Turns a simulation into the same harmonic numbers you get from a measured field map, so simulation and Hall-probe map can be compared directly.

  63. Exploit symmetry with the boundary condition flags nbsup/nbslo/nbsrt/nbslf, where 0 = Dirichlet (flux parallel) and 1 = Neumann (flux perpendicular); putting a Neumann condition on the median plane lets you model only half (or a quarter) of the magnet.

    nbsup, nbslo, nbsrt, nbslf: 0 = Dirichlet (flux parallel), 1 = Neumann (flux perpendicular)

    magnet dg-063

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    nbsup, nbslo, nbsrt and nbslf means the boundary condition at the upper, lower, right hand, and left hand boundaries. = 0 means Dirichlet (flux parallel) and =1 means Neumann (flux perpendicular) boundaries.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 4 — p. 8

    Tabletop: Halves the mesh and run time for the symmetric H-frame cross-section the builder would model.

  64. In a POISSON input deck, mat=1 is air/vacuum and mat=2 uses the built-in BH curve of a generic iron approximating 1010 steel, so a hobbyist modelling ordinary mild-steel plate can use the default material without measuring a BH curve.

    mat=1 air; mat=2 iron (generic BH ~ 1010 steel); mode=0 selects finite permeability from a table

    magnetmaterials dg-064

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The iron yoke area uses mat=2, which uses the BH curve for a 'generic' iron whose magnetic properties approximate the behavior of 1010 steel.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 4 — p. 9

    Tabletop: Removes the main excuse for not simulating: home-built yokes are usually A36/1018 mild steel and the default curve is close enough for first-pass design.

  65. Define coil regions by a closed polygon with cur = total ampere-turns (sign sets flux direction: negative current in the right-hand coil gives positive flux on the horizontal centerline); every region polygon must close, first point equal to last.

    $reg mat=1 cur=-20000$ for a 20,000 A-turn coil block; all $po ... $ region polygons must close

    magnetcoils dg-065

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Note that all regions must close, that is the first and last coordinates are equal ... Negative currents in the right hand coil gives positive flux on the horizontal centerline.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 4 — p. 9

    Tabletop: The two mistakes that make a first POISSON run fail; also shows amp-turns (not turns and amps separately) are what the model needs.

  66. Compute dipole excitation as NI = B*h/mu0 divided by an efficiency of about 0.98 - a well-designed iron yoke eats only ~2% of the MMF.

    NI = B0*h/(mu0*eta), eta ~ 0.98

    magnetcoils dg-066

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    efficiency ~ 0.98 For magnets with well designed yokes.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 6 — p. 4-6, 12

    Tabletop: Lets the builder size Mark II amp-turns to ~2% accuracy with hand arithmetic before any FEA.

  67. If a core is glued or laminated, electrically bond all laminations with a small weld bead and ground the core at a single point to avoid floating/looping ground paths.

    magnetsafetyfabrication dg-067

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    It is necessary to add a small weld bead, electrically connecting all the laminations. The core can then be grounded to a single ground point.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 8 — p. 23

    Tabletop: Single-point grounding of the yoke also matters on a solid-core machine carrying RF and HV nearby - one deliberate ground, no accidental loops.

  68. Never route the magnet's electrical bus so the supply conductors form a loop around the beam path - the loop makes a stray solenoidal field that rotates the beam; run feed and return conductors close together.

    magnetcoils dg-068

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The electrical bussing connection creates a loop around the beam line, resulting in a small solenoidal field... the in and out conductors should be placed close to each other.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 8 — p. 24-26

    Tabletop: Cheap to get right on Mark II: dress the coil leads as a twisted/adjacent pair and keep supply cables from encircling the chamber.

  69. Accelerator magnet alignment norms: hold transverse and vertical position to about +/-250 um, longitudinal to +/-500 um, and roll/pitch/yaw to +/-0.2 mrad - and build the fiducials and adjusters in from the start, because retrofit is prohibitively expensive.

    +/-250 um transverse/vertical; +/-500 um longitudinal; +/-0.2 mrad rotations

    magnetfabrication dg-069

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Magnet alignment specifications... typically call for < +250 um precision transversely and vertically and < +500 um longitudinally... The cost of retrofit is high.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 8 — p. 3, 27

    Tabletop: For a single-magnet cyclotron the numbers relax, but the lesson holds: machine reference flats and leveling features into the Mark II yoke before assembly.

  70. Support a magnet kinematically with exactly six linearly independent constraints (six-strut or three-block scheme): three vertical (y, pitch, roll), two longitudinal (z, yaw), one transverse (x) - more supports overconstrain, fewer underconstrain.

    6 supports = 3 vertical + 2 longitudinal + 1 transverse

    magnetfabrication dg-070

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    A true kinematic support system must have at least and at most six linearly independent supports.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 8 — p. 38-41

    Tabletop: A Mark II stand with three adjustable feet plus lateral stops gives repeatable leveling of the median plane without fighting a warped frame.

  71. For a DC magnet with a simple flat pole contour, a solid machined core is appropriate; choose laminations only for time-varying fields or when magnet-to-magnet reproducibility across a family matters (lamination economics: ~$50k die set, ~$1/lamination, 2-4 man-days stacking per core).

    die set ~50 k$; ~$1/lamination; 2-4 man-days/core assembly

    magnetfabrication dg-071

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Solid iron yokes are often used in simple, flat pole contour magnets.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 8 — p. 4-5

    Tabletop: Settles the question for Mark II: a one-off DC cyclotron magnet should be solid steel; laminations buy nothing at quantity one.

  72. Iron B-H properties vary with carbon content from heat to heat, with position in the pour, and with rolling direction - order non-oriented steel, and cut all flux-path pieces for one magnet from the same heat/plate when possible.

    materialsmagnet dg-072

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The BH characteristics of iron are variable and depend on the chemistry of the iron (dominated by the Carbon content, which is highly variable from heat to heat).

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 8 — p. 7, 9

    Tabletop: Practical purchasing rule: buy Mark II pole and yoke stock as one lot from one heat, and expect top/bottom asymmetry if pieces come from different sources.

  73. Cover or tape coils against personnel contact whenever I*V > 150 VA, or I > 30 A, or V > 130 V, or stored magnetic energy > 5 J; ground every core, and attach removable cover sections with at least four screws.

    thresholds: 150 VA, 30 A, 130 V, 5 J stored energy

    safetymagnet dg-073

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    IV > 150 V-Amperes or I > 30 Amps or V > 130 Volts or when the magnet stored energy is > 5 joules.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 9 — p. 12-13

    Tabletop: The reference machine's magnet exceeds several of these thresholds; a simple sheet-metal or polycarbonate coil cover including the hot cooling fittings brings the machine to lab-standard electrical safety.

  74. Set the isochronous shim correction from the measured orbital-frequency error using dB(r)/B(r) = gamma(r)^2 * df_p(r)/f_p(r) - shim the field by the square of gamma times the fractional frequency error at each radius.

    dB(r)/B(r) = gamma(r)^2 * df_p(r)/f_p(r)

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-074

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Shimming of pole edges or shims based on equation: dB(r)/B(r) = gamma(r)^2 * df_p(r)/f_p(r)

    Zaremba.pdf — p. 10

    Tabletop: At 160 keV-1 MeV gamma ~ 1.0002-1.001, so isochronism errors are dominated by mechanical field errors, not relativity - this formula converts the reference machine's measured phase-slip vs radius directly into required shim thickness profile.

  75. Start every cyclotron magnet from the rigidity relation B*rho = sqrt(T^2 + 2*T*E0)/(300*Z) (B in tesla, rho in m, T and rest energy E0 in MeV) to fix the field-radius product before any geometry is drawn.

    B*rho = sqrt(T^2 + 2*T*E0)/(300*Z)

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-075

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The maximum kinetic energy T determines magnetic rigidity: B*rho = sqrt(T^2+2T*E0)/(300*Z)

    Zaremba.pdf — p. 19

    Tabletop: For 1 MeV protons B*rho = 0.145 T*m: at 1 T that is a 14.5 cm final orbit radius, which immediately sizes the Mark II pole diameter (with overhang and fringe allowances added).

  76. Choose the pole gap as a compromise: a small gap cuts the ampere-turns and lets orbits run close to the pole edge, while a large gap buys space for ion source, probes, and easier vacuum pumping at the price of field and power.

    magnetchamber dg-076

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    small gap: reduced number of At of coils, pole radius reduced, orbits close to outer edge; large gap: large space: injection, extraction, probes, easier vacuum pumping

    Zaremba.pdf — p. 22

    Tabletop: Frames the central Mark II tradeoff: shrinking the reference machine's gap raises B for the same 538 turns, but everything (dee aperture, ion source, probe) must still fit and pump through it.

  77. Before freezing magnet geometry, check the design against every subsystem it must host: RF system, vacuum pumping, ion source/injection, extraction or internal target, and diagnostic probes.

    magnetrfvacuumion-source dg-077

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Cyclotron magnet design should always consider interaction with subsystems: RF system, vacuum pumping, ion source or injection system, extraction system or internal target, diagnostic probes.

    Zaremba.pdf — p. 3, 45

    Tabletop: The most common amateur failure mode is a magnet that works but leaves no port for the probe or pump; run this five-item checklist on every Mark II layout iteration.

  78. Do first-pass cyclotron magnet numbers analytically: average field <B> = alpha*B_hill + (1-alpha)*B_valley (alpha = pole azimuthal fraction), flutter F = alpha(1-alpha)(B_hill-B_valley)^2/<B>^2, total flux Phi = B_hill*S_poles, NI from Ampere's law, and coil cooling dT(C) = 60*P(kW)/(4.19*N(l/min)).

    dT(C) = 60*P(kW)/(4.19*N(l/min)); F = alpha(1-alpha)(Bh-Bv)^2/<B>^2

    magnetcoilsbeam-dynamics dg-078

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    coil cooling estimation: dT(C) = 60*P(kW)/(4.19*N(l/min))

    Zaremba.pdf — p. 30-32

    Tabletop: The cooling formula is immediately usable: a 5 kW Mark II coil at 4 L/min runs ~18 C water rise; the flutter formulas matter only if the builder adds sector (AVF) pole faces.

  79. If using sectored (AVF) poles, a hill fraction k = 0.5 gives best RF efficiency (most valley room for dees); increase toward k ~ 0.67 (60-degree hills) only to shrink machine diameter, and design to a vertical tune around nu_z ~ 0.2.

    k = hill angle/period; k=0.5 best for RF, IBA chose k=0.67, nu_z ~ 0.2

    magnetbeam-dynamicsrf dg-079

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    For best RF efficiency, k=0.5 BUT to decrease machine dimensions k >0.5 (more hill, thus more field) CHOICE : k=0.67 (60 deg hills)... CHOICE : nu_z = 0.2

    Zaremba.pdf — p. 32-33

    Tabletop: If Mark II goes AVF to escape the weak-focusing energy ceiling, these are proven starting numbers: 3 or 4 sectors, half-open valleys, and a modest nu_z ~ 0.2 target.

  80. Follow the iterative magnet design loop: rough model, hand calculations, 2-D field code, then 3-D field code - and expect a good 3-D model to agree with measurement to better than 3%.

    3-D calculation vs measurement < 3%

    magnet dg-080

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    calculation results and measurements differ less than 3 percent

    Zaremba.pdf — p. 4, 35

    Tabletop: The reference machine's Poisson/FEMM workflow is the professional one; a >3% mismatch between model and Hall-probe map means the model geometry or BH data is wrong, not the method.

  81. Target field homogeneity of dB/B <= 0.01% over the good field region of a dipole (0.1% for a quadrupole gradient) - 'reasonable but nevertheless challenging'.

    dipole: (By(x,y)-By(0,0))/By(0,0) <= 0.01%

    magnet dg-081

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Achieving the following homogeneity values is reasonable but nevertheless challenging. Dipole: dB/B0 <= 0.01%

    arXiv:1103.1119 — p. 10

    Tabletop: A useful upper bar; a weak-focusing cyclotron deliberately wants a controlled radial gradient, but azimuthal variation should be held near this level to avoid a first harmonic.

  82. Build the aperture budget as: good field region + vacuum chamber wall (0.3-2 mm) + installation/alignment margin (0-5 mm), with 5-10 mm extra allowed for orbit distortion in the good field region itself.

    aperture = GFR + chamber wall (0.3-2 mm) + margin (0-5 mm); GFR includes 5-10 mm closed-orbit allowance

    magnetchambervacuum dg-082

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The total required aperture size is the sum of the good field region, the vacuum chamber thickness (0.3-2 mm) and a margin for installation and alignment (0-5 mm).

    arXiv:1103.1119 — p. 14

    Tabletop: Explains why the pole gap must exceed the chamber's internal height by a centimetre or so; useful when trading gap (and hence amp-turns) against chamber wall thickness.

  83. Compute the required excitation directly from the gap: NI per pole = B*h/(2*eta*mu0), with efficiency eta typically 99% for a well-designed iron circuit - pole area does not enter.

    NI_per_pole = B*h/(2*eta*mu0); eta ~ 0.99; mu0 = 4*pi*1e-7

    magnetcoils dg-083

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    where h is the magnet gap height in [m] ... eta is the efficiency (typically 99%), mu_0 is the permeability of free space ... Note that Eq. (5) is only approximate and neglects fringe fields and iron saturation.

    arXiv:1103.1119 — p. 15

    Tabletop: First-cut sizing for Mark II: at a 2 cm gap and 1.0 T you need ~8000 A-turns per pole, which sets conductor/current density before any FEMM run.

  84. Size the iron cross-section so the flux density in the yoke stays below 1.5 T and the yoke reluctance is under about 1% of the gap reluctance (lambda/mu_iron < 0.01 h/mu0); follow this and circuit efficiency exceeds 99%.

    B_iron < 1.5 T; lambda/mu_iron < 0.01 * h/mu0 -> eta > 99%

    magnetmaterials dg-084

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    It is good practice to keep the iron yoke reluctance smaller than a few per cent of air reluctance ... such that the magnetic flux in the iron remains smaller than 1.5 T ... the efficiency is better than 99%.

    arXiv:1103.1119 — p. 15

    Tabletop: The single most useful yoke-sizing rule for an H-frame homebuilt magnet: pick return-leg area = flux/1.5 T and the magnet behaves predictably.

  85. Approximate the magnetic (effective) length as l_mag = l_iron + 2*h*k with k between 0.3 and 0.6; k shrinks when pole width is smaller than the gap, when poles saturate, or when coil heads sit close to the beam.

    l_mag = l_iron + 2 h k, k = 0.3-0.6

    magnet dg-085

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    l_mag = l_iron + 2hk ... Typical values of k are between 0.3 and 0.6. A precise determination of k is only possible with measurements or numerical calculations.

    arXiv:1103.1119 — p. 16

    Tabletop: Quantifies the fringe-field bulge at the pole edge - the region where a tabletop cyclotron's outermost orbits actually live.

  86. Estimate the total flux the return yoke must carry as Phi = B_gap * (w + 2h) * l_mag, where w is pole width and h the gap - i.e. add one gap-height of stray flux on each side of the pole.

    Phi ~= B_gap (w + 2h) l_mag

    magnet dg-086

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Total flux in the return yoke is Phi = integral B da ~= B_gap (w + 2h) l_mag ... where h is the gap height and w the pole width.

    arXiv:1103.1119 — p. 17

    Tabletop: For an 8-inch pole with a 1-inch gap this says design the yoke for ~25% more flux than the naive pole-area estimate.

  87. Estimate stored energy (hence inductance L = 2U/I^2 and supply voltage) for a simple gap magnet as U = B^2/(2mu0) * (V_gap + 2*V_coil/6 + V_yoke/mu_r).

    U_magnet = B^2/(2 mu0) (V_gap + 2 V_coil/6 + V_yoke/mu_r); L = 2U/I^2; V_tot = RI + L dI/dt

    magnetcoils dg-087

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    U_magnet = U_gap + 2 U_coil + U_yoke = B^2/(2 mu_0) (V_gap + 2 V_coil/6 + (1/mu_r) V_yoke)

    arXiv:1103.1119 — p. 18

    Tabletop: Tells you the inductance and therefore how fast a bench supply can ramp the magnet and how big the flyback/crowbar protection must be.

  88. Choose magnet topology by field quality: window-frame gives homogeneous field even without shims, H-magnets are symmetric and lighter than C-magnets but need transverse shims, and a C-magnet inherently produces a ~0.1% gradient across the pole plus 'forbidden' even harmonics.

    C-magnet: ~0.1% gradient across pole vs central field, harmonics n = 2,4,6

    magnet dg-088

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Typically, the dipole produces a gradient across the pole of 0.1% with respect to the central field ... the window-frame design provides a very homogenous field quality even without shims.

    arXiv:1103.1119 — p. 18-20

    Tabletop: Validates the reference machine's H-frame choice for a cyclotron (two-fold symmetry, lighter than a C) and warns that shimming will still be needed.

  89. For yoke steel use cold-rolled non-grain-oriented electro-steel (EN 10106) with sheet 0.3-1.5 mm, coercivity Hc < 65 A/m (spread < +/-10 A/m); solid yokes cannot be pulsed and, if used, all parts should come from the same melt for reproducibility.

    sheet 0.3-1.5 mm; density 7.60-7.85 kg/dm3; Hc < 65 A/m; dHc < +/-10 A/m; resistivity 0.16-0.61 uOhm*m

    magnetmaterials dg-089

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Sheet thickness 0.3 <= t <= 1.5 mm ... Coercivity Hc < 65 A/m ... Coercivity spread dHc < +/- 10 A/m

    arXiv:1103.1119 — p. 23

    Tabletop: For a DC cyclotron magnet solid mild steel is fine, but this gives the numeric target for 'good' steel and explains why scrap-plate yokes vary.

  90. Always cycle the magnet up to maximum current before settling at the operating field, whatever field you need, so hysteresis and remanence are reproducible; zero the field with demagnetization cycles rather than by trusting zero current.

    magnetbeam-measurement dg-090

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    In normal operation, the magnet is always cycled to its maximum value, irrespective of the required field, to ensure that hysteresis effects are reproducible.

    arXiv:1103.1119 — p. 26

    Tabletop: Free operational fix for run-to-run field shifts in a home cyclotron - important because resonance is set by B and the beam vanishes on a few-gauss error.

  91. Estimate the mean turn length as l_avg = pole perimeter + 8 x (clearance between pole and coil) + 4 x coil width, and sanity-check it against 2.5*l_iron < l_avg < 3*l_iron for racetrack coils.

    l_avg = pole perimeter + 8*clearance + 4*coil width; 2.5 l_iron < l_avg < 3 l_iron

    coilsmagnet dg-091

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    l_avg = pole perimeter + 8 x clearance between pole and coil + 4 x coil width

    arXiv:1103.1119 — p. 27, 33

    Tabletop: Gives copper length, hence resistance and power, straight off a sketch - exactly what a garage builder needs before ordering tubing.

  92. Pick current density from the cooling method: <=1 A/mm^2 for bulky air-cooled coils buried in the yoke, <2 A/mm^2 for small thin air-cooled coils, and ~10 A/mm^2 as the conservative standard for direct water-cooled hollow conductor (80 A/mm^2 is possible but wrecks reliability).

    air: j <= 1-2 A/mm^2; water: j ~ 2-10 A/mm^2; j > 10 A/mm^2 implies multiple parallel circuits and erosion risk

    coilsmagnet dg-092

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the maximum current density for voluminous coils which are almost entirely enclosed in the magnet yoke should not exceed 1 A/mm2 ... The current density in direct water-cooled coils can be typically as high as 10 A/mm2.

    arXiv:1103.1119 — p. 28-29, 31

    Tabletop: The reference machine's 538-turn solid copper tubing coils sit in the air-cooled regime; this rule says they must stay under ~1-2 A/mm^2 unless they switch to hollow conductor with water flow.

  93. Design water cooling to keep coolant velocity turbulent but below 5 m/s (Re > 4000), coil surface below 60 C, and water temperature rise <= 30 C from a 30 C inlet, with 0.1-1.0 MPa (1-10 bar) available pressure drop.

    u_avg <= 5 m/s; Re > 4000; dT <= 30 C; T_surface < 60 C; dp = 0.1-1.0 MPa

    coilsmagnetsafety dg-093

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The velocity of the cooling medium ... should be sufficiently high to guarantee a turbulent flow but low enough (u_avg <= 5 m/s) to avoid erosion and vibration. A maximum permitted temperature of less than 60 C on the coil surfaces was found to be good practice.

    arXiv:1103.1119 — p. 31

    Tabletop: Gives hard numbers for a home chilled-water loop: exceed 5 m/s and you erode the tubing; exceed 60 C and the insulation ages fast.

  94. Use the closed-form water-cooling recipe: flow Q[l/s] = 2.388e-4 * P/dT, temperature rise dT = 3.04e-7 * P/(u_avg d^2), and required bore d = 5.59e-3 * (P/(dT*Kw))^0.368 * (l/dp)^0.21.

    Q = 2.388e-4 P/dT; dT = 3.04e-7 P/(u d^2); d = 5.59e-3 (P/(dT Kw))^0.368 (l/dp)^0.21; u_avg = 0.3926 d^0.714 (dp/l)^0.571

    coilsmagnet dg-094

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Q_water = 2.388 x 10^-4 P/dT ... d = 5.59 x 10^-3 (P/(dT Kw))^0.368 (l/dp)^0.21

    arXiv:1103.1119 — p. 32-34

    Tabletop: Lets the builder compute the hollow-conductor bore and pump requirement for a 5-20 kW Mark II magnet with a spreadsheet, no CFD.

  95. Compute dipole excitation as NI = B*h/(eta*mu0) with magnet efficiency eta ~= 98% for a well-designed unsaturated yoke (the iron path costs only ~1-2% extra ampere-turns when mu_iron >= 1000 and L_iron <= 10h).

    NI_dipole = B*h/(eta*mu0), eta ~ 0.98

    magnetcoils dg-095

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    NI_dipole = Bh/(eta*mu0), where the magnet efficiency, eta... The magnet efficiency for a well designed yoke is eta >= 98%.

    slac-r-754.pdf — p. 116-117, 129

    Tabletop: One-line check of the reference machine's 538 turns: at 0.59 T and their gap this formula predicts the required current within a couple percent if the H-frame iron is unsaturated; a measured efficiency well below ~95% signals a saturated or gappy flux path.

  96. Choose magnet steel with carbon <= 0.10% (1010 steel); its BH curve becomes highly nonlinear above B ~ 1.5 T and is fully saturated (mu -> 1) by B ~ 2.0 T, so keep working iron flux density below ~1.5 T for linear, reproducible excitation.

    1010 steel: nonlinear for B >= 1.5 T, fully saturated at B >= 2.0 T

    magnetmaterials dg-096

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The BH relationship becomes highly nonlinear at B >= 1.5 Tesla and the material exhibits fully saturated behavior at B >= 2.0 Tesla.

    slac-r-754.pdf — p. 249-251

    Tabletop: Sets the iron budget for the Mark II: yoke and pole cross-sections should be sized so flux density stays under ~1.5 T anywhere on the return path, and pole-tip fields much above 1.8 T are not worth chasing with iron.

  97. Good 2-D dipole practice: taper the pole so it is wider at the root, use a wide coil slot rather than a narrow one, and put a radius on the pole corner - all three prevent local saturation that makes field shape change with excitation.

    magnetfabrication dg-097

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    At high fields, the top of the pole can saturate. The right hand figure illustrates a tapered pole which is wider at the top... a radius at the pole corner, reducing this magnetic flux stress concentration.

    slac-r-754.pdf — p. 251-252

    Tabletop: Cheap insurance for the Mark II pole design: a root taper and corner radius cost one lathe operation and keep the field map valid from low current to full excitation.

  98. Assume the fringe field extends about one half-gap h beyond the steel pole edge of a dipole (h/2 for a quadrupole of pole radius h); the pole steel therefore ends about one half-gap inside where the field effectively ends.

    L_fringe ~ h (dipole), ~h/2 (quad), ~h/3 (sextupole)

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-098

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    A general rule of thumb is that the length of the fringe field beyond the edge of the steel pole tip is = h, = h/2, or = h/3, for the dipole, quadrupole or sextupole

    slac-r-754.pdf — p. 252-253

    Tabletop: Tells the builder where their usable field really stops on an 8 inch pole: with a ~2 inch gap the field is already dying ~1 inch inside the pole edge, which sets the practical maximum orbit radius and extraction geometry.

  99. When end-chamfering poles to fix the integrated field, machine the computed depth distribution at a 45 degree angle - the angle itself is unimportant, but 45 degrees splits the corner into two equal half-angles and minimizes local saturation.

    chamfer depth Delta-z(x) from measured Leff(x); cut angle 45 deg

    magnetfabrication dg-099

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The angle of the cut is unimportant. However, a 45 degree angle cut is convenient and distributes the same angle at two points and minimizes saturation effects due to the sharp corners.

    slac-r-754.pdf — p. 253-254

    Tabletop: If the Mark II pole edge is chamfered or radiused to soften the field falloff for extraction, use ~45 degrees and bolt-on machinable end pieces so the shape can be iterated (Tanabe converged in two iterations on SPEAR3).

  100. Improve dipole field flatness by adding smooth bumps (shims) near the pole edges rather than widening the pole; the bumps squeeze flux through a locally narrower gap and extend the uniform-field fraction of the aperture while reducing corner saturation.

    magnet dg-100

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the field quality can be improved by adding smooth bumps near the edge of the pole, causing the flow lines to squeeze through a narrower gap

    slac-r-754.pdf — p. 63-65

    Tabletop: The classic Rose-shim trick: a machined or stacked-shim ring at the edge of the 8 inch poles buys field uniformity (and hence more usable radius) far more cheaply than a bigger magnet.

  101. Size dipole pole width by adding pole overhang beyond the good-field region: for an optimized (edge-bumped) pole, overhang a = h*(-0.14*ln(dB/B) - 0.25); for a flat unoptimized pole, a = h*(-0.36*ln(dB/B) - 0.90), where h is the half gap.

    x=a/h; optimized: dB/B=(1/100)exp[-7.17(x-0.39)]; unoptimized: dB/B=(1/100)exp[-2.77(x-0.75)]

    magnet dg-101

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The canonical expressions... are used to estimate the amount of pole overhang required to achieve a desired field quality... for both unoptimized and optimized pole contours.

    slac-r-754.pdf — p. 64-66

    Tabletop: Directly sizes how much of the reference machine's 8-12 inch pole diameter is usable good field; e.g. for dB/B=1e-3 an unoptimized pole needs ~1.6 half-gaps of extra pole beyond the outermost useful orbit.

  102. Do not use plain radial-sector pole tips on a small machine: measured on the Rutgers 12-inch, radial sectors give the steepest average-field falloff with radius - so steep it is unusable - while spiral sectors compromise between usable average field and roughly triple the weak-focusing axial tune.

    weak focusing: flattest <B>(r); radial sector: largest falloff (unusable); spiral sector: intermediate, ~3x weak-focus nu_z at small radii

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-102

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the radial sector poletips have the greatest average falloff - so great that it amounts to be an unusable field. The spiral sector AVF field is a compromise between the two.

    Rutgers 12-inch cyclotron, magnetic field mapping notes (2015) — p. 10

    Tabletop: Direct guidance for a Mark II pole-tip upgrade at the 8-12 inch scale; also warns that narrow spiral vanes saturate at large radius (measured field fell below simulation).

  103. Screen candidate pole-tip designs with just two numbers derived from the 2-D map - average field vs radius (isochronism) and axial tune from nu_z^2 = n + F^2 N^2/(N^2-1) - and reserve full phase-space tracking for the final one or two contenders.

    nu_z^2 ~= n + F^2 (N^2/(N^2-1)); n = field index, F = flutter, N = AVF periodicity

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-103

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    this analysis approach can be used to quickly assess a field during design, relegating the laborious task of phase space mapping and determining the limits of stability to the few the final contenders.

    Rutgers 12-inch cyclotron, magnetic field mapping notes (2015) — p. 10-11

    Tabletop: A cheap, quantitative design filter that works from measured maps of a home-built magnet, no orbit code required.

  104. Build the mapping stage for ~800 steps/inch (1.8 deg/step motor on a 0.25 in-pitch double-lead screw), run the steppers at 25% of rated current with ramped velocity, and take readings only while moving in the forward direction to kill backlash.

    800 steps/inch = 200 steps/rev / 0.25 in pitch; motor current = 25% rated

    magnetbeam-measurementfabrication dg-104

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The aggregate of lead screw pitch and motor resolution correlates to 800 steps per inch. To further minimize the potential for backlash, field measurements are only made while stages are moving in the 'forward' direction.

    Rutgers 12-inch cyclotron, magnetic field mapping notes (2015) — p. 2

    Tabletop: A 1/800 inch (0.03 mm) grid is more than enough for an 8-12 inch pole and is buildable from surplus stepper/leadscrew parts.

  105. Set the Hall-probe dwell time after each stage move empirically: step through dwell times in 0.5 s increments along the steepest field gradient and use the first value where successive profiles differ by less than the stationary noise (Rutgers found no difference above 2.0-2.5 s and used 3 s).

    dwell = 3 s (0-0.5 s dwell gave >1% profile error; 2.0 s and 2.5 s indistinguishable)

    magnetbeam-measurement dg-105

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    There are field profile differences in excess of 1% between zero of half-second dwell times. However, there is no measureable difference between dwell times of 2.5 and 2.0 seconds.

    Rutgers 12-inch cyclotron, magnetic field mapping notes (2015) — p. 3

    Tabletop: Directly applicable: any DIY gaussmeter-plus-stepper mapper on an 8-inch magnet needs this calibration or the map carries 1% systematic error.

  106. Fiducialize the field map with five small excited iron needles placed on a known circle around the pole: four to calibrate x and y scale, and a fifth off-symmetry to resolve the axis-inversion ambiguity that plotting software introduces; locate each bump by fitting a 2-D Gaussian.

    5 needle bumps, <100 gauss each, measured with main magnet de-energized; bump-pair spacing recovered as 2.500 in vs 2.500 in mechanical

    magnetbeam-measurement dg-106

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Four needles were used to scale both dimensions; the fifth needle was used to break the symmetry, removing orientation ambiguities.

    Rutgers 12-inch cyclotron, magnetic field mapping notes (2015) — p. 3-4

    Tabletop: Trivially cheap (iron nails plus a few turns of magnet wire) and it ties the field map to the mechanical chamber center, which is what you actually need for placing the ion source and target.

  107. Before trusting a two-scan (magnet-off then magnet-on) mapping procedure, prove stage repeatability: Rutgers ran 100 cycles of 15 one-inch forward increments plus a 15-inch return (1600 moves, 2.4 million steps) and the carriage returned within the 0.0000-inch resolution of a digital dial indicator.

    1600 travel manipulations / 2.4e6 motor steps -> return error < 0.0001 in

    magnetbeam-measurementfabrication dg-107

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    After 1600 travel manipulations were executed by 2.4 million motor steps, the probe carriage reproducibly returned back to the distal point within the digital dial indicator's resolution of 0.0000 inches

    Rutgers 12-inch cyclotron, magnetic field mapping notes (2015) — p. 4

    Tabletop: Cheap insurance: an afternoon of cycling the homemade stage validates every field map you take afterwards.

  108. Find the magnetic center of a weak-focusing (azimuthally symmetric) map by plotting Bz around trial reference circles, sweeping the circle center in x then y, and taking the minimum of a parabola fit to the standard deviation; iterate until the center shifts by less than the data noise.

    minimize sigma(Bz) around circle vs center position; Rutgers centers from different radii agreed to 1e-4

    magnetbeam-measurement dg-108

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the sequence of standard deviations was fit to a parabola from which the minimum standard deviation, i.e. the center locations, could be inferred ... the centers of each measurement circle were found to be coincident to 10-4.

    Rutgers 12-inch cyclotron, magnetic field mapping notes (2015) — p. 5-6

    Tabletop: Exactly the analysis the builder needs for a symmetric-pole Mark II: it also tells you how far the magnetic center sits from the mechanical center of the chamber.

  109. For an AVF (sectored) field, pick a reference circle of about half the maximum ion radius, FFT Bz around it, and move the circle center to maximize the Nth harmonic (N = number of hill/valley pairs) while minimizing harmonics 2, 3 and 5.

    reference circle radius = 0.5 x r_max (2.5 in for a 5 in max ion radius); maximize 4th harmonic for a 4-fold AVF

    magnetbeam-measurementbeam-dynamics dg-109

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    we choose a reference circle to have a radius half that of the maximum ion radius ... the reference circle is swept to maximize the 4th harmonic, while minimizing the second, third, and fifth.

    Rutgers 12-inch cyclotron, magnetic field mapping notes (2015) — p. 6-7

    Tabletop: Applies if Mark II moves to sectored pole tips; on a 12-inch machine the whole analysis is a spreadsheet/Octave job on the map you already took.

  110. Ferromagnetic yokes stop paying off above saturation (~2 T): effective permeability collapses toward 1 and the field pattern reverts to that of the bare coil - iron-dominated designs should stay comfortably below 2 T.

    mu_r -> 1 for B >> ~2 T

    magnetmaterials dg-110

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    ferromagnetic materials lose their advantages above their saturation field (typically 2 T).

    ParticleAccelerators8275.pdf — p. 104, 108

    Tabletop: Defines the absolute ceiling of the iron-magnet approach for Mark II (~1.6-1.8 T practical); beyond that only superconductors or air-core help.

  111. First-order coil sizing: producing 1 T across a 2 cm gap requires ~16 kA-turns (e.g. 160 turns at 100 A); for a given supply and winding, gap field is inversely proportional to pole spacing.

    NI = B*g/mu0; 1 T x 0.02 m -> 1.6e4 A-turns

    magnetcoils dg-111

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    production of a field of 1 T in a gap with a 0.02 m spacing requires 16-kA turns (160 turns of wire if a 100-A supply is available).

    ParticleAccelerators8275.pdf — p. 111

    Tabletop: Numerically the same worked example the builder needs: their 538 turns at ~30 A across ~5 cm predicts ~0.4 T ideal - the shortfall vs measured maps the iron's contribution.

  112. Fringe and deflection fields extend beyond a gap or electrode pair a distance comparable to the gap/electrode spacing itself (Laplace-equation scale length) - this sets fringe allowance at pole edges and is why extraction requires a septum to terminate the deflector field.

    fringe extent ~ gap width g

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-112

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The vertical field magnitude decreases away from the magnet over a scale length comparable to the gap width.

    ParticleAccelerators8275.pdf — p. 140, 526

    Tabletop: Rule of thumb for Mark II layout: reserve roughly one gap-height of radius at the pole edge as unusable fringe, and shield any deflector with a grounded septum.

  113. An inclined sector-magnet edge focuses vertically with focal length f = r_g/tan(beta) (r_g = gyroradius, beta = edge angle): rotating an exit edge is a free vertical lens for extracted beamlines.

    f_vertical = r_g/tan(beta)

    beam-dynamicsmagnet dg-113

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    fx = (gamma mo vz/qBo)/tan beta = rgo/tan beta.

    ParticleAccelerators8275.pdf — p. 141

    Tabletop: If Mark II ever extracts a beam, angling the magnet exit edge focuses the diverging beam without any extra magnet.

  114. Weak-focusing orbit stability requires field index 0 < n < 1 everywhere in the beam region: n > 0 for vertical focusing, n < 1 to keep radial focusing.

    0 < n(r) < 1; nu_r = sqrt(1-n), nu_z = sqrt(n)

    beam-dynamicsmagnet dg-114

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The bending magnets were shaped to produce a field with index in the range 0 < n < 1.

    ParticleAccelerators8275.pdf — p. 159, 521

    Tabletop: The outer bound that pairs with Koeth's n<0.2 refinement: the reference machine's field must fall (n>0), but slowly, all the way to full radius.

  115. Non-relativistic cyclotron energy is Tmax[MeV] = 48*(Z*R[m]*B[T])^2/A - energy scales as the square of both field and radius.

    Tmax[MeV] = 48*(Z*R*B)^2/A

    beam-dynamicsmagnet dg-115

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Tmax = 48 (Z RB)2/A, where Tmax is given in MeV, R in meters, and B in tesla.

    ParticleAccelerators8275.pdf — p. 524

    Tabletop: The master sizing formula: the reference machine's 0.59 T at ~0.09 m gives ~135 keV; 1 MeV needs (R*B) ~ 0.144 T-m, e.g. 1.2 T at 12 cm.

  116. For axial stability the field must decrease with radius (n > 0, i.e. dB/dr < 0) - achievable with a flat-pole H-magnet's natural falloff - and oscillation solutions are real only for 0 < n < 1, with tunes nu_r = sqrt(1-n), nu_z = sqrt(n).

    nu_r = sqrt(1-n), nu_z = sqrt(n); require 0 < n < 1

    beam-dynamicsmagnet dg-116

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Have real sinusoidal solutions for 0<n<1; this condition is true in a classical cyclotron

    Unit_10_Lecture_14_Cyclotron_basics.pdf — p. 36-37

    Tabletop: Confirms the reference machine's flat-pole H-frame inherently provides weak focusing from its natural radial falloff - the design task is controlling how fast n rises, not creating it.

  117. Cyclotron final energy scales as T ~ K*Q^2/A with K = (e*B*rho)^2/(2*m0), so for fixed energy the iron mass shrinks roughly as the cube of the field increase (rextraction falls from 2.28 m at 1 T to 0.76 m at 3 T - a 1/27 volume ratio).

    K_B = (e*B*rho)^2/(2*m0); volume ~ (1/B)^3 at fixed energy

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-117

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Almost (but not quite) spherical: Efficient cyclotron magnetic circuits include more iron laterally than axially

    Unit_10_Lecture_14_Cyclotron_basics.pdf — p. 48-50

    Tabletop: The B^2 energy leverage argues for pushing Mark II field toward the iron limit (~1.5-1.8 T) before enlarging poles: doubling B quadruples energy at fixed radius while iron mass stays fixed.

  118. Choose the ISM frequency 13.56 MHz (B = 0.889 T for protons) if you want to drive the dee with commercial RF generators and standard 50-ohm hardware through a matching transformer.

    f = qB/(2*pi*m): 13.56 MHz protons -> B = 0.889 T; 50-ohm source -> matching network -> high-Z dee

    rfmagnet dg-118

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The cyclotron circuit was originally tuned to a frequency of 13.56 MHz due to the requirements of the commercial RF generator in use ... a magnetic field of 0.889 Tesla is required.

    The_Cyclotron_Magnet_and_RF_Oscillator-low-quality.pdf — p. 10-11

    Tabletop: Directly actionable Mark II option: targeting 0.89 T instead of 0.59 T puts the machine on the 13.56 MHz ISM band where used generators, amplifiers, and matchboxes are plentiful and legal.

  119. Shape pole faces (spherical slice or edge 'lump') to produce a few-percent radial field decrease; a flat 'magnetic capacitor' gap gives n=0 and no vertical restoring force, so some deliberate contouring is required.

    for 3% edge fall-off on 6-in-radius pole: best-fit sphere rho ~ 21.8 in (slice ~32 deg); B_z = B_0*(r0/r)^n, restoring force needs 0 < n < 1

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-119

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    A radially decreasing field can be described as Bz = B0(r0/r)^n for n >= 0, where n = 0 implies a uniform field and n > 0 implies a restoring force.

    The_Cyclotron_Magnet_and_RF_Oscillator-low-quality.pdf — p. 7-9

    Tabletop: Exactly the reference machine's problem class and size: machine a gentle crown or stepped 'lump' into the 8-inch poles (or shim equivalently) targeting ~2-3% center-to-edge fall-off for axial focusing.

  120. Respect mechanical constraints when contouring poles: a theoretically better (steeper) profile can be unbuildable because pole thickness at the mounting screws goes to nothing, so blend a flat screw-land rim with a central contoured boss.

    example lump model (R=6 in, 3% fall-off): flat rim ~1 in wide, boss height ~0.3 in, boss crown rho ~19.6 in

    magnetfabrication dg-120

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    a pole piece with a flat surface at the edge with a thickness sufficient for the screws and a kind of lump in the middle with a flat top

    The_Cyclotron_Magnet_and_RF_Oscillator-low-quality.pdf — p. 8

    Tabletop: Directly applicable fabrication pattern for contoured Mark II pole caps that still bolt on.

  121. Pick pole size by mission: 6-9 inch poles are the economical educational range; go to 12-15 inches if you want enough energy for neutron-yielding light-element reactions.

    educational: 6-9 in poles; light-element/neutron reactions: 12-15 in

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-121

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    For educational applications a six to nine-inch pole piece is an economical range; for inducing light element reactions ... a somewhat larger machine, say, 12 to 15 inches

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 11-12

    Tabletop: Directly frames the Mark II decision: staying at 8 inches keeps it a demonstration machine; nuclear-reaction goals argue for 12-inch-class poles and higher field.

  122. Compute magnet excitation from NI = 2.02 x B(gauss) x gap(inches), using the leakage-multiplied total flux for the iron.

    NI (ampere-turns) = 2.02 x gauss x inches of gap

    magnetcoils dg-122

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Ampere-Turns = 2.02 x gauss x inches gap

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 13

    Tabletop: Directly applicable; e.g. 5900 G x 2 in gap needs ~24,000 A-turns before iron reluctance and leakage corrections.

  123. Design pole and coil fastenings for the magnetic forces: pole-face attraction is (kilogauss)^2 x (area in in^2)/1.735 pounds, and conductor force is kG x amps x inches/1750 pounds.

    F_pole(lb) = kG^2 x in^2 / 1.735; F_cond(lb) = kG x A x in / 1750

    magnetfabricationsafety dg-123

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Lbs. force on conductor = 1/1750 x kilogauss x amperes x inches length; Lbs. force between pole faces = 1/1.735 (kilogauss)^2 x (inches^2 area)

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 13

    Tabletop: Directly applicable: at 5.9 kG on 50 in^2 poles that is ~1000 lb of attraction Mark II bolts and spacers must carry.

  124. Run the magnet iron near saturation for most economical performance; expect soft iron to begin saturating near 16 kG, with some irons usable to 21 kG.

    B_sat(soft iron) ~ 16 kG; upper limit ~21 kG

    magnet dg-124

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    most soft irons begin saturating in the vicinity of 16 kilogauss, though some may be operated as high as 21 kilogauss

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 2

    Tabletop: Directly applicable; the reference machine's 0.59 T (5.9 kG) gap field leaves large iron margin, so a Mark II could roughly double the field before core saturation dominates.

  125. Size the yoke/coil for leakage flux by multiplying the gap flux by a factor set by the gap-height/gap-diameter ratio: 1/2 gives 2.0, 1/4 gives 1.5, 1/10 gives 1.2 (small cyclotrons live in the 1.5-1.2 region).

    leakage multiplier: h/D=1/2 -> 2.0; 1/4 -> 1.5; 1/10 -> 1.2

    magnet dg-125

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Ratio Gap Height/Gap Diameter ... Multiplying Factor: 1/2 -> 2; 1/4 -> 1.5; 1/10 -> 1.2, region of small cyclotrons

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 2

    Tabletop: Directly applicable sizing rule: for an 8-inch pole with ~1.5-2 inch gap (h/D ~ 1/4), design coils and yoke for ~1.5x the gap flux.

  126. Make the pole-core length and the pole-core-to-return-yoke distance at least twice, preferably three times, the gap height.

    L_core >= 2-3 x h_gap; core-to-yoke spacing >= 2-3 x h_gap

    magnet dg-126

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the length of the pole cores and the distance from pole cores to return yokes is at least twice and preferably three times the gap height

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 3

    Tabletop: Directly applicable to an H-frame Mark II; coil space usually forces compliance automatically, but check it when shortening the frame.

  127. Force saturation to occur in the pole cores only by giving the return yoke at least 25% more total cross-sectional area than the cores.

    A_yoke >= 1.25 x A_core

    magnet dg-127

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the return yoke must accordingly be designed so that its total cross sectional area is a good deal greater than that of the cores, say, at least 25 percent greater

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 3

    Tabletop: Directly applicable: for 8-inch (50 in^2) cores, provide >= 63 in^2 of total yoke steel around the flux return path.

  128. Machine yoke-to-yoke and yoke-to-core contact surfaces flush to eliminate parasitic air gaps in the magnetic circuit.

    magnetfabrication dg-128

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    It is important that the contact surfaces between yoke pieces and between yoke and pole cores be flush to eliminate additional air gaps

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 3

    Tabletop: Directly applicable; a few thousandths of an inch of unintended air gap is a noticeable fraction of a small machine's ampere-turn budget.

  129. Make vacuum-chamber top and bottom thin steel plates not much larger than the pole diameter (they become pole extensions), and make the side wall non-magnetic (brass) so field is not bypassed.

    chambermagnet dg-129

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    top and bottom of the vacuum chamber should be thin, circular steel plates ... to decrease the magnetic gap as much as possible. To prevent field bypassing, the tank wall must be non-magnetic, preferably brass

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 5

    Tabletop: Directly applicable chamber architecture for a small machine; every millimeter of chamber wall inside the gap costs ampere-turns.

  130. The homogeneous magnetic field is the single most expensive subsystem, and B ~ mu0*NI/g means the gap drives everything: keep the pole gap as small as the vacuum chamber allows, even at the cost of a harder chamber design.

    B = mu0*NI/g

    magnetchamber dg-130

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    it is advantageous to keep the gap between the magnet poles small. This tight spacing made the design of the vacuum chamber more difficult, but it was essential.

    we1pb05.pdf — p. 1-2

    Tabletop: The central Mark II trade: every millimeter of gap saved is field (and energy ~B^2) for free.

  131. The proton RF frequency is 15.2 MHz per tesla; use a table of f = 15.23*B MHz to co-design magnet field and RF tuning range (Cyclotron Kids: 1.0-1.7 T maps to 15.2-25.9 MHz, with matching capacitance 166 pF down to 57 pF).

    f(MHz) = 15.23 * B(T) for protons

    rfmagnet dg-131

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    B (Tesla) 1 ... 1.6 ... f (MHz) 15.23 ... 24.36

    2010cycconf_cyckids.pdf — p. 12

    Tabletop: The reference machine's 0.59 T machine resonates at ~9.0 MHz; any Mark II field choice instantly fixes the oscillator/tank tuning range via this 15.23 MHz/T constant.

  132. Size the return yoke cross-section larger than the pole so yoke flux density drops below pole-tip field (Cyclotron Kids: 1.6 T on 14-inch poles reduced to 1.2 T in the yoke), keeping the return path out of saturation with scrap steel.

    A_yoke/A_pole >= B_pole/B_yoke_target (1.6 T -> 1.2 T)

    magnet dg-132

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Increased cross section reduces flux through yoke to 1.2T

    2010cycconf_cyckids.pdf — p. 8

    Tabletop: Simple area-ratio rule the builder can apply when welding a Mark II frame from surplus plate: yoke area ~ 1.3-1.5x pole area keeps 1010-grade steel comfortably linear.

  133. Machine a slight taper on the pole faces so the field decreases with radius, providing the weak-focusing (restoring) Lorentz force on the beam - design it in the field code before cutting steel.

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-133

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Slight taper on pole applies a corrective Lorenz force to the beam. Made with freeware! Poisson Superfish

    2010cycconf_cyckids.pdf — p. 8

    Tabletop: Confirms the standard amateur approach for the reference machine's scale: put the field index into the pole profile (taper/gap growth with radius) rather than relying on accidental fringing.

  134. A 300 keV-class proton cyclotron was completed for under $1000 with base pressure 0.01 mTorr, 1.6 kVpp on the dees at ~400 W peak RF, and a C-frame yoke of welded 5x5 inch soft-steel bar with meehanite pole pieces face-milled to a profile giving the appropriate field index.

    300 keV: ~1e-5 torr, 1.6 kVpp dee, 400 W pk, machined field-index pole profile

    magnetrfvacuum dg-134

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Polepieces of meehanite steel facemilled to a profile that gave appropriate field index... 1.6kVpp on Ds, 400Wpk. Base pressure 0.01mTorr

    Scientific Equipment Procurement.pdf — p. 11-17

    Tabletop: An existence proof at exactly the reference machine's energy: modest dee voltage (1-2 kVpp), 1e-5 torr, and a machined pole profile suffice below ~300 keV; heroic RF and UHV are not prerequisites.

  135. For first beam, fix the RF frequency and slowly sweep the magnetic field through the resonance condition while watching the collector - this is how the Rutgers 9-inch prototype found its first beam.

    sweep B at fixed f until f = qB/(2*pi*m)

    beam-measurementmagnet dg-135

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    1st successful operation was recorded by slowly sweeping B-field to locate resonance condition. September 16, 1999

    cyclotron_apr_23_2010_houghton_3.pdf — p. 8

    Tabletop: The standard commissioning move for Mark II: B-field is the easy knob to sweep since the RF stays matched at fixed frequency.

  136. Keep the field index n below 0.2 everywhere inside the maximum ion radius: n = 0.2 marks the coupled (2*nu_z = nu_r) resonance and, if it lands inside the orbit region, the beam is lost.

    n = -(r/B)(dB/dr) < 0.2 for r < r_max; unmodified Houghton magnet reached n = 0.2 at r = 5.9 cm vs 7.8 cm Dee radius

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-136

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the field index value n=0.2 must not occur inside the maximum ion orbit radius to avoid coupled resonances

    Houghton College physics thesis (Morrow, 2015) — p. 2, 39

    Tabletop: This is the single design criterion for weak-focusing pole shaping on a 100 keV-1 MeV tabletop machine; it is computable from a measured B(r) curve.

  137. Keep cyclotron shims thin - Lawrence used iron sheets typically 0.25 inch or less - because an over-thick shim makes B change too abruptly at the shim edge and the ion is lost there.

    shim thickness <= 0.25 in (6.35 mm); Houghton modelled 0.3175 / 0.635 / 1.27 cm shims and all were too thick

    magnetfabrication dg-137

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the magnetic field changes too quickly near the edge of the shim. This is a result of making the shim too thick.

    Houghton College physics thesis (Morrow, 2015) — p. 25, 44, 46

    Tabletop: Warns the builder off the obvious first shimming attempt; the useful shims are thinner than are convenient to fabricate and hold in place.

  138. Shape the magnet for a Bz that decreases LINEARLY with radius: a linear falloff makes Br grow linearly with distance from the median plane, giving simple-harmonic axial focusing, so judge every pole/shim/lid modification by the linearity of B(r).

    dBz/dr = -C constant -> Br = C z -> SHM about median plane

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-138

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    weak magnetic focusing can be achieved by producing a magnetic field in which Bz linearly decreases.

    Houghton College physics thesis (Morrow, 2015) — p. 26-27

    Tabletop: Gives a single, plottable acceptance test for a shimming attempt on the reference machine's 8-inch poles - no orbit code needed to reject a bad shim.

  139. Watch for adding-type trim coil configurations that make B rise with radius out to ~5 cm: that produces a NEGATIVE field index and axial defocusing - worse than doing nothing.

    B increasing to r ~ 5 cm -> n < 0 (down to -0.1 in the modelled cases)

    magnetcoilsbeam-dynamics dg-139

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the magnetic field actually increases in magnitude out to around r = 5 cm at which point it begins decreasing again. This is problematic because it yields a negative field index

    Houghton College physics thesis (Morrow, 2015) — p. 51-53

    Tabletop: A concrete trap when adding any iron or coil near the center of an 8-inch pole; check the sign of dB/dr everywhere, not just at the edge.

  140. Do not expect trim coils to rescue weak focusing on a small cyclotron: bucking coils moved n = 0.2 outward by only ~0.2 cm while costing ~20% of peak field (1.27 T to 1.07 T), and since T ~ B^2 that is a losing trade.

    dr(n=0.2) = +0.2 cm for dB = -20% (1.27 T -> 1.07 T); T proportional to B^2 r^2

    magnetcoilsbeam-dynamics dg-140

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the difference in radius is minimal - about 0.2 cm - and comes at the steep cost of a ~20% reduction in maximum magnetic field from 1.27 T to 1.07 T. As such, this modification was considered insufficient.

    Houghton College physics thesis (Morrow, 2015) — p. 53-54

    Tabletop: Saves a Mark II builder from spending months on trim coils inside a small gap; also note trim coils steal gap height.

  141. Replace non-magnetic vacuum-chamber lids with magnetic stainless-steel lids extending about 2.2 cm beyond the pole/Dee radius: acting as wide pole faces they pull field lines outward, linearize B(r), push n = 0.2 from r = 5.9 cm out to r = 8.3 cm (past the 7.8 cm Dee), and by cutting the effective pole gap from 3.9 cm to 2.54 cm raise Bmax from 1.27 T to 1.77 T.

    lid radius = pole radius + 2.2 cm; gap 3.9 cm -> 2.54 cm; B 1.27 T -> 1.77 T; f 27.0 MHz; Tmax 0.41 -> 0.91 MeV

    magnetchamberfabrication dg-141

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    As the vacuum chamber radius is 2.2 cm larger than the radius of the magnet poles, these lids act as wide pole faces that draw the magnetic field lines out to larger radii.

    Houghton College physics thesis (Morrow, 2015) — p. 54-55

    Tabletop: The highest-leverage cheap upgrade in this batch: swapping aluminium chamber lids for steel roughly doubles theoretical proton energy on a machine essentially identical to the reference machine's.

  142. Use the free Poisson Superfish (2-D magnet cross-section) plus SIMION 8.1 (ion tracking) workflow to evaluate magnet modifications before cutting steel; the thesis includes the geometry files and the PSF-to-SIMION conversion recipe.

    PSF model: pole face 150 mm, pole gap 39 mm, coil current 70 A, half-plane slice

    magnetbeam-dynamicsfabrication dg-142

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Pole face: 150mm, Pole gap: 39mm, Current: 70A ;NOTE: this is a slice down the middle of the magnet

    Houghton College physics thesis (Morrow, 2015) — p. 60-68

    Tabletop: Zero-cost simulation path for a hobbyist; the appendix geometry file is a working starting template for an 8-15 cm pole magnet.

  143. Expect beam current to fall steeply with collector radius in an unshimmed weak-focusing machine; add ferromagnetic shims between chamber and pole faces to strengthen magnetic focusing and recover current at large radius.

    magnetbeam-dynamicsbeam-measurement dg-143

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    much of the beam current is being lost by the time the beam reaches larger radii... This could be done by adding shims of ferromagnetic material between the chamber and pole faces.

    Houghton College physics thesis (Fuller) — p. 52-53

    Tabletop: Predicts the current-vs-radius profile the builder should measure, and the standard shim fix if Mark II loses beam before full radius.

  144. Iron-pole cyclotrons hit a hard field ceiling when the poles saturate at about 2 T; beyond that, energy grows only with radius, so plan around B <= ~1.8-2 T for any iron magnet.

    pole saturation ~2 T

    magnetmaterials dg-144

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    once the iron magnet poles become saturated (at about 2 T) the maximum energy is determined by R

    Houghton College physics thesis (Loucks) — p. 18

    Tabletop: Frames the Mark II tradeoff space: pushing the reference machine's 0.59 T toward 1.2-1.5 T is cheap energy gain (E ~ B^2), but above ~1.8 T iron stops helping and only pole diameter buys more.

  145. Keep the classical-cyclotron field index n = -(r/B)(dB/dr) between 0 and 1 everywhere inside the acceleration region - n<0 loses axial focusing, n>1 loses radial stability - and empirically n should rise roughly linearly from 0 toward 1 with radius, shaped by shimming.

    n = -(r/B)dB/dr; 0 < n < 1, rising ~linearly with r; f_z = sqrt(n)*f0, f_r = sqrt(1-n)*f0

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-145

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the value of n for the cyclotron must be between 0 and 1; it has been determined empirically the index should increase with r roughly linearly between 0 and 1

    Houghton College physics thesis (Loucks) — p. 21-23

    Tabletop: The core magnet-shimming target for the Mark II: map B(r) with a Hall probe, compute n(r) by finite differences, and add edge shims until n(r) is a clean 0-to-1 ramp over the dee radius.

  146. Budget cooling water across subsystems explicitly: the Houghton 15 cm magnet needed 6.1 L/min at 70 A but the chiller could spare only 3.0 L/min after the diffusion pump's 0.8 L/min, capping operation at 50 A / 1.1 T - the chiller, not the supply, set maximum field.

    GMW 3473-70: 70 A needs 6.1 L/min; chiller 3.8 L/min total -> limited to 50 A, 1.1 T at 3.85 cm gap

    coilsmagnet dg-146

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the maximum field is limited by available water cooling and the power supply... To achieve the maximum field, using 70 A, the magnet requires 6.1 L/min

    Houghton College physics thesis (Loucks) — p. 35-36

    Tabletop: Do the L/min bookkeeping for the whole Mark II (magnet + diffusion/turbo + RF amp) before buying a chiller; the cooling loop is a first-class design constraint, not an afterthought.

  147. Measure n(r) by finite differences of Hall-probe readings on a rotating non-magnetic jig (aluminum disc in the median plane, 1 cm radial steps); approximating dBz/dr by dBz over 1 cm is adequate to reveal where focusing is lost.

    n ~ -(r/Bz)*(dBz/dr), dr = 1 cm steps

    beam-measurementmagnet dg-147

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the dBz/dr term was approximated by dBz/dr, where dr is the difference between two radii (1 cm)

    Houghton College physics thesis (Loucks) — p. 36-38

    Tabletop: A directly copyable measurement rig for the Mark II field map: rotating grooved aluminum disc plus angular scale gives B(r,theta) with hardware the builder already owns.

  148. A 1.2 T tabletop cyclotron design point: 15 cm flat pole faces with the chamber in place giving a 3.81 cm pole-tip separation, 1.28 T at 70 A, water cooled at 18 C and 0.8 gallon/min at 50 A.

    15 cm poles, gap 3.81 cm, 1.28 T at 70 A (1.16 T at 50 A); cooling 18 C water at 0.8 gpm

    magnetcoilscyclotron-general dg-148

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    With the chamber in place, the separation between the pole tips is 3.81 cm, giving a maximum magnetic field of 1.28 T at 70 A ... requiring 18 C water flowing at 0.8 gallons per minute (at 50A)

    we1pb01.pdf — p. 2-3

    Tabletop: A purchasable-magnet benchmark almost exactly at the reference machine's scale; the 0.8 gpm figure sizes a chiller for a ~kW-class coil.

  149. A proven parameter set at exactly the reference machine's scale: 12 in poles, 4 in gap with removable 1 in pole tips, 1.2 T max, single 5 in radius dee with 0.9 in aperture, 2-30 MHz RF at up to 1.5 kW giving ~10 kV dee, 1e-5 Torr operating pressure.

    12 in poles / 4 in gap / 1.2 T / 5 in dee / 0.9 in aperture / 1.5 kW -> ~10 kV dee / 1e-5 Torr

    magnetdeerfvacuum dg-149

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    12 inch diameter poles pieces forming a 4-inch gap to which upper and lower pole tips up to 1-inch thick can be easily attached and removed.

    82375909.pdf — p. 2

    Tabletop: A complete cross-check machine for Mark II sizing; note the removable-pole-tip trick that lets one magnet host many field profiles.

  150. Make pole tips removable/swappable inserts (up to 1 in thick, bolted to fixed poles) so field shaping, shimming experiments, and AVF upgrades never require touching yoke or coils.

    magnetfabrication dg-150

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    upper and lower pole tips up to 1-inch thick can be easily attached and removed - we currently have four sets of pole tips.

    82375909.pdf — p. 2

    Tabletop: Probably the single best architecture decision the builder can copy: Mark II with bolt-on tips can iterate field profiles cheaply.

  151. Power the upper and lower coils from independent supplies so a deliberate top/bottom ampere-turn imbalance can steer the magnetic median plane vertically onto the geometric midplane of the dee.

    magnetcoilsbeam-dynamics dg-151

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The magnet's upper and lower coils are independently energized enabling an intentional axial field imbalance so as to vertically shift the accelerating plane.

    82375909.pdf — p. 2

    Tabletop: Cheap beam-height trim for Mark II: two supplies (or a shunt rheostat on one coil) instead of re-machining anything.

  152. Shape the weak-focusing pole taper so the field index reaches n = 0.2 only at the final ion radius; the n = 0.2 point is the nu_r = 2*nu_z coupling resonance and beam crossing it inside the machine blows up axially.

    n(r) = -(r/Bz)(dBz/dr); require n < 0.2 for all r < r_final

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-152

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    if n = 0.2 is to be avoided (vx=2vz), then the rate at which the vertical field decreases must be moderated such that n=0.2 occurs at the final ion radius.

    82375909.pdf — p. 3

    Tabletop: The quantitative pole-taper design rule for Mark II: map n(r) from the field profile and keep 0 < n < 0.2 out to full beam radius.

  153. Proof by counterexample: pole tips with n = 0.2 occurring at r = 3.5 in inside a 5 in dee radius produced observable axial beam blow-up - a deliberately 'bad' taper is only ~40% steeper than a good one.

    n=0.2 at 70% of dee radius -> axial loss

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-153

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The n=0.2 location occurs near r=3.5 inches, well within the 5 inch DEE radius, so as to allow the ion displacement to grow.

    82375909.pdf — p. 5

    Tabletop: Shows how little margin there is between good and bad tapers on an 8-12 inch machine; motivates measuring n(r), not guessing it.

  154. For AVF/hybrid pole designs, use the tune formulas nu_z^2 = -k + F(1+tan^2 xi) and nu_r^2 = 1 + k (k = average field index, F = flutter, xi = spiral edge angle) and keep both tunes away from integer and rational-fraction resonances.

    nu_z^2 = -k + F(1+tan^2(xi)); nu_r^2 = 1+k

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-154

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The axial tune... can be summarized by: vz2 = -k + F(1+tan2xi) and the radial tune is written as: vr2 = 1+k

    82375909.pdf — p. 6

    Tabletop: If Mark II ever gets sector pole tips (to allow a rising average field), these two lines are the whole first-order design calculation.

  155. To find closed orbits experimentally, toss a current-carrying wire loop (e.g. 30 AWG, ~2.5 A) into the magnet gap: it snaps to and traces stable equilibrium orbits, revealing off-center orbits you would never find analytically.

    30 AWG loop, 71 mm circumference, 2.5 A

    beam-measurementmagnet dg-155

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The energized wire loop simply needed to be tossed towards the gap and it would reproducibly snap to the nearest stable orbit.

    82375909.pdf — p. 7

    Tabletop: A zero-cost field-quality diagnostic the builder can run on the existing magnet this weekend.

  156. Compute both tunes from the same four quantities - field index n, flutter F, sector number N and spiral angle xi - using nu_z^2 = n + (N^2/(N^2-1))F^2(1+2tan^2 xi) and the matching radial expression, where flutter F^2 = (<B^2>-<B>^2)/<B>^2.

    nu_z^2 = n + (N^2/(N^2-1)) F^2 (1 + 2 tan^2 xi); F^2 = (<B^2> - <B>^2)/<B>^2; n = -(r/B) dB/dr = 1 - gamma^2

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-156

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    F = ((<B^2> - <B>^2)/<B>^2) is called the flutter and represents the hill to valley field difference

    magnets_5_Beeckman.pdf — p. 25-26

    Tabletop: The complete design equation set for an AVF Mark II; every term is measurable from a 2-D Hall-probe map of the built magnet.

  157. Spiral the poles rather than relying on edge focusing alone when flutter is small: edge focusing from a radial sector gives one focusing and one defocusing edge per hill, whereas a spiral angle multiplies the flutter term by (1+2tan^2 xi) at both edges.

    focusing enhancement factor (1 + 2 tan^2 xi); at xi = 45 deg the flutter term triples

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-157

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    N large: high maximum energy, F small and quasi circular orbits -> spiral compulsory

    magnets_5_Beeckman.pdf — p. 26, 28

    Tabletop: Explains when the extra machining pain of spiral tips pays off; at 8-12 inch pole size with N=4 a modest spiral is worth more than more sectors.

  158. Use N > 2 sectors in any AVF design: with N < 2 the flutter term makes nu_r^2 negative (the pi stop-band), and each N sets an energy ceiling T = (N/2 - 1)E0 - about 469 MeV for N=3 and 938 MeV for N=4 protons.

    nu_r^2 = 1 - n + (N^2/(N^2-1))(3/(N^2-4)) F^2 (1+2tan^2 xi); T_max = (N/2 - 1) E0

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-158

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    It implies that N must be larger than 2 (lower limit of the pi stop-band) and there is an energy limit for every N value T = (N/2 - 1)E0

    magnets_5_Beeckman.pdf — p. 27-28

    Tabletop: Rules out 2-sector 'butterfly' pole tips that look easy to machine; N=3 or 4 is the practical amateur choice and neither limits sub-MeV protons.

  159. With constant gaps B(r) falls naturally with radius and the larger the gap the faster it falls, while coil-dominated field rises with radius but only matters once the iron saturates - use that pairing to get the profile you want.

    magnet dg-159

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Constant gaps : B(r) naturally decreasing. The larger the gap, the stronger the decrease ... Coil field : B(r) naturally increasing. Important only when iron becomes saturated

    magnets_5_Beeckman.pdf — p. 32

    Tabletop: Explains the negative field index a flat-pole tabletop magnet already has - and why a bigger gap gives more weak focusing but less field.

  160. Reach for the iron before the copper when shaping the field: iron shaping is very effective, simple, cheap and reliable but highly non-linear and fixed once cut, while trim coils are flexible but very weak in a warm magnet and steal gap height - model either one before implementing it.

    magnetcoilsfabrication dg-160

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Trim coils increase the gap ... Very weak except in superconducting machines ... Model it before implementing it to avoid unexpected effects

    magnets_5_Beeckman.pdf — p. 33, 47

    Tabletop: Settles the shim-vs-trim-coil question for a small warm magnet the same way the Houghton thesis did empirically: iron wins.

  161. Work through the iron field-shaping catalogue in order: vary hill/valley spanned angle with radius (horns), chamfer the pole end or add valley inserts to stop the field falling at large radius, decrease the gap with radius (elliptical gap), mill the lateral pole edges, add movable iron flaps, or change local saturation with trim rods.

    magnetfabrication dg-161

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The iron shaping methods zoo: Change the ratio of hill/valley spanned angle with radius ... Prevent field decrease at large radii ... Decrease the gap along radius ... Lateral edges milling ... Iron inserts ... Change local saturation

    magnets_5_Beeckman.pdf — p. 34-46

    Tabletop: A ranked menu of things the builder can machine on 8-inch pole tips, each demonstrated on a real cyclotron; movable flaps in particular give post-build adjustability.

  162. Choose yoke stock by construction method: laminations are limited to about 300 mm thickness (200 mm usual) but give good, slightly anisotropic magnetic and mechanical properties; castings allow large low-deflection parts with poor mechanical properties and porosity risk; forging is best and most expensive.

    laminated stack thickness: 300 mm max, 200 mm usual

    magnetmaterialsfabrication dg-162

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Laminated: Limited thickness : 300 mm max, usual 200 mm. Good magnetic and mechanical properties. Slight anisotropy.

    magnets_5_Beeckman.pdf — p. 57

    Tabletop: For an amateur the practical read is: mild-steel plate stock is fine for a DC magnet; note the anisotropy if you stack plate for pole tips.

  163. Trade pole gap deliberately: a small gap needs fewer ampere-turns and keeps orbits away from the pole edge but leaves no room for probes, injection and pumping and is very sensitive to errors (vertical losses); a large gap eases vacuum and diagnostics at the cost of field.

    magnetvacuumchamber dg-163

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    small gap: reduced number of At of coils, pole radius reduced, orbits close to outer edge, no space, very sensitive to errors : vertical losses. large gap: large space: injection, extraction, probes, easier vacuum pumping, lower field

    magnets_5_Beeckman.pdf — p. 65

    Tabletop: Frames the central Mark II decision (the reference machine's chamber must fit in the gap) with the actual list of consequences on both sides.

  164. Follow the four-step magnet design order - squeeze the requirements, get starting numbers by hand calculation, then 2-D global model, 3-D global model, and 2-D cuts for local details - preferring 2-D calculations at every opportunity and iterating.

    step0 requirements -> step1 hand calculation -> step2 2D global -> step3 3D global -> step4 2D radial cuts

    magnetfabrication dg-164

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    step0: Squeeze requirements and extract juice; step1: Get starting numbers from hand calculation; step2: 2d global model; step3: 3d global model; step4: 2d cuts for detailed local objects ... 2d calculations must be preferred.

    magnets_5_Beeckman.pdf — p. 68

    Tabletop: A workflow a solo builder can actually execute, and it puts pencil-and-paper (Zickler-style) sizing ahead of any software.

  165. In a hill/valley magnet the average field at large radius is <B> = k*B_hill + (1-k)*B_valley with stacking factor k = hill angle/90 deg; RF efficiency prefers k = 0.5 but making the machine smaller pushes k up - C235 chose k = 0.67 (60-degree hills).

    <B> = k B_hill + (1-k) B_valley; k = hill angle/90 deg; C235: k=0.67, 0.67*3 + 0.33*(3-2.1) = 2.31 T; B0 = 2.31/gamma(1.25) = 1.8 T

    magnetrfbeam-dynamics dg-165

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    For best RF efficiency, k=0.5 BUT to decrease machine dimensions k >0.5 (more hill, thus more field) CHOICE : k=0.67 (60 deg hills)

    magnets_5_Beeckman.pdf — p. 69

    Tabletop: Shows the exact arithmetic used to go from a required <B> to hill/valley fields and sector angle - reusable at any scale.

  166. Design to a target axial tune around nu_z = 0.2, which then fixes the spiral angle once n, N and F are known; keeping flutter and spiral modest lets you tolerate a stronger field gradient.

    CHOICE nu_z = 0.2; spiral angle xi then determined by nu_z^2 = n + (N^2/(N^2-1))F^2(1+2tan^2 xi)

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-166

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    CHOICE : nu_z = 0.2. Flutter and spiral not too large. Field gradient can be strong. Spiral angle of pole completely determined since n, N, F and nu_z are known

    magnets_5_Beeckman.pdf — p. 69

    Tabletop: Gives a numeric focusing target to design toward instead of 'as much focusing as possible' - and 0.2 is achievable with weak focusing at the reference machine's energies.

  167. Field in the gap of an iron-dominated magnet is B = mu0*n*I/h - proportional to total ampere-turns, inversely proportional to gap, and independent of pole area; so minimize the reluctance of the iron path so the ampere-turns are spent on the gap.

    B = mu0 n I / h (h = gap height)

    magnetcoils dg-167

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the field B = mu0 nI/h is proportional to the total current in the solenoid, is inversely proportional to the magnetic gap and is independent on the pole surface, a rather counter-intuitive fact to most people.

    magnets_5_Beeckman.pdf — p. 70-71

    Tabletop: The core sizing identity for a home magnet: shaving the pole gap buys field for free, whereas making the poles bigger does not.

  168. Remember permeability is a strong function of B: for good magnet steel mu_r runs ~4000-5000 at low induction but collapses toward 1 above ~2 T, and 0.9%-carbon steel has a maximum mu_r of only ~1000 versus ~5000 for 99.8% iron - so use low-carbon steel for yokes.

    steel 0.9% C: mu_init 50, mu_max 1000; iron 99.8%: mu_init 150, mu_max 5000; iron 99.95%: mu_max 200,000

    magnetmaterials dg-168

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Steel (0.9% C) 50 / 1000; Iron (99.8%) 150 / 5000; Iron (99.95%) 10,000 / 200,000

    magnets_5_Beeckman.pdf — p. 72-73

    Tabletop: Concrete reason to buy A36/1018 low-carbon plate rather than whatever scrap steel is on hand for an H-frame yoke.

  169. Model a 3-D sectored magnet in 2-D axisymmetry by using pseudo-materials whose BH curve is scaled by the stacking factor: B_pseudo = mu0*H + k*(B - mu0*H), where k is the fraction of the circle occupied by real material.

    B_pseudo = mu0 H + k (B - mu0 H), k = stacking factor (fraction of azimuth filled by iron)

    magnet dg-169

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The 3D geometry is modelled with a 2D code in axisymmetry using pseudo-materials. The stacking factor is the proportion of the circle occupied by the real material. Each pseudo-material is defined by a modified B-H curve

    magnets_5_Beeckman.pdf — p. 74

    Tabletop: Lets a hobbyist study an AVF pole set in free 2-D codes (POISSON/FEMM) before committing to a 3-D solver.

  170. Control the mesh yourself where you need field derivatives, since the code gives potentials but tunes need first and second derivatives; a limited number of quadratic elements beats many linear elements for accuracy.

    magnet dg-170

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    YOU must be in control of the mesh, not the code. A limited amount of quadratic elements is much more effective to accuracy than many linear elements

    magnets_5_Beeckman.pdf — p. 83

    Tabletop: Explains noisy field-index curves out of a home simulation: n and nu_z are derivatives, so mesh quality matters far more than for B itself.

  171. Test your far-field boundary instead of trusting the code default, use symmetry boundaries where possible, and trust field codes for differences between two models more than for absolute values.

    magnet dg-171

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Is the rest of the universe far enough ? TEST IT! ... Codes are very good in the computation of small changes between 2 models but less good at absolute values.

    magnets_5_Beeckman.pdf — p. 85-86

    Tabletop: Practical simulation hygiene: use FEMM/POISSON to compare shim options (differences), and use the Hall probe for the absolute field.

  172. Give the average field a gentle radial decrease for axial focusing - the 86-inch used about 1% per 13 inches of radius (0.08%/inch) over the acceleration region and ~2% total to full radius, with azimuthal variation shimmed below 0.2%.

    dB/B ~ -1%/13 in over main region; total ~ -2% at r_max; azimuthal ripple < 0.2%

    magnetbeam-dynamics dg-172

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The radial decrease in field strength is at a rate of one percent in 13 inches out to a radius of 20 inches ... These shims reduce azimuthal variations to less than 0.2%.

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4357145) — p. 15, 35

    Tabletop: The fractional numbers transfer, not the inches: aim for a smooth ~1-3% total field fall-off center-to-edge on the 8-inch pole and shim azimuthal asymmetry to the few-per-mille level.

  173. Machine field-correcting shims from thick steel plate on a boring mill and iterate against field maps; treat shims as the precision trim on a deliberately oversized magnet.

    magnetfabrication dg-173

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The shims were machined from 2 1/4 in. steel plate on a vertical boring mill ... The magnetization curve taken at the center of the tank with the contour shims in place is also shown.

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4357145) — p. 35

    Tabletop: Directly applicable method: leave gap allowance for removable machined shim rings/plates so Mark II field shaping is a measurement-and-remachining loop, not a magnet rebuild.

  174. Wind a small auxiliary coil on each pole (86-inch: 65 turns, up to 75 A) to steer the beam onto the magnetic median plane with a controllable field asymmetry.

    control coils: 65 turns/pole, 0-75 A, reversible polarity

    magnetcoilsbeam-dynamics dg-174

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    By means of auxiliary coils wound on the pole pieces it is possible to control the position of the beam with respect to the median plane of the tank.

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4357145) — p. 35

    Tabletop: Directly applicable and cheap for Mark II: a few dozen turns on one pole with a bipolar bench supply gives a knob for vertical beam centering instead of mechanical re-shimming.

  175. Site the RF power stage where the stray magnetic field is below ~60 oersteds (map the fringe field first), and line its cabinet with copper to cut losses and interference.

    B_stray at oscillator < ~60 G

    rfmagnet dg-175

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    A position of suitably low field intensity, < 60 oersteds, was located by mapping the stray field about the magnet.

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4357145) — p. 59

    Tabletop: Directly applicable: map the reference machine's H-frame fringe field with a hall probe and keep the LDMOS amplifier, its magnetics, and instrumentation outside the ~60 G contour.

  176. Choose accessibility-driven machine orientation early: the 86-inch put the median plane vertical in a U-shaped (window-frame) magnet purely so a crane could lift the whole dee/liner assembly straight out.

    magnetfabrication dg-176

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The U-shape of the magnet gives direct access to the top of the vacuum chamber and permits the use of an overhead crane for transferring the assembled dee system.

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4357145) — p. 7, 9

    Tabletop: The principle (design the yoke around how you will service the chamber, not vice versa) is directly applicable to Mark II's H-frame layout.

  177. Design the magnet structure for magnetic forces, which dwarf vacuum loads (ORIC: 1,055,000 lb magnetic vs 60,000 lb vacuum), and machine mating pole/yoke surfaces flat and parallel within 0.005 inch at ~125 microinch finish.

    mating surfaces: plane and parallel within +/-0.005 in TIR; 125 uin finish

    magnetfabrication dg-177

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    a magnetic load of 1,055,000 lb and a vacuum load of 60,000 lb could be expected ... mating surfaces of pole bases and yoke pieces to be planes within 0.005 in. T.I.R.

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4275955) — p. 118

    Tabletop: Direct transfer of tolerancing practice: face-grind Mark II pole and yoke mating surfaces and check with a dial indicator; magnetic attraction, not atmosphere, is the structural design load.

  178. Use plain low-carbon steel for cyclotron iron (ORIC forgings: ~0.11% C, low Si/Ni), from consistent stock, and a conventional closed yoke with pole-base to yoke cross-section ratio near 1:1.

    steel ~0.11% C; A_pole_base : A_yoke ~ 1:1 (closed yoke)

    magnetmaterials dg-178

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The magnet is of a conventional closed-yoke design with a 1/1 ratio of pole base cross section to yoke cross section.

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4275955) — p. 118-119

    Tabletop: Directly applicable: 1018/1010-class steel is the right Mark II iron, and yoke area comparable to (Wouters says 25% above) pole area is the design corridor.

  179. Prove magnet field designs on a scale model before cutting full-size iron: ORIC used ~1/8-scale models with a rotating-coil fluxmeter on a 1/4-inch measurement grid, achieving ~0.6% RMS point accuracy.

    1/8-scale model; grid 1/4 in; error budget: recorder 0.2%, position 0.4%, current regulation 0.3% -> 0.6% RMS

    magnetbeam-measurement dg-179

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Approximately 1/8-scale model magnets were energized ... A complete grid of points 1/4 in. apart is thus obtained over the entire model.

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4275955) — p. 29, 31

    Tabletop: Inverted for the builder: their whole magnet is model-sized, so a dense XY hall-probe map on a ~5 mm grid with attention to probe positioning and current regulation (the two dominant error terms) is the equivalent discipline.

  180. Budget field-mapping errors explicitly: probe position error dominates where gradients are steep, and current regulation must be held to ~0.3% or better during a map.

    delta-B/B per point: position 0.4%, regulation 0.3%, readout 0.2%; goal 0.1%

    beam-measurementmagnet dg-180

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The error due to probe position varies depending on the field gradient ... techniques available to us at this time fall short of the desired 0.1% accuracy.

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4275955) — p. 31

    Tabletop: Directly applicable to Mark II shimming: regulate magnet current (not just set it) while mapping, and index the probe mechanically, or the map noise will exceed the shim effects being measured.

  181. When choosing dee voltage, remember it trades against gap size: more volts means fewer turns and better transmission but a larger required breakdown clearance and hence magnet gap; ORIC settled on 100 kV as near-optimal.

    V_dee up -> turns down, but gap (breakdown clearance) up -> compromise

    rfmagnetbeam-dynamics dg-181

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Increasing the dee voltage, however, requires increasing the required voltage breakdown gap and thus the magnet hill gap, so that some compromise must be reached.

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4275955) — p. 65

    Tabletop: The coupled optimization transfers: for Mark II, pick dee voltage and magnet gap together, since every kV of dee needs clearance that costs ampere-turns.

  182. Design beam extraction simultaneously with the magnet from the start, so the deflection scheme is built into the machine instead of being retrofitted against a finished field.

    beam-dynamicsmagnet dg-182

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the design of the beam deflection system will be worked out simultaneously with the design of the magnet ... all the problems which arise from trying to obtain deflected beams after the machine is built would be avoided.

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4275955) — p. 85-86

    Tabletop: Directly applicable Mark II lesson: if an extracted beam is ever wanted, reserve the azimuthal slot, field-edge profile, and feedthrough ports now, even if the deflector comes later.

  183. For coil power, dissipation is inversely proportional to conductor volume, so choose power first and volume follows; keep packing ratio above 0.5 and size cooling water as q(gpm) = 6.82 x U(kW) / dT(degF).

    U = rho*(Ni)^2*l*N / (coil volume); q(gpm) = 6.82*U(kW)/dT(F)

    coils dg-183

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    power varies inversely with volume of conductor, so to a first approximation it can be chosen at will ... a well-designed coil will have a 'packing ratio' greater than 0.5.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 273-277

    Tabletop: If Mark II coils run hot, the fix is more copper, not more cooling: doubling conductor volume halves dissipation at the same ampere-turns.

  184. Bond coils into solid resin (epoxy/polyester over glass or cotton tape) so conductors cannot move under magnetic forces; turn-to-turn resin-glass insulation is good for >100 V/mil, but use mica for the higher voltage-to-ground insulation.

    resin-impregnated glass/cotton: >100 V/mil (10-30 mil layers); tensile 1000-3000 psi

    coilsmaterialsfabrication dg-184

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The voltage breakdown strength of a resin-impregnated layer of glass cloth or cotton mesh is usually over 100 volts/mil ... necessary to utilize mica-sheet or mica-flake insulation to obtain the higher voltage-to-ground insulation.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 278

    Tabletop: Potting the reference machine's coils stops the slow insulation abrasion that coil hum causes; their low coil voltage means the resin-glass numbers alone give ample margin.

  185. Cooling water for magnet and RF systems: demineralized, conductivity kept at or below 10 micromho with pH ~7; the dee cooling water must be temperature-stable to 1 F or the RF tune walks.

    sigma <= 10 umho/cm, pH ~7, dee water dT stability <= 1 F

    coilsrf dg-185

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The conductivity is maintained at 10 micromhos or less, with a pH of about seven. Dee system water temperature stability of 1 F or better is required for steady operation.

    Argonne 60-inch cyclotron report — p. 6

    Tabletop: Two directly portable specs: DI-water loop quality for any hollow-conductor coil, and tight dee-water temperature control if Mark II water-cools the dee.

  186. Size the cooling plant with about 3x margin over normal load (ANL: 1000 kW capacity vs ~300 kW normal operating load).

    plant capacity ~ 3x normal heat load

    coilssafety dg-186

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The circulating pumps and heat exchanger are sized to handle a 1000-kw heat load, with the normal operating load being about 300 kw.

    Argonne 60-inch cyclotron report — p. 6

    Tabletop: For a Mark II dissipating ~1-5 kW, buy the chiller/radiator rated for ~3x that; margin is what makes long runs boring.

  187. Water-cool (or oil-cool) the RF matching secondary coil: even minute thermal expansion of the copper detunes its inductance and drops the dee voltage.

    rfcoils dg-187

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    It is necessary for the secondary coil to be cooled with oil or deionized water... because even minute thermal expansion of the copper can change the inductor's value.

    cyclotron-master-document-09-09-012-3-00.pdf — p. 23

    Tabletop: Explains RF drift during long runs at the reference machine's power levels; cooling the tank coil stabilizes tune.

  188. A water-cooled 1/4 in x 1/4 in hollow square copper conductor safely carries about 120 A; operate at ~110 A to keep a ~10% safety margin (roughly 3 A/mm^2 on the copper).

    I_max ~ 120 A for 1/4 in sq hollow conductor, run at 110 A

    coils dg-188

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    When properly cooled, our 1/4''x1/4'' hollow copper conductor can safely carry up to 120A. Allowing a margin of safety, we designed our magnet to operate at 110A.

    cyclotron-master-document-09-09-012-3-00.pdf — p. 32

    Tabletop: Direct conductor rating for the exact class of hollow-conductor coil a Mark II would use in place of the reference machine's refrigeration tubing.

  189. Wind coils as epoxy-potted 'double pancakes' (two-layer sub-coils with both leads exiting the same side) rather than one continuous spiral: easier to wind stiff conductor, more uniform field, and parallel water paths.

    coilsfabrication dg-189

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Using this type of winding allows for a more uniform field than a simple spiral winding.

    cyclotron-master-document-09-09-012-3-00.pdf — p. 32-33

    Tabletop: The reference machine's 538 turns of copper tubing could be rebuilt as ~10 potted double-pancakes per pole with a cooling manifold, easing fabrication and repair.

  190. Keep coil temperature below about 142 F (61 C) in normal operation and 173 F (78 C) absolute maximum for the insulation/epoxy system.

    T_normal <= 142 F, T_max <= 173 F

    coilsmaterials dg-190

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Our magnet can achieve a maximum temperature of 173 oF and will normally operate at no more than 142 oF.

    cyclotron-master-document-09-09-012-3-00.pdf — p. 33

    Tabletop: Sets the thermal design point for any potted Mark II coil; consistent with Tanabe's <30 C rise rule for long potted-coil life.

  191. Pick number of turns N to match the power supply, not the physics: NI is fixed, but large-N/low-I gives cheap thin cables and dangerous high voltage, while small-N/high-I gives safe low voltage, better copper packing, and bulky expensive connections.

    NI fixed; N chosen from supply V/I window (Diamond dipole example: 40 turns, 1500 A, 500 V circuit)

    coils dg-191

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The value of number of turns (N) is chosen to match power supply and interconnection impedances.

    Marks-3.pdf — p. 35-36

    Tabletop: The reference machine's 538 turns were set by their supply; for Mark II, pick the surplus supply first, then wind N = NI_required/I_supply.

  192. Air-cooled conductors and cables are limited to a current density of about 1.5-2 A/mm^2; above that you must water-cool.

    j_air <= 1.5-2 A/mm^2

    coils dg-192

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Power distribution cables... are generally limited to a current density of <1.5 to 2 Amps/mm2.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 6 — p. 21

    Tabletop: The go/no-go line for whether a Mark II coil design can skip water cooling: at or below ~1.5 A/mm^2 in the copper, air cooling can suffice.

  193. Choose water-cooled coil current density near the canonical j = 10 A/mm^2 (economic optimum in worked example was flatter, ~4 A/mm^2; the higher value trades operating cost for smaller, cheaper coils).

    j_design ~ 10 A/mm^2 water-cooled (economic optimum ~4 A/mm^2)

    coils dg-193

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the optimum is flat and appears to be j=4 Amps/mm2. However, a higher design value (the canonical j=10 Amps/mm2 value) is generally chosen.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 6 — p. 29-30

    Tabletop: For a home machine where power cost matters and coils are hand-wound, the ~4 A/mm^2 end of the range is the better choice; the reference machine's tubing coil runs even lower.

  194. Compute coil water pressure drop from P = 0.433*f*(L/d)*(v^2/2g); use f = 64/Re for laminar flow (Re<2000) and the smooth-tube turbulent solution for Re>4000 (water nu = 1.216e-5 ft^2/s at 20 C); design in the turbulent regime for good heat transfer.

    P[psi] = 0.433*f*(L/d)*(v^2/2g); Re = v*d/nu; f = 64/Re (Re<2000)

    coils dg-194

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    f = 64/Re for laminar flow Re < 2000. For turbulent flow (Re>4000), the friction factor is gotten by solving a transcendental equation.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 6 — p. 32-34

    Tabletop: The complete hydraulic sizing recipe for any hollow-conductor or tubing-wound coil at the reference machine's scale.

  195. Water temperature rise through a coil is dT(C) = 3.8*P(kW)/q(gpm); design for <10 C rise, and never exceed ~30 C rise (with 20 C inlet) if you want long potted-coil life.

    dT[C] = 3.8*P[kW]/q[gpm]; target <10 C, max 30 C

    coils dg-195

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Desirable temperature rise... < 10 deg. C. Maximum allowable temperature rise (assuming 20 deg. C. input water) < 30 deg. C for long potted coil life.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 6 — p. 40, 45

    Tabletop: One-line flow-rate calculator: a 1 kW Mark II coil needs ~0.4 gpm for a 10 C rise.

  196. Keep cooling-water velocity below 15 ft/s in coil passages; above that, flow-induced vibration erodes the water channel over time.

    v_water < 15 ft/s (4.6 m/s)

    coilsmaterials dg-196

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    For water velocities > 15 fps, flow vibration will be present resulting in long term erosion of water cooling passage.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 6 — p. 42

    Tabletop: Hard upper bound when the builder sizes pump and passage diameter for a hollow-conductor Mark II coil.

  197. Pressure drop scales as 1/Nw^3 with the number of parallel water circuits: doubling the circuits cuts required pressure by a factor of 8 - subdivide the coil rather than buy a bigger pump.

    P ~ 1/Nw^3

    coils dg-197

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Pressure drop can be decreased by a factor of eight if the number of water circuits are doubled.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 6 — p. 47

    Tabletop: Argues for manifolded pancake sub-coils on Mark II instead of one long series water path through 538 turns.

  198. Pressure drop scales roughly as 1/d^5 with cooling-hole diameter; a slightly larger hole slashes pump requirements, and an undersized (out-of-tolerance) hole blows the hydraulic budget.

    P ~ 1/d^5

    coilsfabrication dg-198

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    If the design hole diameter is increased, the required pressure drop is decreased dramatically. If the fabricated hole diameter is too small... pressure drop can increase substantially.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 6 — p. 48

    Tabletop: When choosing hollow conductor for Mark II, err to the larger bore; also a reason to flow-test each pancake before potting.

  199. Wind each water circuit from one continuous length of conductor (no splices buried in potting), wind in a chip-free clean area, and ball-test conductor before winding by blowing a ball <= 80% of the hole diameter through the passage with high-pressure air.

    ball diameter <= 0.8 * cooling-hole diameter

    coilsfabrication dg-199

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    A single water circuit in a coil assembly should be wound from a single continuous length of conductor. Splices 'buried' within the potted insulation should not be allowed.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 9 — p. 14-16

    Tabletop: For a Mark II wound from copper refrigeration tubing: buy one continuous coil per water circuit, keep the shop swarf away from the winding, and verify the bore is clear before the tubing is buried in the stack.

  200. Impulse-test coils for intermittent turn-to-turn shorts before installing on the core (start ~10 V/turn, raise toward 200 V/turn or 2 kV max); a healthy coil's ringdown waveform only scales in amplitude, while frequency/damping changes or 'hash' indicate a short. The test does not work once the coil is on iron.

    impulse: 10 V/turn up to 200 V/turn or 2 kV; hipot: 2x operating voltage + 1 kV, leakage <= 2 mA/kV

    coilsfabrication dg-200

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    A sick coil will exhibit waveforms whose frequency and/or damping rate changes as the voltage increases or will exhibit hash at the peak of the damped sinusoid.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 9 — p. 17-24

    Tabletop: A signal generator, capacitor and scope let the builder certify the Mark II coils before they are trapped under the yoke; also hipot potted coils at 2x operating voltage + 1 kV with < 2 mA/kV leakage.

  201. Measure actual coil water flow at the real supply pressure rather than trusting handbook calculations - many tight-radius turns add flow impedance the formulas miss - and record ambient temperature since viscosity changes flow substantially.

    coilsfabrication dg-201

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Water flow calculations made for the preliminary design may be unreliable for a coil designed with many tight turns... due to the added flow impedance of tight radius turns.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 9 — p. 25

    Tabletop: The reference machine's 538-turn tubing coil is exactly the many-tight-turns case; a bucket-and-stopwatch flow test at operating pressure is the real spec, not the straight-pipe pressure-drop formula.

  202. Use non-conducting cooling water hoses at least 1 m long between manifold and coil to limit leakage current, make the water inlet fitting smaller than the outlet, and put the flow-interlock orifice on the return manifold.

    hose length >= 1 m, non-conducting

    coilssafety dg-202

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Water hoses should be at least one meter long and use nonconducting material to prevent current leakage from the magnet.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 9 — p. 3

    Tabletop: The reference machine's water-cooled copper-tubing coil sits at supply potential; a meter of plastic hose per lead and interlock-on-return are exactly the cheap practices that prevent shocks and detect a blocked circuit at home scale.

  203. Fit each coil water circuit with a thermal interlock switch (Klixon) set near 89 C, mounted on the water-return end of the current-carrying conductor via a hard-soldered block, wired to kill the power supply.

    trip ~89 C, reset ~70 C, one interlock per water circuit, all in series

    coilssafety dg-203

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The normal set-point of Klixons is about 89 C... One thermal interlock is installed on each water circuit.

    Tanabe, Iron Dominated Electromagnets — lecture 9 — p. 5-6

    Tabletop: A $5 thermal snap-switch soldered to the coil exit tube, in series with the magnet supply enable, is the single best protection against cooking the Mark II winding on a lost-water event.

  204. Insulate coils to scale: inter-turn insulation 0.3-1.0 mm, ground insulation 0.5-3.0 mm depending on voltage; air-cooled wire varnish 0.02-0.1 mm or half-lapped Kapton 0.1-0.2 mm, giving filling factors 0.63 (round wire) to 0.8 (rectangular).

    inter-turn 0.3-1.0 mm; ground 0.5-3.0 mm; varnish 0.02-0.1 mm; Kapton 0.1-0.2 mm; fill 0.63-0.8

    coilsmaterials dg-204

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Inter-turn insulation thickness is normally between 0.3 mm and 1.0 mm, the ground insulation thickness should be between 0.5 mm and 3.0 mm depending on the applied voltage.

    arXiv:1103.1119 — p. 28-29

    Tabletop: Sets realistic packing-factor expectations for a hand-wound 538-turn coil and how much window the insulation eats.

  205. Wind hollow conductor with a bending radius at least 4x the conductor width; at 3x width, keystoning grows the conductor dimension by 3.6% per bend and accumulates over many turns until the coil no longer fits the yoke window.

    R = 3A -> dA/A = 3.6%; use R >= 4A to ignore keystoning

    coilsfabrication dg-205

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    For a bending radius of three times the conductor width we can expect a keystoning of 3.6% ... we can ignore the effect of keystoning by systematically choosing a bending radius four times larger than the conductor width.

    arXiv:1103.1119 — p. 30

    Tabletop: Directly applicable to bending copper tubing for a 538-turn homemade coil: tight bends also pinch the cooling bore and risk insulation damage.

  206. Dimension the coil pack with cross-section A = N*I/(j*fc), an aspect ratio (height:width) between 1:1 and 1:2, and a packing factor fc of 0.6-0.8.

    A = b*c = N I /(j fc); c:b between 1:1 and 1:2; fc = 0.6-0.8

    coils dg-206

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    An aspect ratio of c:b between 1:1 and 1:2 should be chosen, and the packing factor fc somewhere between 0.6 and 0.8.

    arXiv:1103.1119 — p. 33

    Tabletop: Turns the amp-turn number into an actual coil window size before you buy tubing or start winding.

  207. Split coils into more parallel water circuits before enlarging the pump: pressure drop scales as 1/Kw^3 (doubling the number of circuits cuts dp by a factor of 8) and as 1/d^5 in channel diameter.

    dp ~ 1/Kw^3; dp ~ 1/d^5

    coils dg-207

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    This implies that for a given flow, the pressure drop is reduced by a factor of eight by doubling the number of cooling circuits.

    arXiv:1103.1119 — p. 33

    Tabletop: Explains why splitting a big coil into 2 or 4 hydraulic circuits lets a modest garage chiller pump do the job.

  208. Feed hollow-conductor coils with demineralized water at resistivity > 0.1 MOhm*m, pH 6-6.5, and dissolved oxygen below 0.1 ppm, with filters near the magnet; poor water quality eventually causes shorts and corrosion leaks.

    rho > 0.1e6 Ohm*m; pH 6-6.5; O2 < 0.1 ppm

    coilsmaterialssafety dg-208

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Water resistivity higher than 0.1x10^6 Ohm m; pH-value between 6 and 6.5; dissolved oxygen below 0.1 ppm

    arXiv:1103.1119 — p. 34

    Tabletop: If Mark II uses water-cooled coils at high voltage, tap water will leak current and corrode; a small DI cartridge loop is the fix.

  209. Limit convectively (air) cooled conductors and busses to j <= 1.5 A/mm^2; anything above that needs water cooling.

    j_air <= 1.5 A/mm^2

    coils dg-209

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    power distribution cables are convectively cooled and are limited to <= 1.5 Amps/mm2

    slac-r-754.pdf — p. 128-129

    Tabletop: The reference machine's copper-tubing winding at 538 turns: if any leg of the circuit (bus, jumper, lead) runs above ~1.5 A/mm^2 without water flow it will run hot; size leads accordingly.

  210. Use the canonical current density j = 10 A/mm^2 for water-cooled magnet coils, a coil packing fraction of ~0.5 for small conductors, and average turn length ~3x the magnet core length for first-pass coil sizing.

    j = 10 A/mm^2 (water-cooled); f ~ 0.5; l_ave ~ 3*L_mag

    coils dg-210

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Normally, a good value for the current density is j = 10 Amps/mm2 for water cooled coils... The value of the packing fraction is typically f ~ 0.5 for small conductors.

    slac-r-754.pdf — p. 129

    Tabletop: Lets the builder size the Mark II coil cross-section on one sheet of paper: gross coil area ~ NI/(j*f) = NI/5 in mm^2 for water-cooled copper.

  211. Design coil water circuits for fully turbulent flow (Re >= 4000) but keep flow velocity <= 4 m/s to avoid vibration and erosion of the copper passage, and hold coil temperature rise dT <= 30 C to protect epoxy insulation (<= 15 C if field stability matters).

    Re >= 4000; v <= 4 m/s; dT <= 30 C (15 C for stability)

    coilsmaterials dg-211

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Flow velocity v <= 4 m/sec to avoid flow vibration and erosion... An acceptable coil temperature rise which protects the coil epoxy encapsulation from damage is dT <= 30 C.

    slac-r-754.pdf — p. 134-135

    Tabletop: Direct water-cooling design window for a Mark II hollow-conductor coil; also warns that a lazy laminar-flow circuit cools far worse than the handbook film coefficient suggests.

  212. Estimate the coil power-weight tradeoff with kW x tons = 0.118 x (mega-ampere-turns)^2 x (mean turn length in inches) for copper.

    kW x tons(Cu) = 0.118 x (MA-turns)^2 x (in. mean turn length)

    coils dg-212

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Kilowatt-Tons = (0.118)Cu (Mega-ampere turns)^2 (inches mean turn length)

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 13

    Tabletop: Directly applicable trade study tool: the product of coil dissipation and coil weight is fixed by NI and geometry, so more copper always buys less heat.

  213. Wind coils to an approximately rectangular (square-ish) cross section around the poles; a coil that is too flat or too tall intercepts more leakage flux and wastes turns.

    coils dg-213

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The coils should be wound so that they occupy approximately a rectangular cross section around the poles ... Either too flat or too tall a coil intercepts more leakage flux and thus wastes turns.

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 3

    Tabletop: Directly applicable guidance for Mark II coil geometry.

  214. Limit close-wound naturally air-cooled coils to 750 A/in^2 of conductor continuously, 1000 A/in^2 for intermittent runs.

    J <= 750 A/in^2 (1.16 A/mm^2) continuous, air-cooled; <= 1000 A/in^2 intermittent

    coils dg-214

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    operate close-wound naturally air-cooled coils at a current density not exceeding 750 amps per square inch of conductor area. For intermittent operation this may be raised to 1000 amps per sq. in.

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 3

    Tabletop: Directly applicable thermal sizing rule for Mark II magnet coils.

  215. Favor large conductor cross-section and high current over many turns at high voltage; this simplifies both insulation and winding.

    coils dg-215

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Most coil designs favor large conductor areas and correspondingly high amperages; this reduces total voltage and simplifies both the insulation and the winding problems.

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 3

    Tabletop: Directly applicable when choosing wire gauge and supply for Mark II coils.

  216. Interleaving thin water-cooled copper cooling plates between pancake windings plus a circulation fan raises the allowable steady coil current density to about 1300 A/in^2.

    J ~ 1300 A/in^2 (2.0 A/mm^2) with interleaved water-cooled plates + fan

    coils dg-216

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    flat donuts of 1/16 in. copper sheet ... having a 1/4 in. copper pipe soldered to the outer edges ... such coils should operate steadily at 1300 amps per sq. in.

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 4

    Tabletop: Directly applicable cheap upgrade: 1/16-inch copper donut plates with soldered edge tubing between pancakes nearly doubles allowable steady excitation.

  217. Beware thermal margins on hobby-scale coils: the 6-inch's 6000-turn #13-wire coils reached iron saturation (~20 kG) below 10 A but overheated in under an hour at that current.

    6-in example: 6000 turns #13 DSC wire, ~20 kG at <10 A, <1 hr thermal limit

    coils dg-217

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    These windings saturate the iron (~20 KG) at somewhat less than ten amperes; at this current the temperature becomes excessive in less than an hour

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 4

    Tabletop: Directly applicable cautionary datum: quote coil ratings as (current, time-to-overheat) pairs, not just maximum field.

  218. Never open the magnet coil circuit at high current without surge protection (thyrite resistor or electrolytic dump tank) across the coil.

    coilssafety dg-218

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The magnet coil circuit must never be broken at high currents, of course, unless adequate surge protection is provided.

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 5

    Tabletop: Directly applicable; a Mark II with tens of henries of coil inductance needs a freewheel diode/varistor dump path or it will arc its switchgear.

  219. Size the Dee tank circuit from the Dee capacitance: ~76 pF of Dee against a 0.87 uH secondary gives resonance up to 19.5 MHz (411 keV protons at 1.28 T), with the coils made of 1/4 inch copper tubing wound coaxially (6 cm primary outside a 4 cm secondary) and the primary tapped to set coupling.

    C_dee ~ 76 pF; L ~ 0.87 uH -> f = 19.5 MHz; 1/4 in copper tubing; 6 cm dia primary over 4 cm dia secondary; 3-turn primary tapped

    rfdeecoils dg-219

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The Dee capacitance is approximately 76 pF. The secondary coil inductance of 0.87 uH or more in parallel with the Dee capacitance yields a resonance as high at 19.5 MHz

    we1pb01.pdf — p. 3

    Tabletop: Concrete LC numbers for a Mark II tank at the same scale; the swappable-primary approach lets you retune coupling without rebuilding the tank.

  220. Watch coil insulation temperature: expected insulation life roughly halves per ~8 C, so alarm at a fixed winding temperature (ORNL alarmed at 70-80 C, 130 C absolute max) and remember coils take 1-3 hours to reach thermal equilibrium.

    life ~ halves per ~8-10 C; alarm 70-80 C; t_equilibrium ~ 1-3 h

    coilssafety dg-220

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    An alarm warns the operator when the coil temperature has reached a predetermined value, usually 70 to 80 C ... one to three hours are required for the temperature to reach equilibrium.

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4357145) — p. 33

    Tabletop: Directly applicable: put a thermocouple in the Mark II winding and log it; a coil that is fine at 30 minutes can still cook at 2 hours.

  221. Put filter and tank inductors in the direct airstream of a cooling fan; coils outside the airflow run hot even when the semiconductors are fine.

    rfcoilsfabrication dg-221

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    It is important for the coils should be in the air stream of one of the cooling fans (they will run hot if not).

    Development_Notebook.pdf — p. 28

    Tabletop: Directly applicable to the homemade dee-tank coil, which sees circulating RF current far above the dee's DC feed current.

  222. Never nickel-plate an RF conductor: a nickel-plated 19 MHz copper-tube tank coil ran at 350 C (near nickel's Curie point) where the identical bare-copper coil ran at 65 C.

    ferromagnetic plating: delta shrinks with permeability; Ni (mu~500) delta = 0.00025 in at 1 MHz vs Cu 0.0025 in

    rfmaterialscoils dg-222

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    This operated normally at 65 C but when an identical coil, which had been nickel plated, was substituted, the operating temperature rose to 350 C.

    Plating.pdf — p. 4

    Tabletop: Reject nickel-plated hardware (and nickel underlays beneath chrome or silver) anywhere RF current flows in the resonator, coil, or ground-return path.

  223. Specify electrical-grade copper for RF parts: common phosphorus-deoxidized copper tube (0.015-0.08% P) has only 60-90% IACS conductivity versus 101.6% for electrical grade.

    P-deox Cu tube: 60-90% IACS; electrical-grade Cu: 101.6% IACS

    rfmaterialscoils dg-223

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Most commercially available copper tube contains 0.015% to 0.08% phosphorus as a de-oxidising agent, so that its conductivity may range from 60% to 90% I.A.C.S.

    Plating.pdf — p. 6

    Tabletop: Buy the tank-coil tubing as electrolytic/electrical-grade (C10100/C11000) copper, not generic plumbing tube, for up to ~20% lower RF resistance.

  224. Practical single-layer air-core coils top out near true Q of 800; chasing Q much above 1000 forces abnormal dimensions, wire sizes, or turn counts.

    practical Q_true <= ~800; Q > ~1000 impractical

    coilsrf dg-224

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    typically have true Q values of up to about 800. Very few practical circuits require a Q above 900. Attempting to design a coil with a True Q much over 1,000 usually results in a coil with abnormal physical dimensions

    coil_q_20061216154253848.pdf — p. 1

    Tabletop: Budget the resonant step-up assuming coil Q of a few hundred (loaded lower still), not textbook thousands, when sizing the amplifier for 5-13 kV dees.

  225. Expect a Q meter to read below true coil Q, because the instrument measures circuit Q and the coil's distributed capacitance loads the reading down.

    Q_measured < Q_true (distributed-capacitance error); circuit Q != coil Q

    coilsbeam-measurementrf dg-225

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the presence of the coil's distributed capacity causes the Q observed by the Q meter to be lower than the true Q of the coil

    coil_q_20061216154253848.pdf — p. 1

    Tabletop: When characterizing the dee resonator with a VNA or Q meter, treat the reading as a lower bound and keep leads/fixture capacitance minimal.

  226. Q increases with coil diameter and with frequency, so for a given inductance at HF prefer the physically largest coil practical.

    Q rises with dia (3-30 MHz charts: 1.0 in dia ~300-500 vs 4.0 in dia ~2000-3000) and with sqrt-like frequency dependence

    coilsrf dg-226

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Q increases with coil diameter (see figs. 1-4). Q increases with coil length, rapidly when the L/d ratio is small ... Q increases with frequency

    coil_q_20061216154253848.pdf — p. 1-2

    Tabletop: At 9 MHz a 3-4 inch diameter tank coil can reach Q well over 1000, directly multiplying dee voltage per watt of drive.

  227. Wind coils with conductor diameter between 0.45 and 0.70 times the center-to-center turn spacing; commercial stock coils often violate this and lose Q.

    0.45*S <= wire_dia <= 0.70*S (S = center-to-center turn spacing)

    coilsrf dg-227

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The conductor diameter must be within the range of 0.45 and 0.70 times the center-to-center distance between adjacent turns (not all commercial stock coils meet this condition).

    coil_q_20061216154253848.pdf — p. 2

    Tabletop: For a 9 MHz matching/tank inductor, space the turns so the wire fills 45-70% of the pitch; close-winding bare tubing throws away Q to proximity effect.

  228. Maximum Q occurs at a coil length-to-diameter ratio of 0.35-0.45, falling rapidly below that and slowly above; use L/d of at least 0.5 as a practical design margin.

    Q_max at L/d = 0.35-0.45; design L/d >= 0.5; low L/d = high Q, high L/d = low Q

    coilsrf dg-228

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Maximum Q occurs at a coil L/d ratio of between (depending on other coil design parameters) 0.35 and 0.45, decreasing rapidly below that ratio and more slowly above

    coil_q_20061216154253848.pdf — p. 2-3

    Tabletop: Make the resonator coil short and fat (roughly half as long as its diameter), not the long skinny solenoid that fits most easily in a corner.

  229. Do not trust simple coil design equations outside their validity range: L/d below 0.35, fewer than about 4 turns, or wire-to-spacing ratios outside 0.45-0.70.

    Callender/Medhurst Q equations valid only for L/d >= 0.35, n >= ~4, 0.45 <= dia/S <= 0.70

    coilsrf dg-229

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The equations do not hold for coils with a length-to-diameter ratio of less than 0.35:1, coils with less than about 4 turns, or coils with conductor diameter-to-turn spacing ratios of less than 0.45:1 or greater than 0.70:1.

    coil_q_20061216154253848.pdf — p. 3

    Tabletop: A 2-3 turn link or coupling loop at 9 MHz is outside the formulas; measure it rather than calculate it.

  230. Estimate dee capacitance by summing three parallel-plate sections (top, bottom, edge) of the dee-to-chamber geometry; on the Rutgers 12-inch this gave 77.5 pF calculated vs 78.1 pF measured on an L-C meter.

    C_total = 2*A_top*eps0/d_top + A_edge*eps0/d_edge; Rutgers: 70.5 pF (top+bottom) + 7.04 pF (edge) = 77.5 pF vs 78.1 pF measured

    rfdee dg-230

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Measurement of the capacitance with an L-C meter yields a value of 78.1pF. Nice agreement seen!

    12_inch_dee_voltage.pdf — p. 1

    Tabletop: Directly usable on the reference machine's 8-inch dee: sum simple parallel-plate terms for top/bottom/edge and verify with a cheap L-C meter before winding the tank coil.

  231. Peak-to-peak dee voltage of an inductively coupled tank follows Vp-p = 2*sqrt(2*P*L/(Rs*C)), i.e. it scales as the square root of forward power; the square-root trend held over all measured power ranges (5 W to 1300 W).

    Vp-p = 2*sqrt(2*P*L/(Rs*C)); Vpeak = sqrt(2*P*L/(Rs*C))

    rfdee dg-231

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the trend of DEE voltage to follow the square root law of the input RF power is accurate over all measured power ranges

    12_inch_dee_voltage.pdf — p. 2-3

    Tabletop: This is the sizing equation for the reference machine's LDMOS upgrade: doubling dee voltage costs 4x power, so going from 1.3 kV to 5-13 kV needs a 15-100x power increase unless L/C or Rs improves.

  232. Budget the tank's effective series resistance at roughly 10-16x the coil-only handbook estimate: the Rutgers coil alone computed 50 mOhm (1.3 mOhm/inch for 1/4-inch Cu tube, 38 inches), but the whole system measured 800 mOhm because of the stainless chamber return, stainless Conflat dee-stem support, and feedthroughs.

    Rs_system ~ 10-16 x Rs_coil; Rutgers: 0.05 ohm coil estimate vs 0.8 ohm measured system

    rfdeematerials dg-232

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    as if Rs had the value of 800mOhm - sixteen times that of the expected coil Rs ... take into account the stainless steel vacuum chamber return, the stainless steel Conflat DEE stem support and RF feed throughs.

    12_inch_dee_voltage.pdf — p. 2-3

    Tabletop: When predicting Mark II dee voltage, don't use the coil resistance alone; the stainless chamber and stem return path dominates losses, so use copper return paths where possible and expect ~1 ohm scale Rs.

  233. Direct HV probes fail above ~200 W forward power (the P6015 departed from the sqrt-P trend, acting like a resistive breakdown); calibrate a capacitive chamber pickup against the direct probe at low power and extrapolate linearly for high-power dee voltage measurement.

    Rutgers: Dee Vp-p = 3710 x pickup Vp-p (R^2 = 0.994), valid to at least 1300 W

    rfbeam-measurement dg-233

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the induced voltage on the capacitive pickup facing the DEE was calibrated against forward power at lower levels. Extrapolation allowed us to measure forward power levels up to 1300 watts

    12_inch_dee_voltage.pdf — p. 3-4

    Tabletop: Exactly the measurement chain the builder needs for the LDMOS upgrade: calibrate their pickup at 5-50 W against a scope probe, then trust the pickup alone at 100-500 W.

  234. A high-voltage probe loads the tank measurably - the Tektronix P6015 added 3.0 pF and shifted the resonant frequency accordingly - so retune or correct for probe capacitance whenever a probe touches the dee stem.

    delta-C_probe = 3.0 pF (P6015)

    rfbeam-measurement dg-234

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the P6015 probe introduced 3.0pF of capacitance; the tank circuit was indeed reduced in frequency corresponding to 3 pF

    12_inch_dee_voltage.pdf — p. 4

    Tabletop: With the reference machine's ~78 pF-class dee, 3 pF is a ~2% frequency pull - enough to detune a high-Q tank, so calibrate with the probe on, then remove it and retune.

  235. Measure mutual inductance between coupling loop and tank coil by connecting them in series aiding then series opposing: the difference of the two measured inductances is 4M.

    L_aiding - L_opposing = 4M; M = sqrt(Rs*Z)/(2*pi*f) at match (Rutgers: M ~ 0.02-0.07 uH)

    rf dg-235

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The connections to one of the coils are then interchanged and the equivalent inductance is measured again. The difference between the two measured inductances is then 4M.

    12_inch_dee_voltage.pdf — p. 5-6

    Tabletop: A bench L-C meter trick the builder can use to characterize their coupling loop; M of tens of nH is the expected scale for a matched half-turn loop.

  236. At critical coupling (maximum voltage transfer), the measured loaded Q is exactly half the unloaded Q0; measure Q from the FWHM of a weakly-probed S21 sweep, but a simple reflected-power meter showing zero reflection is a sufficient indicator of critical coupling.

    Q_measured/Q0 = 1/(1 + (M^2*w^2/R2)/R1); Q_loaded = Q0/2 at critical coupling; Q = f0/dF_FWHM

    rf dg-236

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    is exactly 1/2 of Qo when the primary is critically coupled corresponding to the value giving maximum response ... a simple reflected RF power meter will suffice to show a perfect match - indicating critical coupling.

    12_inch_dee_voltage.pdf — p. 6-7

    Tabletop: The builder can tune their coupling loop with just an SWR bridge: adjust loop position/taps until reflected power nulls, and check Qloaded = Q0/2 with a NanoVNA S21 sweep.

  237. Expect an unloaded Q of roughly 900-1000 for a copper-refrigeration-tube tank coil at ~15 MHz (Q0 = wL/Rs = 920-1036 on the Rutgers machine); a measured loaded Q of ~460 at match confirms critical coupling.

    Q0 = omega*L/Rs = (9.42e7)(1.1e-6)/0.107 ~ 968

    rf dg-237

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    From Fig.12 we determine Qmeasured at a distance of 11mm to be 460. This implies a Qo of 920.

    12_inch_dee_voltage.pdf — p. 6-8

    Tabletop: A benchmark for the reference machine's ~9 MHz tank: if their measured Q0 is far below ~900, there is excess loss (bad joints, steel in the return path) worth hunting down.

  238. Any coupling geometry that presents (50+j0) ohms at resonance yields the same peak dee voltage for a given forward power - different loop-coil distances and tap settings are equivalent once matched, so optimize for mechanical convenience.

    rf dg-238

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Empirically it was found for a given forward power into each of the (50+j0) Ohm points, the peak capacitor voltage was always the same.

    12_inch_dee_voltage.pdf — p. 7

    Tabletop: The builder need not agonize over loop position vs tap point: any combination that nulls reflected power delivers identical dee voltage, so pick the mechanically stable one.

  239. For a given RF power the only knobs that raise dee voltage are minimizing Rs or increasing tank inductance L while decreasing dee capacitance C to hold the resonant frequency.

    Vp-p = 2*sqrt(2*P*L/(Rs*C)) => maximize L/C ratio, minimize Rs at fixed f0 = 1/(2*pi*sqrt(LC))

    rfdee dg-239

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    minimizing Rs, or increasing L2 while simultaneously decreasing C2 (to maintain the resonant frequency) are the only parameters that can be adjusted to increase the DEE voltage for a given amount of RF power.

    12_inch_dee_voltage.pdf — p. 8

    Tabletop: For Mark II, shrinking dee-to-liner capacitance (larger dee-to-lid spacing) and using a bigger low-loss coil buys dee voltage for free before spending on amplifier watts.

  240. On a 12-inch-class machine, ~1000 W forward power produces ~15 kV p-p dee voltage (Rs=0.8 ohm, L=1.1 uH, C=78 pF); the chamber tolerated 2000 W but the tank, housing and stem run very warm.

    1000 W -> ~15 kVp-p; 2000 W withstood with significant heating

    rfdee dg-240

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    It is not necessary to operate at 2000 watts, as shown above 1000 watts produces a peak-to-peak DEE voltage of approximately 15kV.

    12_inch_dee_voltage.pdf — p. 8

    Tabletop: Scales the reference machine's plan: with a similar tank, a 500 W LDMOS amp should land near 10 kVp-p - comfortably in their 5-13 kV target - and thermal management of stem and coil becomes the real issue.

  241. Protect the beam-current electrometer from RF pickup with a large series inductance (RF choke) in the collector lead instead of a thick shield around the collector tip.

    beam-measurementrf dg-241

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the original purpose of the shield was to prevent RF from coupling to the pickup ... We agreed a large series inductance (an RF Choke) should mitigate this concern.

    ion_source_studies_part_1.pdf — p. 1

    Tabletop: Lets the builder use an unshielded collector at nA levels: a ~100 uH-mH choke at the feedthrough kills 9 MHz pickup without blocking DC beam current.

  242. If using an ion-source chimney, verify the first half-turn clears the chimney body: with a 0.5-in dee gap and Rs = 0.8 ohm, calculated first ions clear at ~200 W RF (50 W is far too low, 500 W comfortable).

    First-turn radius from x,y solutions with E = Vpeak/gap; thresholds: 50 W too low, ~200 W first ions clear, 500 W sufficient

    ion-sourcerfbeam-dynamics dg-242

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    an input RF power level of 50 watts is too low, and 500 watts should be sufficient. The first ions are expected to clear the chimney at approximately 200 watts.

    ion_source_studies_part_1.pdf — p. 5

    Tabletop: A geometry trap for Mark II: any chimney or source structure must be smaller than the first half-turn diameter set by the dee voltage, or beam dies before the first gap crossing.

  243. Set RF frequency from the cyclotron resonance relation: for protons f(MHz) = 1.52 x B(kilogauss); tune B (not f) during operation to find resonance.

    f = eB/(2*pi*m); protons f(Mc) = 1.52*B(kG); deuterons/He++ f = 0.76*B

    rfbeam-dynamics dg-243

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Protons: f (megacycles) = 1.52B (kilogauss) ... The actual technique used to control resonance in a cyclotron is to vary the magnetic field, with the applied frequency held constant.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 156

    Tabletop: The reference machine's 0.59 T (5.9 kG) gives 8.97 MHz, confirming their ~9 MHz choice; for Mark II pick B first, then f = 1.52*B.

  244. If beam peaks with the source displaced off-center, suspect unequal accelerating voltage along the dee faces (transmission-line droop, measured up to 5 percent) driving orbit-center precession; displacements over 2 in have been needed on large machines.

    D-face voltage droop up to 5%; compensate by radial source offset

    ion-sourcebeam-dynamicsrf dg-244

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    there will be a somewhat lower potential at the ends of the D faces nearest the lines ... measured in some cyclotrons to be as great as 5 per cent ... a displacement of the ion source of over 2 in. has been necessary.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 164

    Tabletop: Make the source mount adjustable by a few mm in both directions and tune position for beam, not for geometric center.

  245. Electric gap focusing helps only in the first few turns and only for ions crossing while the RF field is DECREASING; ions bunch toward peak-voltage phase automatically, and the total usable phase migration for an extracted beam is one half-cycle (0 to -pi/2 and back).

    phase focusing quadrant: field decreasing during transit; total phase excursion ~pi radians; internal targets tolerate up to ~3*pi/2

    beam-dynamicsrf dg-245

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the practical maximum migration in phase will be from zero to -pi/2 and back to zero, a total phase migration of pi radians or one half-cycle.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 166-171

    Tabletop: With a 3-4% field droop and 160 turns-scale acceleration, the reference machine's dee voltage sets how much phase slip they can afford: higher V = fewer turns = more field-shape tolerance.

  246. Raising dee voltage is the universal cure for marginal resonance (fewer turns, more phase-slip budget) but trades against breakdown and RF power; most machines end up accepting a slightly smaller exit radius and energy to keep intensity.

    N_turns ~ T_final/(2*e*V_dee); minimum V_dee vs energy and field droop delta per Cohen (Fig. 6-25)

    rfbeam-dynamics dg-246

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Increasing the D voltage requires fewer turns for acceleration to maximum energy and will compensate for a larger phase shift. However, D voltage is usually limited by ... power and spark breakdown.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 172

    Tabletop: At 1.3 kV and 160 keV the reference machine's ions make ~60+ turns; doubling dee voltage halves turns and dramatically relaxes both field-uniformity and vacuum (scattering) requirements.

  247. Choose dee-to-lid clearance for the working dee voltage: MIT's 1.25-in clearance (5-in lid gap) capped dee voltage at ~70 kV by breakdown; larger clearance is the only durable fix beyond polishing.

    MIT: 5-in gap between lids, 2.5-in dee height, 1.25-in clearance -> ~70 kV limit (~56 kV/in working gradient)

    deerfchamber dg-247

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The gap between chamber lids was chosen to be 5 in., leaving 1 1/4-in. clearance between D's and lids ... resulting in a D-voltage limit of about 70 kv due to breakdown.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 175

    Tabletop: At 1.3 kV the builder has enormous margin; for a Mark II at several kV, ~50 kV/in of clearance in vacuum with rounded edges is a comfortable design gradient.

  248. Water-cool dees aggressively: cooling tubes soldered inside on 2-3 in spacing prevent local heating and warping under RF power; taper the dee height toward the periphery to follow the shrinking beam envelope and cut lid capacitance and RF power.

    cooling-tube pitch 2-3 in; ~10 kW dissipated per dee+line at MIT scale

    deerffabrication dg-248

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    it has been found necessary to have these tubes spaced as closely as 2 to 3 in. to prevent local heating and warping of the D's under power.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 175

    Tabletop: At tens of watts the builder needs no water, but the warping lesson stands: dee thermal drift detunes the resonator, so keep dee structures stiff and thermally anchored.

  249. Match the exposed ionization-column length to the dee aperture (5/8 in for a 1.6-in aperture, 1-3/8 in for 4-in dees); too long a column loads the RF circuit with off-focus ions and drags down dee voltage.

    optimum column length ~ 0.35-0.4 x internal dee aperture

    ion-sourcerf dg-249

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    At MIT, with an internal D aperture of 1.6 in. the optimum length of ionization column was 5/8 in. For 4-in.-wide D's in the Carnegie Institution 60-in. machine it was 1 3/8-in.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 178

    Tabletop: Hood or collimate the reference machine's source so only ~1/3 of the dee aperture height of plasma column is exposed; more column means RF load, not more beam.

  250. Feed the dees through quarter-wave resonant lines (dee on inner-conductor end), drive push-pull, and suppress the push-push mode; keep the oscillator physically simple with the shortest possible leads - that is the only general anti-parasitic rule.

    f_pushpull = 1/(2*pi*sqrt(L(C+2C'))); push-push mode has higher Q and no dee-to-dee voltage

    rf dg-250

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The only general rule is: The simpler the physical structure and the shorter the leads and connections, the less subject is the oscillator to parasitics.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 185-187

    Tabletop: If the Mark II goes two-dee push-pull, watch for the push-push mode (no accelerating voltage, oscillator happily locked); a single-dee-plus-dummy design sidesteps it.

  251. Anticipate the blue-glow multipactor discharge: it clamps dee voltage to a few hundred volts, heats surfaces and liberates gas, and only fast pumping plus continued outgassing (and an oscillator that can drive through it) breaks the cycle.

    rfvacuum dg-251

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    This loading of the D circuit by discharge currents holds the D potentials down to a few hundred volts ... Unless the loading is removed, the chamber will continue to operate in the low-voltage, blue-glow discharge condition indefinitely.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 188

    Tabletop: The reference machine's ~1.3 kV dee sits right in classic multipactor territory; surface conditioning, low pressure, and the ability to snap the drive up fast are the standard escapes.

  252. Fit a remotely adjustable trimmer capacitor (movable grounded plate facing a dee edge, ~1 percent frequency range, with excellent RF contact to the wall) to balance the two dee-circuit frequencies and dee voltages under power.

    tuning range ~1% in frequency

    rfdee dg-252

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Such a variable capacitance can be provided by a movable plate on the side wall of the chamber facing one edge of the D ... a range of motion sufficient to tune over about 1 per cent in frequency.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 188

    Tabletop: A bellows-actuated plate near the dee gives the builder live resonance trim without opening the chamber - invaluable when thermal drift walks the dee frequency.

  253. Expect spark conditioning of a freshly opened chamber: assemble clean (no fingerprints, dust, steel wool, or coarse abrasives), round and polish all high-field contours, then let sparking rain until it subsides - no amount of polish eliminates conditioning.

    chamberrffabrication dg-253

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    dust should be controlled and all grease removed (even fingerprints), and under no circumstances should steel wool or coarse abrasives be used in cleaning.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 189

    Tabletop: After every chamber opening, budget an hour of gradually raised dee voltage for conditioning before expecting stable beam.

  254. Prefer a self-excited oscillator closely coupled to the high-Q dee circuit (frequency follows dee warping and loading automatically); the grounded-anode push-pull variant with crossed neutralizing capacitors is the simplest and most parasitic-free of the classic circuits.

    Illinois 42-in: two '880' tubes, ~60 kW total input; grounded-anode, cross-neutralized, low-Q grid coil

    rf dg-254

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The most significant advantage of this circuit is its simplicity and compactness along with the freedom from delicate tuning requirements or precise construction.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 190-193

    Tabletop: The same logic favors the reference machine's self-excited or PLL-followed drive: let the dee resonator define frequency so mechanical drift retunes the drive instead of killing the beam.

  255. Seal flanges with a gasket in a machined groove, gasket ~50 percent thicker than groove depth; 1/4-in gaskets suffice for even the largest seals; use neoprene (low vapor pressure, grease-tolerant) and lay a thin copper-foil strip half-over the gasket where RF current must cross the joint.

    gasket thickness ~ 1.5x groove depth; 1/4-in section adequate for largest flanges

    sealsvacuumrf dg-255

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    about 50 per cent thicker than the depth of the groove to allow for compression ... 1/4-in. gaskets have proved adequate for even the largest seals ... Conductivity for rf currents through such a seal can be assured by half-covering the gasket with a thin copper-foil strip.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 199-201

    Tabletop: Directly usable rules for the reference machine's lid and port seals; the copper-foil RF bridge over elastomer joints prevents mysterious Q loss and local heating.

  256. Set the RF frequency slightly below the central-field cyclotron frequency but above the edge-field frequency, so accumulated phase error first grows negative then recovers - this minimizes the dee voltage needed to reach full radius.

    f_edge < f_rf < f_center

    rfbeam-dynamics dg-256

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    apply a radio frequency oscillating voltage to the electrode that is slightly less than the cyclotron frequency given at the center of the field, but greater than [that] near the edges.

    perm_magnet_cyclotron.pdf — p. 20

    Tabletop: A concrete tuning rule for the builder: don't tune RF to the central field value; split the difference toward the outer-radius field.

  257. If RF is tuned exactly to the central frequency of a radially decreasing field, ions slip to 90 degrees of phase in only about a dozen turns and stop gaining energy - which is why exact-center tuning demands very high dee voltage.

    ~12 turns to 90 deg phase slip with f_rf = f_center

    rfbeam-dynamics dg-257

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    It would only take a few cycles, on the order of 12, for most cyclotrons to have reached this velocity.

    perm_magnet_cyclotron.pdf — p. 20

    Tabletop: Quantifies how little phase budget a mistuned tabletop machine has; explains failed runs where beam dies at small radius.

  258. Use one driven dee against the grounded chamber wall (dummy dee) instead of two dees: it halves the RF feedthrough count and the whole chamber becomes the return electrode - the standard simplification for small machines.

    deerf dg-258

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    it has one dee-shaped copper electrode, and the grounded vacuum chamber functions as the other electrode

    22thesis10.pdf — p. 13

    Tabletop: The reference machine already does this; it remains the right choice for Mark II unless push-pull two-dee RF is needed for higher energy gain per turn.

  259. Size the dees to about 0.9 of the pole radius with a small dee-to-dee gap: Iowa State's thin sheet-copper dees were 22.5 cm diameter and 2.4 cm high, separated by a 1.5 cm gap, water-cooled through the supporting stems.

    dee dia 22.5 cm vs 25.4 cm pole face (0.886); dee height 2.4 cm; dee-dee gap 1.5 cm

    deechamberrf dg-259

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The dees, made of thin sheet copper, arc 22.5 cm in diameter, 2.4 cm high, and they are separated by a gap of 1.5 cm.

    The Iowa State University 1.5 MeV Undergraduate Cyclotron — p. 7

    Tabletop: A directly copyable dee geometry for an 8-10 inch pole; note the dees must be water cooled once RF power reaches ~kW.

  260. Budget extraction realistically: even a mature machine extracted only ~30% of the circulating beam, and overall RF-to-beam power efficiency was 10-15%.

    extraction ~30% of internal beam; beam power / RF DC input ~ 10-15%

    beam-dynamicsrf dg-260

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    This value is about 10% for 120 uamp of deflected deuterons, increasing to 15% for a 200 uamp beam. About 30% of the internal beam at the exit radius is extracted.

    Argonne 60-inch cyclotron report — p. 19

    Tabletop: Sets expectations if Mark II attempts a deflector: losing two-thirds of the beam at the septum is normal, not failure.

  261. Set the extraction gap by the empirical vacuum-breakdown limit d[mm] >= 1.41e-2 * U[kV]^1.5 (clean flat surfaces): 10 kV needs >=0.45 mm, 30 kV >=2.3 mm, 50 kV >=5 mm; smaller gaps arc, much larger gaps waste extraction field.

    d[mm] >= 1.41e-2 * (U[kV])^(3/2)

    ion-sourcerffabrication dg-261

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The voltage breakdown limit determines the necessary gap width. The empirically determined limit (valid for clean, flat surfaces) is d[mm] >= 1.41 x 10^-2 * phi[kV]^(3/2).

    Wolf (ed.), Handbook of Ion Sources — p. 379

    Tabletop: Direct rule for the reference machine's source-to-puller spacing and any dee-to-ground clearance: a few-kV dee needs sub-mm minimum, but leave margin because sputtered metal films spoil the 'clean surface' assumption fast.

  262. Dielectric strength of polymer insulation drops steeply with thickness -- Teflon FEP holds 240 kV/mm at 0.025 mm but only 70 kV/mm at 5 mm -- so rate thick insulators from thick-sample data, never from thin-film numbers.

    Teflon FEP: 240 kV/mm @ 0.025 mm; 70 kV/mm @ 5 mm (still ~350 kV across 5 mm in theory; derate heavily in practice)

    materialsrf dg-262

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Dielectric strength / Thickness: 240 kV/mm at 0.025 mm; 70 kV/mm at 5 mm.

    Wolf (ed.), Handbook of Ion Sources — p. 523

    Tabletop: When insulating the reference machine's extraction or dee leads with PTFE sheet or heat-shrink, use the bulk (70 kV/mm-class) figure with a 5-10x safety factor, not the datasheet film value.

  263. For automated matching prefer an L-network over T or Pi: it has only one L-C combination per load (simplest search algorithm), and two complementary L configurations selected by an RF switch cover the whole Smith chart.

    2 L-network topologies (shunt-C input vs shunt-C output) + RF switch = full impedance coverage

    rf dg-263

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Compared to T or Pi networks, the L network uses only one combination of inductance and capacitance. This simplifies the microcontroller tuning algorithm.

    A 3.5–30 MHz Automatic Antenna Impedance Matching System — p. 11

    Tabletop: If the builder automates their dee match at 9 MHz, a stepper-driven L-network is the simplest topology whose tuning can't get lost in redundant solutions.

  264. Sample line power through a ~30 dB directional coupler so a +17 dBm-max AD8307 log detector can read up to 200 W; 30 dB coupling keeps main-line loss negligible.

    P_coupled = P_line - 30 dB; 200 W (53 dBm) -> 23 dBm approx detector max

    rfbeam-measurement dg-264

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The coupling factor is high, ~1000 or 30 dB, to minimize main line power loss ... enables 200 W power measurements using the AD8307 logarithmic detector IC

    A 3.5–30 MHz Automatic Antenna Impedance Matching System — p. 18

    Tabletop: Exactly sized for the reference machine's 100-500 W upgrade: a homebrew 30 dB coupler plus AD8307 boards gives continuous forward/reflected monitoring across their whole power range.

  265. Build the HF coupler the Kaune way: ferrite toroids (FT-82-67) wound with AWG 26 wire slipped over 2-inch sections of RG-8, so the coax shield passing through the toroid blocks capacitive coupling and only magnetic coupling samples the line; achieves 28-35 dB directivity across 3.5-30 MHz.

    FT-82-67 toroids, AWG 26 windings, 2-in RG-8 through-line sections; directivity 35 dB at 3.5 MHz, 28 dB at 30 MHz

    rffabrication dg-265

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Ferrite toroids wound with AWG 26 wire and surrounding two 2 inch sections of RG-8 50 Ohm coaxial cable form the coupling transformers.

    A 3.5–30 MHz Automatic Antenna Impedance Matching System — p. 18-19

    Tabletop: A ~$5 coupler build that brackets the reference machine's 9 MHz band; the shield-through-toroid trick is the detail that makes homebrew directivity respectable.

  266. Coupler directivity sets the floor of SWR measurement: with 28 dB directivity a perfectly matched load still reads SWR 1.08, with 35 dB it reads 1.03; commercial HF couplers span 15-44 dB.

    SWR_floor = 1.08 at 28 dB directivity; 1.03 at 35 dB

    rf dg-266

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the SWR measured using this directional coupler is 1.08 and 1.03 for 28 dB and 35 dB of directivity, respectively

    A 3.5–30 MHz Automatic Antenna Impedance Matching System — p. 19-20

    Tabletop: Tells the builder not to chase SWR below ~1.1 on a homebrew bridge - that residual is the instrument, not the match.

  267. Calibrate homebrew power sensors in two ranges: against a VNA/signal generator at low power and against a Bird 43 thruline wattmeter from 30 to 100 W, building an ADC-to-dBm lookup table (AD8307 slope 25 mV/dB).

    AD8307: 0.025 V/dB slope, ~2.0 V intercept; two-range calibration 0-30 W and 30-100 W

    rfbeam-measurement dg-267

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Figure 42 - 30 W to 100 W Power Calibration Setup using Bird 43 Wattmeter

    A 3.5–30 MHz Automatic Antenna Impedance Matching System — p. 57-58

    Tabletop: The builder already lives in this instrument ecosystem; a Bird 43 (or borrowed one) transfers absolute power calibration to permanently installed cheap sensors.

  268. A workable auto-tune algorithm: alternately step the capacitor then the inductor toward the SWR minimum, repeating up to 3 times, stopping at SWR < 1.5:1 (4% reflected power) - the standard 'acceptable match' threshold for solid-state amplifiers.

    SWR 1.5:1 <=> 4% reflected; iterate C then L, <= 3 passes; matched initial SWRs up to 26:1

    rf dg-268

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    actuates stepper motors to alternately adjust a variable capacitor and a variable inductor to reduce VSWR to less than 1.5:1

    A 3.5–30 MHz Automatic Antenna Impedance Matching System — p. 6-8, 40

    Tabletop: SWR 1.5:1 is the protection threshold for the reference machine's LDMOS amp too; coordinate-descent on C then L converges fine for the single-resonance dee load.

  269. Cyclotron resonance frequency is f0 = 15.2 * B[T] * Z / A MHz - about 10 MHz per tesla region for protons (15.2 MHz at 1 T).

    f0[MHz] = 15.2 * B[T] * Z/A

    rfbeam-dynamics dg-269

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    fo = qBo/2pi mi = (1.52x10^7) Bo(tesla)/A

    ParticleAccelerators8275.pdf — p. 524

    Tabletop: One-line check of the reference machine's operating point: 0.59 T -> ~9.0 MHz for protons; sets the Mark II RF band for any target field.

  270. Relativistic phase slip caps a fixed-frequency cyclotron at Tmax = sqrt(16*q*V0*mi*c^2/pi) with optimal detuned injection - so the maximum energy grows only as the square root of dee voltage (100 kV -> ~31 MeV for deuterons; the practical cure is more volts per turn).

    Tmax = sqrt(16*q*V0*mi*c^2/pi); f_rf/f_g0 = 1/(1+Tmax/2mi c^2)

    rfbeam-dynamics dg-270

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the final kinetic energy is maximized by taking Vo large... a high gap voltage accelerates particles in fewer revolutions so that there is less opportunity... to get out of synchronization.

    ParticleAccelerators8275.pdf — p. 530-531

    Tabletop: At sub-MeV this limit is distant (10 kV dee -> ~3 MeV proton ceiling), but the same physics governs field-flatness tolerance: fewer turns forgives more field error.

  271. Low-energy protons orbit at 15.23 MHz per tesla (f = qB/2*pi*m); scale RF frequency linearly with field for any classical proton cyclotron.

    f(MHz) = 15.23 * B(T) for protons

    rfbeam-dynamics dg-271

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Low energy proton in 1 T field: 15.23 MHz

    Unit_10_Lecture_14_Cyclotron_basics.pdf — p. 29

    Tabletop: The single most-used number in the reference machine's notebook: 0.59 T -> 9.0 MHz; a 1.2 T Mark II -> 18.3 MHz, still comfortable amateur-radio-technique territory.

  272. Estimate turn number as N = T_final/(n_gaps*V0*sin(phi)) and turn spacing as dr/dN ~ r*(T1/T); low energy gain per turn means thousands of turns and micron-scale outer-orbit separation, which is what makes extraction hard.

    N = T/(n*V0*sin(phi)); dr/dN ~ r*(T1/T); e.g. 250 MeV at 17 keV/turn -> N~15,000, dr/dN ~ 20 um

    beam-dynamicsrf dg-272

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    250 MeV protons; 17 KeV/turn: N~15,000... 250 MeV protons r=0.3m: dr/dN ~ 20 microns!

    Unit_10_Lecture_14_Cyclotron_basics.pdf — p. 43

    Tabletop: For the builder: 1 MeV at 2 kV/gap (2 gaps) is ~250 turns with final-orbit spacing ~0.2 mm at r=12 cm - explaining why higher dee voltage directly eases both extraction and vacuum requirements.

  273. The classical fixed-frequency cyclotron is limited to under ~25 MeV protons because phase slip accumulates at ~360*(gamma-1) degrees per turn; at 21 MeV that is ~8 deg/turn, losing a peak-phase ion in 11 revolutions unless energy gain per turn is enormous (360 kV for the LBL 60-inch).

    dphi/dn = 360*(gamma-1) deg/turn; classical limit E < ~25 MeV

    beam-dynamicsrf dg-273

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    dphi/dn=360 [gamma-1] -> 8 deg. An ion on peak phase is lost in 11 revolutions. Only solution- very high energy gain per turn - 360kV

    Unit_10_Lecture_14_Cyclotron_basics.pdf — p. 51

    Tabletop: Reassurance and ceiling in one number: at 1 MeV gamma-1 = 0.001, ~0.4 deg/turn - the Mark II is nowhere near the relativistic limit, and the classical (non-AVF) architecture is fine to several MeV.

  274. A single real dee working against its image in a grounded plate is a proven small-machine RF architecture: 50-ohm amp, wattmeter, matching transformer, and a hand-adjustable inductor to pull the LC resonance onto the cyclotron frequency.

    f = 1/(2*pi*sqrt(LC)), C fixed by dee geometry, L adjusted (deformable coil) to tune

    rfdee dg-274

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The second DEE has been faked using the image of the real DEE on a grounded conductor ... By twisting the inductor, we can change the inductance to match our inductance requirements.

    The_Cyclotron_Magnet_and_RF_Oscillator-low-quality.pdf — p. 11

    Tabletop: This is the reference machine's exact topology, validated on a comparable machine; the deformable-inductor trim is a simple Mark II tuning mechanism.

  275. Expect an unloaded resonator Q of order 1000+ from a well-made small dee circuit (this machine measured Q = 1600 unloaded), and remember high Q means a narrow resonance requiring precise, stable tuning.

    Q = f0/delta-f = 2*pi*E_stored/E_lost per cycle; measured Q_unloaded = 1600

    rf dg-275

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    high precision is necessary for a coil or circuit with a high Q value ... The Q of this cyclotron was measured at 1600, under no loading.

    The_Cyclotron_Magnet_and_RF_Oscillator-low-quality.pdf — p. 11-12

    Tabletop: Direct benchmark for the reference machine's resonator: if measured Q is far below ~1000, hunt for lossy joints; and thermal drift of a Q~1600 circuit needs active or frequent retuning at 9 MHz.

  276. Know which breakdown regime you're in: below ~1e-5 torr the physics is vacuum breakdown (field emission/particulates), above ~1e-4 torr it is gas breakdown (Paschen); the decade between is a gray zone.

    vacuum regime < 1e-5 torr; gas regime > 1e-4 torr

    vacuumrf dg-276

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    For typical cases of interest, 'vacuum' pressure is lower than 10-5 torr, and 'gas' pressure higher than 10-4 torr.

    WernerThesis_hv_vacuum.pdf — p. 23

    Tabletop: Cyclotrons run 1e-5 to 1e-4 torr with gas feed - squarely in the gray zone - so the reference machine's spark limit will move with operating pressure, and tests at base pressure overstate what they can hold with gas flowing.

  277. Condition ('bake out') the tank with RF applied in short bursts at reduced power, never leaving RF on through a glow discharge, gradually raising power until vacuum stays below 1e-4 mm with ~2 kV steady RF.

    condition until P < 1e-4 torr with RF steady at ~2 kV

    rfvacuum dg-277

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    r.f. power should never be left on for prolonged periods under these circumstances, else the risk is run of cracking the glass dee insulators. The power and length of application should be gradually increased

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 10

    Tabletop: Directly applicable startup ritual at the reference machine's 1.3 kV dee level; persistent glow during conditioning signals organic contamination (grease, oil, rubber) in the tank.

  278. Use single-dee construction (the grounded tank is the other 'dee') to simplify tank and oscillator; add a symmetric grounded dummy-dee edge for better ion focusing only after the machine works.

    deerfbeam-dynamics dg-278

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the 'single-dee' construction; this has many advantages ... Better ion focussing can be obtained by installing a 'dummy' grounded dee edge symmetric to the insulated dee, but this is a refinement

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 8

    Tabletop: Exactly the reference machine's architecture; the dummy-dee edge is a proven low-cost Mark II upgrade for a cleaner accelerating gap.

  279. For the RF drive, a grounded-grid Hartley self-excited oscillator confines RF currents to intended paths better than most circuits; include the dee-to-ground capacitance as the major tank-circuit capacitance and trim frequency with a small parallel capacitor.

    C_tank ~ C_dee-ground + C_trim; step-up by tapping plate down the coil

    rf dg-279

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The dee-to-ground capacity appears as the major portion of the capacitance in the tank circuit, which must be calculated taking this into account

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 8

    Tabletop: Even with a modern solid-state chain, the builder must treat dee capacitance as the resonator's dominant C when designing the matching network; the confine-the-RF-current lesson is timeless.

  280. Provide short, broad RF ground paths: mount the tube through a large hole in a copper ground sheet at grid-terminal level and extend that sheet to the tank wall; keep the tube close to the tank but out of the magnetic field.

    rf dg-280

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    it is important to provide short, broad paths for current flow, especially in the ground circuits ... While the tube should be placed as close to the tank as possible, it must yet be kept away from the magnetic field

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 8-9

    Tabletop: Directly applicable to the reference machine's amplifier: wide copper sheet/strap grounds and a short feed run, with magnetically sensitive parts (and LDMOS heat sinks) out of the fringe field.

  281. Choke and bypass every circuit that connects to a tank element so RF cannot reach meters and supply lines, and make magnet, source, and RF controls instantly adjustable and kill-switchable.

    rfsafety dg-281

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    All circuits connected to tank elements should have adequate choking and bypassing to prevent r.f. from reaching the meters and supply lines.

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 9

    Tabletop: Directly applicable; the reference machine's beam-current, bias, and gauge lines all need feedthrough RC/choke filtering at 9 MHz.

  282. Treat all cyclotron supply voltages as lethal: fit interlock switches on power-supply covers, keep grounding hooks by the machine, and enclose the oscillator in a grounded copper screen box.

    safetyrf dg-282

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The voltages employed on the various cyclotron components are deadly; proper precautions must be taken, even during preliminary testing ... Interlock switches on the power supply covers and grounding hooks

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 9

    Tabletop: Directly applicable home-lab safety baseline for Mark II.

  283. Thin chamber lids over a wide flat span bow inward under vacuum, changing dee capacitance (detuning the RF) and reducing flashover voltage - tack-weld internal support posts under the lids.

    example: 3/16 in lids over ~2 ft span required posts

    chamberrffabrication dg-283

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the top and bottom of the chamber to bow in, which affected the capacitance of the dee and reduced the maximum voltage that the dee could withstand before flashing over.

    we1pb05.pdf — p. 2

    Tabletop: Directly relevant to any thin-lid Mark II chamber squeezed into a small magnet gap: plan support posts (clear of the beam spiral) from the start.

  284. A single dee plus grounded dummy dee doubles the required dee voltage compared to two dees, but halves the RF feedthrough/plumbing complexity - the right trade at amateur scale.

    1 dee: V_required x2, feedthroughs /2

    deerf dg-284

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Having only one dee rather than two doubles the voltage requirement, but reduces the cost and complexity of having two RF feedthroughs in the vacuum chamber.

    we1pb05.pdf — p. 2

    Tabletop: Confirms the single-dee choice for Mark II unless dee voltage becomes the binding constraint.

  285. HV coax cable is an arc-energy reservoir - Mammoflex M-1 stores 56 pF/ft, so 20 ft holds ~0.4 J at 30 kV; persistent arcing was finally fixed only by removing excess cable and shortening the run to ~5 ft (~0.1 J).

    E = 0.5*C*V^2; 56 pF/ft x 20 ft at 30 kV = 0.4 J; 5 ft = 0.1 J

    safetyrf dg-285

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Mammoflex M-1 HV cable has C of 56 pF per foot ... ~20 feet total ~0.4 Joules at 30 kV ... Removed excess cable. Run is now ~ 5 feet total

    2010cycconf_TPONTER_beam_ionsource.pdf — p. 43-49

    Tabletop: For any HV feed on Mark II (deflector, source bias): keep cable runs minimal - stored cable energy, not the supply, does the arc damage.

  286. Protect HV circuits in stages: a large series resistor near the supply (150 Mohm) plus a second resistor at the chamber (5 Mohm), coax shields grounded through 68-ohm 2 W resistors, and the resistor/feedthrough housed in acrylic tubes covered with grounded copper mesh.

    150 Mohm supply-side + 5 Mohm chamber-side series resistors; 68 ohm shield-ground resistors

    safetyrf dg-286

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    We've encased the resistor in a grounded shield, and the coax shields go through 68 Ohm, 2 watt resistors

    2010cycconf_TPONTER_beam_ionsource.pdf — p. 44-52

    Tabletop: A ready-made HV-distribution recipe for the reference machine's deflector or PIG source bias; note even this shielding didn't stop arcs until the cable-energy fix - resistors limit damage, they don't prevent flashover.

  287. A complete tabletop cyclotron RF chain can be assembled from commercial units - function generator (HP 33120A) -> RF power amp (ENI 155LCRH) -> ham autotuner (LDG AT-200PC) -> Bird 43A wattmeter -> dee - with the tuned circuit at fr = 1/(2*pi*sqrt(L2*C)) ignoring mutual inductance.

    fr = 1/(2*pi*sqrt(L2*C))

    rf dg-287

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    HP 33120A Function Generator - ENI 155LCRH Power Amp - LDG AT-200PC Tuner - Bird 43A RF Power Meter - Dee

    2010cycconf_YULY_houghton.pdf — p. 12-14

    Tabletop: This is essentially the reference machine's current architecture, validated: a ham antenna tuner really can match a dee, at the cost of low Q and ~1-2 kV ceilings.

  288. Through an autotuner chain, tens of watts yields kV-class dee voltage: Houghton ran 1700 Vpp from 26 W and 800 Vpp from 10 W at ~3.5 MHz - roughly consistent with sqrt(P) scaling.

    26 W -> 1700 Vpp; 10 W -> 800 Vpp (ratio 2.1 vs sqrt(2.6)=1.6)

    rfdee dg-288

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    3.55 MHz 1700 Vpp (26 W) ... 3.48 MHz 800 V (10 W)

    2010cycconf_YULY_houghton.pdf — p. 17-19

    Tabletop: Benchmarks the reference machine's setup (1.3 kV from 5-50 W is right on this curve) and warns that the autotuner path plateaus in the low-kV range.

  289. Low dee voltage caps the usable field/energy through orbit count: at 800 Vpp, no beam peaks appeared for fields above ~0.5 T because reaching full radius required ~44 orbits - too many turns for the beam to survive gas scattering and defocusing.

    N_orbits = T_final/(e*Vpp); 35 keV / 800 eV ~ 44 orbits was the practical survival limit

    beam-dynamicsrfdee dg-289

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    No peaks for magnetic fields larger than H2+ at 0.5 T -> 35 keV; 44 orbits at 800 Vpp

    2010cycconf_YULY_houghton.pdf — p. 21

    Tabletop: Quantifies why the reference machine's dee-voltage upgrade matters: at 1.3 kV their protons need ~hundreds of turns to reach interesting energies, and ~44 turns was already the survival ceiling at Houghton's pressures.

  290. Use a resonant tank because Q = wL/Rac multiplies stored voltage for modest power, and the highest dee voltage for a given forward power occurs at critical coupling, where Qloaded = Q0/2.

    Q = omega*L/R_AC = U/P; Q_loaded = Q0/2 at optimum

    rf dg-290

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    To develop high voltages with modest RF power. The highest voltage for given power occurs when: Qloaded = 1/2 Qo

    cyclotron_apr_23_2010_houghton_3.pdf — p. 18

    Tabletop: The one-slide justification for the builder to move from an antenna-tuner match to a true high-Q tank circuit in Mark II.

  291. Rutgers' record operating point: 2 kW forward power produced 8.4 kV peak dee voltage on the 12-inch machine (measured via calibrated pickup and Bird thruline wattmeter).

    2 kW -> 8.4 kV peak (~16.8 kVp-p)

    rfdee dg-291

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Record Input Power 2kW: 8.4 kVpeak

    cyclotron_apr_23_2010_houghton_3.pdf — p. 19

    Tabletop: Anchors the power budget: even a well-built 12-inch tank needs kW-class RF for ~10 kV dee voltage, so the reference machine's 500 W LDMOS should target ~4-8 kV peak.

  292. Validate the dee-voltage calibration with beam: calculation said first ions squeak past the source structure at 165 W, and in practice beam current dropped abruptly to zero at 170 W as RF power was ramped down from 300 W.

    predicted threshold 165 W vs measured beam cutoff 170 W at 14.864 MHz

    rfbeam-measurement dg-292

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Calculation showing first ions squeak by at 165 Watts ... Beam current abruptly dropped to zero at 170 watts !

    cyclotron_apr_23_2010_houghton_3.pdf — p. 20

    Tabletop: A free end-to-end check for the builder: the RF power at which beam vanishes measures the true dee voltage through pure geometry, independent of every probe.

  293. Thermal drift of the dee, chamber and tank coil during operation shifts the resonant frequency enough to require persistent retuning; automate it by phase-comparing the drive RF with the dee pickup and driving a motorized trim capacitor in parallel with the dee from the DC error signal.

    phase(drive) - phase(pickup) -> DC error -> motor-driven parallel trim capacitor

    rf dg-293

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the DEE, chamber, tank coil, etc. heat up and slightly change the resonant frequency ... A DC 'error signal' is derived from comparing the phase of the driving RF to the Phase of the DEE pickup.

    cyclotron_apr_23_2010_houghton_3.pdf — p. 21

    Tabletop: At 100-500 W the Mark II will drift off resonance within minutes of turn-on; this phase-lock autotuner (or the equivalent PLL driving their signal source) is the fix.

  294. Infer dee voltage from beam physics: the radius of the first half revolution satisfies E(r) = qB^2 r^2/2m = (1/2) e Vp-p, giving a probe-independent 'beam inferred dee voltage' that Rutgers plotted alongside pickup and rectifier data.

    E(r) = q*B^2*r^2/(2m) = 0.5*e*Vp-p in first half revolution

    beam-measurementrf dg-294

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Beam Inferred DEE Voltage

    cyclotron_apr_23_2010_houghton_3.pdf — p. 33

    Tabletop: The builder can cross-check their 1.3 kV estimate by measuring where the first half-turn lands - the beam itself is the most honest voltmeter.

  295. Prebreakdown current in HV vacuum gaps is field emission from microscopic whiskers (runaway as local field approaches ~1e10 V/m, enhancement beta = lambda^2/ln(lambda)); slow 'conditioning' -- holding voltage while microampere pulses burn off the sharpest points -- permanently raises the threshold, so condition new electrodes gradually and expect to redo it after every air exposure.

    Fowler-Nordheim j ~ E_l^2 exp(-6.43e9*phi^1.5/E_l); E_local ~ 1e10 V/m for runaway; beta = lambda^2/ln(lambda) for whisker aspect lambda; conditioning partially lost after 24 h off or air exposure

    rfion-sourcesafety dg-295

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    A large increase in current occurs only as the local field approaches 10^10 V per meter... After several minutes of current flow at the constant voltage, a remeasurement of the threshold voltage shows that it has increased. This phenomenon is called conditioning.

    Miley & Murali, Inertial Electrostatic Confinement (IEC) Fusion — p. 111-113

    Tabletop: Bring the reference machine's dee and extraction voltages up over tens of minutes on first pump-down, watching for micro-discharge pulses; a gap that arcs at 15 kV cold will often hold 20+ kV after patient conditioning.

  296. At an insulator-cathode junction, terminate the insulator at ~31.5 degrees to the cathode so the surface charges negatively or not at all; screening the cathode end (or adding a semiconducting layer) raises flashover voltage ~2.5x, and roughening the insulator surface near the cathode adds another ~40%.

    junction angle ~ 31.5 deg (zero surface charge, voltage-independent); cathode-end screening/semiconducting layer: x2.5; roughen near cathode: +40%; ensure intimate metal-insulator contact (conductive coating on insulator end)

    rfmaterialsfabrication dg-296

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    They found that at a critical angle of 31.5 deg, the surface charge was zero... by screening the section of the insulation surface near the cathode... the breakdown voltage was raised by a factor of approximately 2.5.

    Miley & Murali, Inertial Electrostatic Confinement (IEC) Fusion — p. 113-114

    Tabletop: Free flashover margin for the Mark II source stalk and dee-stem insulators: cone the insulator ends at ~30 degrees toward the negative electrode and recess the triple junction behind a metal skirt.

  297. Vacuum surface flashover is set by the insulator material, not the electrodes: over a 2.2-cm butt-jointed cylinder, stainless+Pyrex held 100 kV while copper+Pyrex held only 44.5 kV and most ceramics 40-50 kV -- roughly 2-4.5 kV/mm of creepage length, and breakdown stress falls further for longer insulators.

    2.2-cm insulator in vacuum: SS/Pyrex 100 kV; Cu/polystyrene 75 kV; Cu/Teflon 50 kV; Cu/steatite 50 kV; ~2-4.5 kV/mm creepage, sublinear with length

    rfmaterials dg-297

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Gleichauf also found that the breakdown voltage was strongly dependent on the material of the insulator but independent of the material of the electrodes.

    Miley & Murali, Inertial Electrostatic Confinement (IEC) Fusion — p. 113-114

    Tabletop: Budget ~2 kV per mm of insulator surface path in vacuum (before sputter contamination); a 20-kV extraction stalk wants >=10 mm of clean creepage plus corrugations.

  298. Never leave a thin gas/void gap in series with a solid dielectric: the field in the void is multiplied by the solid's dielectric constant k (stress ~ V*k/d for a thin gap), so it sparks first -- fill every gap between conductor and insulator with a compatible potting or liquid dielectric.

    E_gap = V*k/(d + x*(k-1)) -> V*k/d for thin gap x << d; grading works: graded bushing held 1 MV over 30 cm vs 0.6 MV over 90 cm conventional

    rfmaterialsfabrication dg-298

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Air spaces exist in solid and liquid dielectrics... the air will have the higher stress, possibly causing sparkover through the air space... The stress in the air gap can thus be k times that in the solid.

    Miley & Murali, Inertial Electrostatic Confinement (IEC) Fusion — p. 116, 119

    Tabletop: The classic failure of home-built HV feedthroughs: a loose PTFE sleeve over a rod arcs in the annular air film; pot it, oil-fill it, or evacuate the annulus so Paschen cannot be satisfied.

  299. Coaxial HV feedthrough geometry: peak field sits on the inner conductor at E_max = V/(r_i*ln(r_o/r_i)), minimized when r_i/r_o = 1/e ~ 0.37; also round the edge of any outer/shield conductor to a radius no smaller than the inner conductor's radius.

    E_max = V/(r_i*ln(r_o/r_i)); optimum r_i/r_o = 1/e; edge radius of outer electrode >= r_i; concentric spheres optimum R_o/R_i = 2

    rfion-sourcefabrication dg-299

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The optimum ratio as r_i/r_o = 1/e. This optimum ratio minimizes the stresses within the coaxial electrode arrangement, independent of the material of the dielectric used.

    Miley & Murali, Inertial Electrostatic Confinement (IEC) Fusion — p. 117, 122-124

    Tabletop: Sizes the reference machine's HV stalk directly: for a grounded 25-mm-bore chamber port, a ~9-mm center conductor minimizes field stress; and never leave a sharp-edged washer or nut on the HV end.

  300. Sputtered cathode metal plates every line-of-sight insulator and eventually shorts it: shadow-shield the HV stalk from direct ion flow (coaxial shield tubes, conical shadowing insulator facing the cathode) and corrugate insulator surfaces to lengthen the surface-leakage path.

    design rules: shadow shields between plasma and insulator; corrugated/conical insulator profile; expect W/Fe/Al sputter films; clean with diamond file or sandblast (sandblasting can ruin polished grids)

    ion-sourcerffabrication dg-300

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    This phenomenon causes the cathode grid material from the IEC device to be deposited on the high-voltage (HV) stalk. That can in time cause premature breakdown at the stalk.

    Miley & Murali, Inertial Electrostatic Confinement (IEC) Fusion — p. 87, 105, 109

    Tabletop: In the reference machine's small chamber everything sees the source; a simple washer-stack or skirt shielding the feedthrough ceramic from the chimney slit will multiply time-between-cleanings.

  301. Trade focusing against phase slip explicitly: you may drop Bz at large radius for extra focusing only if the ions have few turns left there, so raise the Dee voltage to cut the number of revolutions - fewer turns also means shorter path length and fewer gas collisions.

    beam-dynamicsrfdee dg-301

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The axial component of the magnetic field can be decreased at larger radii in order to increase the radial (focusing) component, provided the ions only have a few revolutions left once they reach this portion of the field.

    Houghton College physics thesis (Morrow, 2015) — p. 27-28

    Tabletop: Explains why the reference machine's next big win may be Dee voltage, not magnet shaping: at ~160 keV with a low Dee voltage the turn count is what kills the beam.

  302. When scanning the magnet at fixed RF frequency, expect resonance current peaks not just at the fundamental field B but at B/3, B/5, etc. (odd subharmonics), for every ion species present.

    peaks at B, B/3, B/5, ... for each q/m species

    beam-measurementrf dg-302

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the location of current spikes at a given field strength always occur at or very near the theoretical resonances... at B/3, B/5, and so on.

    Houghton College physics thesis (Fuller) — p. 46-47

    Tabletop: Essential for interpreting the reference machine's magnet scans: a peak at one-third field is a subharmonic, not a mystery species, and H2+ vs H+ vs They peaks can be disentangled this way.

  303. Raise dee voltage to raise beam current: fewer turns to a given radius means less path length and fewer gas collisions, and measured current increased with dee voltage at fixed field and pressure.

    N_turns ~ E_final/(2*q*V_dee); higher V_dee -> shorter path -> higher transmitted current

    rfdeebeam-dynamics dg-303

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    It can be seen that in general, an increase in dee voltage results in a higher beam current.

    Houghton College physics thesis (Fuller) — p. 49-50

    Tabletop: For a fill-gas machine like the reference machine's, dee volts are the strongest single knob on beam current; prioritize RF voltage over almost everything else.

  304. Find resonance by a three-stage frequency sweep - 0.5 MHz steps over the whole band, then 0.1 MHz, then 0.01 MHz around the peak - while plotting dee-voltage gain (Vdee/Vrf); the Houghton peak showed a gain of ~80x at f0 = 3.55 MHz.

    sweep steps 0.5 -> 0.1 -> 0.01 MHz; observed voltage gain ~80x at resonance

    rf dg-304

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the RF generator was adjusted in steps of 0.5 MHz ... adjusted in steps of 0.1 MHz near the maximum voltage ... a third sweep was performed using steps of 0.01 MHz

    Houghton College physics thesis (Haas) — p. 63-64

    Tabletop: A simple, scope-only resonance-finding recipe the builder can use after any mechanical change to the Mark II dee or stem.

  305. An autotuner-matched dee circuit runs at low Q (Houghton measured Q = 16.1 from f0/dF = 3.55/0.22 MHz; their earlier chamber was Q = 22) - orders of magnitude below a directly coupled copper tank (Q0 ~ 900), trading voltage gain for tuning convenience.

    Q = omega0/delta-omega_FWHM = 3.55/0.22 = 16.1

    rf dg-305

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the quality factor of the Houghton College cyclotron was determined to be Q=16.1. The previous chamber and dee constructed in 2006 had a quality factor of 22.

    Houghton College physics thesis (Haas) — p. 64

    Tabletop: Quantifies the reference machine's architecture choice: an antenna-tuner match (like their current setup) gives kV-class dee voltage; multi-kV needs a high-Q tank coil instead.

  306. Expect manual and analyzer-based resonance measurements to disagree slightly (3.55 vs 3.63 MHz at Houghton) because a HV probe near the dee adds capacitance and shifts the resonant frequency.

    probe proximity shifted f0 by ~0.08 MHz (~2%)

    rf dg-306

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    when the CT2591 HV probe was placed near the dee, the overall capacitance changed slightly. This would, of course, change the value of the resonant frequency.

    Houghton College physics thesis (Haas) — p. 65

    Tabletop: When the builder cross-checks NanoVNA SWR sweeps against probe measurements, a few-percent frequency disagreement is expected instrumentation loading, not a fault.

  307. Calibrate the pickup probe by scanning frequency with the chamber open and a direct HV probe on the dee: Houghton found real dee voltage ~11,300x the pickup voltage at 3.55 MHz, and the factor must be re-measured every time operating frequency changes.

    V_dee = 11300 x V_pickup at 3.55 MHz (linear fit)

    rfbeam-measurement dg-307

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the real voltage was roughly 11,300 times the pickup voltage ... the probe had to be recalibrated every time the frequency was adjusted.

    Houghton College physics thesis (Haas) — p. 65-66

    Tabletop: The pickup scale factor is frequency-dependent - the builder must recalibrate their pickup whenever they retune, not assume one constant.

  308. A tabletop machine can make measurable beam at very low RF power once matched: at SWR 1:1 and only 15.4 W forward, Houghton accelerated protons to 9.2 keV (r = 5.95 cm) with ~1.5 pA on the Faraday cup.

    15.43 W forward, SWR 1:1, 3.55 MHz -> 9.2 keV protons at 5.95 cm

    rfbeam-measurement dg-308

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    a SWR of 1:1 and forward power of 15.43 W were measured

    Houghton College physics thesis (Haas) — p. 69

    Tabletop: Reassurance for commissioning Mark II: hunt for first beam at tens of watts with a clean match before scaling power - beam detection, not power, is the bottleneck.

  309. Higher dee voltage raises the fixed-frequency energy ceiling by reducing the number of turns (and thus accumulated relativistic phase slip); the particle survives while phase slip < pi/2, giving a maximum around 15 MeV for protons at 50 kV peak-to-peak.

    accept while phase shift < pi/2; ~15 MeV max for protons at 50 kVpp

    rfbeam-dynamics dg-309

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    higher potential on the dees results in fewer orbits and a shorter time of acceleration, allowing for a higher maximum kinetic energy... gives a maximum of 15 MeV for protons with 50 kV peak-to-peak

    Houghton College physics thesis (Loucks) — p. 24-26

    Tabletop: At the reference machine's sub-MeV energies relativistic slip is negligible (~0.1%), so dee voltage matters mainly through path length and gas scattering - but this rule sets the fixed-frequency ceiling for any future MeV-class ambition.

  310. Use an AEI hairpin electron-microscope filament floating at about -90 V and heated with 2 A as the ion source, and short RF pickup on each filament lead to ground through a 0.001 uF capacitor.

    filament bias -90 V, heater 2 A, 0.001 uF RF bypass on each lead

    ion-sourcerffabrication dg-310

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    A standard AEI hairpin electron microscope filament floating at approximately -90 V is heated by 2 A of current ... RF pickup on each filament lead is shorted through a 0.001 uF capacitor to ground.

    we1pb01.pdf — p. 3

    Tabletop: An off-the-shelf, cheap, replaceable filament choice plus the RF-bypass detail that keeps the filament supply alive next to a live Dee.

  311. Expect only 10-40 W of RF drive to reach up to ~3000 V peak on the Dee against a grounded dummy Dee in a decent tank circuit.

    10-40 W forward RF -> up to ~3 kV Dee amplitude; typical running 2100 Vpp

    rfdee dg-311

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the Dee may be oscillated with voltage amplitudes of up to approximately 3000V relative to the grounded Dummy Dee ... For normal operation, 10-40 W of RF power are required

    we1pb01.pdf — p. 3-4

    Tabletop: Tells the builder that Dee voltage is a tank-Q problem, not a brute-force power problem: a modest amplifier plus a good resonator beats a big amplifier into a lossy one.

  312. Operate at as low an RF frequency as other constraints allow, because engineering art and components are far more available at low frequency (ORNL chose <15 Mc/s).

    prefer f < ~15 MHz where B and size permit

    rf dg-312

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    It was believed desirable to operate at as low a frequency as possible because of the larger amount of engineering information available for oscillators in the region below 15 megacycles/sec.

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4357145) — p. 15

    Tabletop: The reference machine's 9 MHz sits in this sweet spot; for Mark II, avoid pushing frequency (i.e., field) past where cheap RF parts and simple technique still work.

  313. Budget dee excitation power from P ~ 2*pi*f*C*V^2/(2Q): the 86-inch needed 96 kW of RF for 400 kV dee-to-dee with C=176 pF, f=13.5 MHz, loaded Q=3700 (unloaded 12,300).

    P_dee = pi*f*C*V_dee-gnd^2/Q; C_dee=176 pF, Q_loaded=3700, Q_unloaded=12300

    rf dg-313

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    This curve indicates that 96 kW of rf power is required for exciting the dees to 400 kv. ... The oscillator input was 162 kw.

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4357145) — p. 16, 25

    Tabletop: Formula transfers directly: at 9 MHz, ~50 pF and Q~1000, 5 kV on the dee costs only tens of watts, telling the builder exactly how much amplifier a higher-voltage Mark II dee needs.

  314. There is a calculable minimum (threshold) dee voltage to reach a given energy in a given field profile; design the RF system to exceed it with margin rather than discovering it empirically.

    V_dee,min = f(E_final, B(r) profile); see ORNL-1196 Fig. 4 / Y-757

    beam-dynamicsrf dg-314

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    It is possible to calculate the various effects quantitatively and to predict the minimum dee voltage required to obtain a given energy in a particular cyclotron.

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4357145) — p. 17-19

    Tabletop: Directly applicable design step for Mark II: compute threshold voltage for the target energy and field taper before freezing the RF chain power budget.

  315. When beam current is pushed up, sparking is what ends the climb; treat sustained spark-free operation, not peak meter readings, as the machine's real rating.

    rfdee dg-315

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    momentary beam meter readings exceeded two milliamperes but operation at this level was very unsteady due to sparking; further increases were not attempted

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4357145) — p. 24

    Tabletop: Directly applicable test discipline for Mark II dee-voltage conditioning: rate the machine at the level it holds quietly for minutes, not the level it touches.

  316. Expect overall (wall-plug RF to beam) gross efficiency in the few-percent range and rising with dee voltage and beam power; the 86-inch measured 2.6-9.3% gross and 30-44% counting all accelerated ions.

    gross eff = beam kW / oscillator DC kW ~ 3-9%; improves with V_dee

    rfbeam-dynamics dg-316

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    As measured, efficiency tends to increase with dee-to-dee potential and with beam power.

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4357145) — p. 24-26

    Tabletop: Order-of-magnitude expectation transfers: most RF power goes to resonator and ion-loading losses, so judge Mark II RF sizing on resonator dissipation, not beam power.

  317. Make every high-current RF joint a clamped, silver-plated, water-cooled surface: silver-plate the dee stems over the tuning range and clamp the shorting plane with split silver-plated rings.

    rfmaterialsfabrication dg-317

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    two 12 in. split silver-plated, water-cooled copper rings which can be clamped securely around the stems; the dee stems are also silver plated over the adjustment range

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4357145) — p. 53

    Tabletop: Scaled down: any sliding or bolted joint in the reference machine's dee-stem/coil path should be a broad, clean, plated, firmly clamped contact - RF joints, not wires, set small-resonator Q.

  318. Bring cooling water into RF-hot structures through insulating hose or RF-choke coils of the tubing itself; ceramic water-lead insulators failed at 200 kV and were replaced by copper-tubing chokes.

    water leads: ~7 ft of 2 in rubber hose (DC bias) / copper-tube RF choke coils

    rfmaterials dg-318

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The ceramic 'Lapp' coils originally used for introducing cooling water to the tube and the plate line failed whenever the oscillator voltage was increased to give 200 kv. They have since been replaced with choke coils wound from copper tubing.

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4357145) — p. 59

    Tabletop: The principle (a conductive-liquid line into an RF-hot electrode must itself be an insulator or a choke) applies whenever Mark II adds cooling or bias plumbing to the dee.

  319. Build the plate/oscillator DC supply from many identical paralleled units with individual fused disconnects so one failed unit can be dropped without stopping the machine.

    rf dg-319

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    a fused disconnect switch in the output of each supply permits the operator to remove a faulty unit from service without disturbing the remainder

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4357145) — p. 61

    Tabletop: Transferable architecture: paralleled small supply modules (or PA pallets) with individual protection give a home machine graceful degradation.

  320. Bias the dees a few hundred volts to several kV negative to suppress ion loading and multipactor so the self-excited oscillator starts cleanly and can be brought up at full power.

    dee DC bias 0.3-5 kV negative, interlocked to RF

    rfdee dg-320

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Oscillator starting difficulties due to 'ion loading' are avoided by the use of insulated negatively-biased dees.

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4357145) — p. 7, 47

    Tabletop: Directly applicable if Mark II RF start-up stutters or the dee glows at low voltage: insulate the dee for DC and add a few-hundred-volt negative bias through an RF choke.

  321. Allow roughly 1.5 inches of vacuum clearance from dee to grounded liner per 100 kV peak RF (about 26 kV/cm), and treat that gap as precious space stolen from the magnet.

    d_clearance ~ 1.5 in per 100 kV peak (~26 kV/cm RF in cyclotron vacuum)

    rfdeechamber dg-321

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The selected value of 100 kv peak voltage requires about 1.5-in. clearance from dee-to-liner ... Since the magnetic gap is so precious ... this minimum value is taken for design.

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4275955) — p. 100

    Tabletop: Scales directly: the reference machine's 1.3 kV needs well under a millimeter electrically, so their clearances are set by beam aperture and tolerance, but a 20-50 kV Mark II dee should keep several millimeters to grounded surfaces.

  322. Energy gain per dee crossing is 2*V_dee*sin(theta/2) for dee angular width theta, so half-dees and cut-away lips directly tax energy gain (a 15-degree wedge off a dee lip cost 30% for third-harmonic particles).

    dE_per_crossing = q * 2*V_0*sin(N*theta/2) (N = harmonic order)

    rfdeebeam-dynamics dg-322

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the maximum voltage gain/dee is Vd = 2*V0 sin(theta/2); for particles rotating on subharmonics of the dee frequency the angular width of the dee is n*theta to the particle

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4275955) — p. 100

    Tabletop: Directly applicable when the builder trims the Mark II dee for probe or source clearance: keep the dee close to 180 degrees or account for the sin(theta/2) energy-gain penalty.

  323. High dee voltage at practical drive power is only achievable with a high-Q resonant circuit; treat the dees and stems as a quarter-wave line foreshortened by dee capacitance, tunable via C, stem length, or stem impedance.

    dee system = lambda/4 line foreshortened by C_dee; tune via C, l, Z0

    rfdee dg-323

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The high dee voltage required in cyclotrons can be achieved for practical driving power only by using a high-Q resonant circuit.

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4275955) — p. 17

    Tabletop: Directly applicable framing for the reference machine's matching network: every dB of resonator Q lost to bad joints or lossy insulators is paid in amplifier watts.

  324. If multipactor blocks RF turn-on, either bias the dees or accept a more complex drive scheme; anticipate the problem at design time rather than after assembly.

    rfdee dg-324

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    it is possible to bias the dees to prevent multipactoring, and a more complex booster oscillator circuit is required

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4275955) — p. 99

    Tabletop: Directly applicable: multipactor lives exactly in the few-hundred-volt, MHz regime of a starting tabletop dee; plan the DC-bias insulation into the Mark II dee stem from day one.

  325. Mount RF power boards to a machined copper heat spreader with screws only - no solder - and use heat-sink compound only between the copper spreader and the aluminium heat sink.

    rffabricationmaterials dg-325

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    No solder to hold the board to the spreader, the screws are enough. Heat sink compound between copper spreader and aluminum heat sink.

    Development_Notebook.pdf — p. 10

    Tabletop: Standard practice for any kW-class dee driver a home builder assembles from LDMOS boards.

  326. Stabilize a high-gain LDMOS stage at the low-frequency end with degenerative drain-to-gate feedback of about 15 nH - literally 1.5 cm of #20 wire per side, not a wound coil - in series with the feedback resistor.

    L = 15 nH = 1.5 cm of #20 AWG wire, drain-to-gate, in series with feedback resistor

    rf dg-326

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the part description says '15 nH, connecting wires to R14 and R15, 1.5 cm each #20 AWG,' implying that they are just wires, not even coiled.

    Development_Notebook.pdf — p. 15

    Tabletop: Useful if the builder builds a broadband solid-state dee driver: the devices have huge low-frequency gain and will oscillate without this.

  327. Measure the actual harmonic spectrum with a spectrum analyzer through ~40 dB of attenuation before choosing any output filter: in a push-pull LDMOS deck the second harmonic is naturally suppressed but the third came out only 8-10 dB down, which is what the filter must attack.

    spec: spurious 43 dB below carrier below 30 MHz, 60 dB for VHF; measured 3rd harmonic only 8-10 dB down

    rfbeam-measurement dg-327

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The real issue was the third harmonic, though; in general, it was only down 10 dB down and on some bands only 8 dB down.

    Development_Notebook.pdf — p. 19

    Tabletop: A cyclotron dee tank is narrowband, but the same rule holds: measure what the PA actually emits before designing filtering or worrying about RF interference from a garage machine.

  328. For solid-state PAs, prefer diplexers that dump harmonic energy into a resistor over reflective low-pass filters, because reflecting harmonic power back into the FET drains risks driving the device into oscillation.

    5-7 pole diplexers with crossovers at 2.7 / 6 / 11 / 25 / 42 MHz; 6-pole LPF at 65 MHz where 3rd harmonic was low

    rf dg-328

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    reflecting all that energy back into the output of the FETs risked driving the oscillations I had worried about in the detailed design of the power deck... I chose the diplexer

    Development_Notebook.pdf — p. 19-20

    Tabletop: Relevant if the builder drives the dee with a broadband solid-state PA instead of a tube: protect the FETs from the highly reactive dee load.

  329. Expect to move every filter cutoff upward after the first build: cutoffs and crossovers designed too close to the operating frequency produced excessive passband insertion loss and high VSWR, and 'virtually every part value changed' during tuning.

    design settings used: Chebyshev, T-type, 0.005 dB passband ripple, >43 dB stopband <30 MHz, 60 dB above

    rffabrication dg-329

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    a fundamental flaw in my design settings had been that all the crossover and cutoff frequencies were too low, causing too much insertion loss and high VSWR in the passband.

    Development_Notebook.pdf — p. 20

    Tabletop: Schedule tuning time (this cost the author three months); the same applies to a homemade dee tank and matching network.

  330. Add a series current-limiting resistor (20 ohm, 50 W) in the 50 V feed to the controller pass transistor and use 1000 V mica capacitors rather than 500 V in high-power filter positions; both failures happened in service.

    20 ohm / 50 W series resistor; 1000 V micas replacing 500 V

    rfsafetyfabrication dg-330

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    I also added a limiting power resistor (20 ohms at 50w) in series with 50v to the TIP102 as a precaution...with this resistor in place, a short on the 12v line will limit the current and prevent a catastrophic failure.

    Development_Notebook.pdf — p. 31-32

    Tabletop: Cheap fault-tolerance rules for any homebuilt high-voltage/high-current RF deck; voltage-derating the caps matters more with the reactive load a dee presents.

  331. Budget roughly 10% loss between the amplifier deck and the load: a deck measuring 1.4 kW output delivered about 1.3 kW at saturation after T/R relays, harmonic filters and directional couplers.

    1.4 kW at deck -> ~1.3 kW after T/R switches + filters + couplers

    rf dg-331

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the maximum output power I've measured ... is about 1.4 kW. After going through T/R switches, filters and couplers, you can expect about 1.3 kW at saturation

    Development_Notebook.pdf — p. 4

    Tabletop: Size the RF chain for the dee power you actually need plus ~10-15%; the same relay/coupler/filter tax applies to a cyclotron dee drive.

  332. Do not assume silver plating lowers RF loss: commercial bright silver deposits run near half the conductivity of pure copper, and a plating of about half the base conductivity produces the maximum possible increase in RF resistance.

    electroplated Ag conductivity 0.13-95% IACS vs 105% for pure silver; worst case: sigma_plate ~ 0.5*sigma_base

    rfmaterials dg-332

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    a plating having about half the conductivity of the copper base will cause the greatest increase in overall resistance ... the conductivity of much of the commercial silver plating is about half of that of pure copper

    Plating.pdf — p. 1

    Tabletop: Skip decorative silver plating on the dee and coil; a jobbing-shop bright-silver finish would raise, not lower, resonator loss at 9 MHz.

  333. For a low-loss RF finish, plate with high-conductivity copper at least two skin depths thick at the operating frequency, then protect it with only a very thin low-conductivity layer or a low-loss lacquer.

    t_Cu >= 2*delta; delta_Cu [um] ~ 66/sqrt(f_MHz) (22 um at 9 MHz, so plate >= ~45 um / 1.8 mil)

    rfmaterialsdee dg-333

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    a layer of high conductivity copper plating at least two skin depths in thickness, at the operating frequency, then protecting this against corrosion by a very thin layer of low conductivity plating or a layer of low-loss lacquer

    Plating.pdf — p. 10

    Tabletop: For dees, stems, and tank coils at 9 MHz: bare electrical-grade copper plus thin lacquer beats commercial silver or nickel plate.

  334. A lower-conductivity plating hurts most at about 1.5 skin depths thickness (resistance maximum), while very thin layers of either very high or very low conductivity over copper have negligible effect on RF resistance.

    R_max at t ~ 1.5*delta_plating for sigma_plate < sigma_base; R_min at t ~ 1.5*delta for sigma_plate > sigma_base

    rfmaterials dg-334

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The resistance of the composite conductor reaches a maximum value when the thickness of the plating is approximately one and one half times the skin depth for the plated metal.

    Plating.pdf — p. 3

    Tabletop: A sub-micron corrosion-protection flash on copper is harmless at 9 MHz; a mid-thickness medium-conductivity coating is the worst case to avoid.

  335. A thin gold flash (10 microinches) over silver is porous; at least 200 microinches of gold are needed to stop sulfide films creeping from exposed silver over the gold.

    t_Au >= 200 uin (~5 um) for pore-free protection of silver

    rfmaterials dg-335

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    A gold flash (10 micro-inches) is often used although many workers have shown that the deposits are not pore-free and that at least 200 micro-inches of gold are necessary to provide adequate protection.

    Plating.pdf — p. 7

    Tabletop: For RF contact fingers and connectors on the resonator, distrust thin gold flash; specify thick gold or use bare copper with lacquer instead.

  336. Tarnished silver is a real contact-resistance hazard: silver-plated wire contacts rose from 6 milliohms to 200 milliohms after two hours in a hydrogen-sulfide atmosphere.

    R_contact: 6 mOhm -> 200 mOhm after 2 h H2S exposure

    rfmaterials dg-336

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the contact resistance of two silver-plated wires rose from 6 milliohms to 200 milliohms after two hours' exposure to hydrogen sulphide.

    Plating.pdf — p. 7

    Tabletop: Any silver-plated RF joints in the shop atmosphere (or near vacuum-pump exhaust) need protection or periodic cleaning, or kV-level circulating currents will heat them.

  337. Smooth the RF surface: machining leaves a low-conductivity Beilby layer and 'hill and dale' current paths, so chemically or electrolytically polish conductors to lower RF loss.

    rffabricationdee dg-337

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    This last problem has been investigated fully by Benson who recommends chemical or electrolytic polishing to produce a smooth surface and lower losses.

    Plating.pdf — p. 8

    Tabletop: Polishing dee edges and stems serves double duty at 5-13 kV: lower RF resistance and higher voltage-breakdown threshold.

  338. Give the amplifier controller hardware safety monitoring of temperature, load failure, and reflected power (SWR), with ALC feedback that limits drive and prevents hot-switching of relays.

    rfsafety dg-338

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    safety monitoring of temperature, load failure, and diplexer HPF outputs, and ALC feedback for driver

    QST, LDMOS RF amplifier article — p. 1

    Tabletop: A directional coupler plus fast drive-cut on high reflected power is the single best defense when the cyclotron dee arcs or drifts off resonance mid-run.

  339. Use regulated, temperature-compensated gate bias and feed VDD to each drain separately so high DC currents stay out of the RF output transformers.

    rf dg-339

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    regulated and temperature compensated bias, separate VDD feeds to the output transistor drains to keep high dc currents out of the RF transformers

    QST, LDMOS RF amplifier article — p. 2

    Tabletop: Directly applicable to a homebrew 9 MHz LDMOS deck: thermal-tracking bias prevents runaway, and DC-free transformers avoid core saturation at high drain current.

  340. Add degenerative (negative) feedback to a broadband MOSFET power amplifier for stability; the QST author retrofitted it only after a 'smoke in the cockpit' failure in service.

    rf dg-340

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the design underwent several changes along the way, including the addition of degenerative feedback after a 'smoke in the cockpit' incident after about 350 contacts had been made.

    QST, LDMOS RF amplifier article — p. 2-3

    Tabletop: A dee resonator is a narrowband, sometimes-detuned load; build feedback in from day one rather than after the first blown transistor.

  341. Never bolt an LDMOS device straight to an aluminum heat sink: flow-solder it to a thick copper heat spreader first, then mount the spreader to the heat sink with thermal paste.

    rffabrication dg-341

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Rather than mounting the output transistors directly to a heat sink, they are first flow soldered to a thick copper heat spreader, which is then mounted to the heat sink.

    QST, LDMOS RF amplifier article — p. 3

    Tabletop: At 100-500 W a copper spreader under the LDMOS pallet is cheap insurance against the die-temperature excursions that killed the reference machine's earlier MOSFET amps.

  342. Expect the third harmonic of a push-pull Class AB amplifier to be only 8-10 dB down (the second harmonic is suppressed by symmetry), so output low-pass filtering is mandatory, not optional.

    3rd harmonic ~ -8 to -10 dBc before filtering; ARRL-measured suppression after filtering: 48-66 dB

    rf dg-342

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    But the real issue was the third harmonic, which was only 10 dB down generally and on some bands only 8 dB down!

    QST, LDMOS RF amplifier article — p. 3

    Tabletop: At 9 MHz the 27 MHz third harmonic can excite spurious dee-resonator modes and detune the match; filter it between amp and matching network.

  343. Prefer a diplexer (absorptive) harmonic filter over a plain reflective low-pass filter on a solid-state HF amplifier, because harmonic energy reflected back into the FET drains can drive oscillations.

    rf dg-343

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    favored the diplexer design for solid state amps in the HF range, because reflecting all that energy back into the output of the field effect transistors (FETs) risked driving the oscillations

    QST, LDMOS RF amplifier article — p. 3

    Tabletop: The dee is a high-Q load that reflects everything off-resonance; an absorptive diplexer gives the LDMOS a resistive termination at harmonics and protects against the mismatch failures the builder has already had.

  344. Treat the drain-trace tap point of the output transformer as a tuning element: its physical position along the trace sets the output match.

    rffabrication dg-344

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The position of the connection point at the drain trace is critical as it affects the match.

    QST, LDMOS RF amplifier article — p. 4

    Tabletop: When copying an LDMOS pallet layout, reproduce the output-transformer connection geometry exactly; millimeter changes shift the match at hundreds of watts.

  345. A dummy dee (grounded bar) of 3/8-inch thickness gives satisfactorily low distortion of the accelerating field lines relative to a full second dee (verified in Poisson Superfish at 10 kV).

    dummy dee thickness 3/8 in = 9.5 mm

    dee dg-345

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The distortion is satisfactorily low with a dummy DEE of 3/8-inch thickness.

    ion_source_studies_part_1.pdf — p. 2

    Tabletop: Supports the single-dee/dummy-dee topology at the reference machine's scale; a ~10 mm grounded bar is field-equivalent enough to a second dee and frees chamber space.

  346. The beam envelope is widest at one-third to one-half of final radius and narrows toward extraction as sqrt-n damping compresses axial oscillations (MIT: 0.8 in initial amplitude damped to ~0.1 in at the exit slit).

    amplitude damping z/z0 ~ n^(-1/4) growth regions combined; MIT overall damping factor ~0.12 center-to-exit

    beam-dynamicsdee dg-346

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the beam width was found to be limited by the internal aperture of the D's out to about one-third of the final radius and then to narrow in a nearly linear fashion out to the exit slit.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 163-167

    Tabletop: Give the first third of radius generous vertical aperture (that is where ions are lost); the outer region can be tight, which also helps RF economy.

  347. Use graphite for arc bodies, cones, and dee feelers near the source - it runs hot with minimal sputtering and evaporation; use feeler extensions on the dee faces opposite the source to raise the extraction field and improve first-turn focusing.

    ion-sourcematerialsdee dg-347

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Graphite is coming into wide use for cones, arc bodies, and also for D feelers or accelerating electrodes; it operates at high temperatures with a minimum of sputtering or evaporation.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 166-178

    Tabletop: Graphite source parts keep metal sputter off insulators and chamber walls; a feeler (puller) on the dee edge is the single cheapest first-turn-capture upgrade.

  348. There is no magnetic vertical focusing at the machine center (n=0 by symmetry); the first turns survive because the dee-gap electric field acts as an electrostatic immersion lens - so central-region electrode geometry and RF phase matter most in the first few turns.

    n(r) ~ r^2 near center -> no magnetic focusing at r=0; gap E-field provides focusing, modified by transit time

    beam-dynamicsdeeion-source dg-348

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    There is no vertical magnetic focusing at the center of the magnet. By a fortunate coincidence, electrostatic focusing by the accelerating fields is effective for low-energy ions.

    ParticleAccelerators8275.pdf — p. 524, 526

    Tabletop: Explains why source-to-dee geometry (chimney position, puller gap, aperture height) dominates beam capture on small machines: the magnet cannot help until several turns out.

  349. Particulate contamination on the cathode, not the electrode material, determines vacuum breakdown: at 95 MV/m (14.5 kV across 150 um), 40 of 52 particle-contaminated sites broke down versus only 1 of 16 clean sites.

    150 um gap, 14.5 kV -> ~95 MV/m; contaminated 40/52 fail vs clean 1/16

    vacuummaterialsdee dg-349

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    40 of 52 contaminated sites broke down, while only 1 of 16 uncontaminated sites broke down at or below the maximum field

    WernerThesis_hv_vacuum.pdf — p. 78

    Tabletop: The single biggest lever on the reference machine's dee-voltage ceiling: gloves, solvent cleaning, and dust-free assembly of dee and stem buy more holdoff than any material upgrade.

  350. Practical vacuum-gap breakdown fields span 5-200 MV/m, and smaller gaps withstand higher fields; clean millimeter-scale electrodes routinely hold >100 MV/m, so a well-prepared mm-scale gap at tens of kV is far from intrinsic limits.

    breakdown range 5-200 MV/m; clean electrodes >100 MV/m at 150 um gaps

    vacuumdee dg-350

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    breakdown occurs between 5 and 200 MV/m ... In general, smaller gaps can withstand higher fields.

    WernerThesis_hv_vacuum.pdf — p. 78, 95

    Tabletop: At 13 kV across the reference machine's ~6 mm gap the mean field is only ~2 MV/m - if it sparks there, the cause is edges, insulators, particles or gas pressure, never the vacuum gap itself.

  351. Spark conditioning works: in the early-processing regime each breakdown is overwhelmingly likely to raise the site's breakdown field (successive/previous ratio > 1 up to ~100 MV/m), so deliberate controlled arcing is a legitimate in-situ cleaning technique.

    E_breakdown(n+1)/E_breakdown(n) > 1 in early processing; gains shrink toward a saturation field

    vacuumdeesafety dg-351

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    In the 'early processing' regime, breakdown is overwhelmingly likely to increase the breakdown field of a cathode site.

    WernerThesis_hv_vacuum.pdf — p. 91-92

    Tabletop: After assembling Mark II, the builder should ramp dee voltage slowly and let a limited number of current-limited sparks condition the surfaces before declaring a voltage ceiling.

  352. Insulate the dee support stem by slipping a glass (pyrex) sleeve completely over it from the dee edge to at least 2 inches beyond the vacuum seal.

    insulating sleeve extends >= 2 in beyond the seal

    deeseals dg-352

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    slipping a 1/4 in. pyrex tube completely over the 3/16 in. copper dee support rod from the dee edge to at least 2 inches beyond the seal

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 7

    Tabletop: Directly applicable at 1.3 kV and above: give the stem a continuous insulating sleeve with generous creepage past the grounded feedthrough.

  353. Round every high-voltage edge and check it against Emax = 0.9V/(r*ln((r+a)/r)); aluminum breaks down near 290 kV/inch, and Rutgers chose a 0.1875-in minimum edge radius to keep the peak field at 170 kV/inch (~60% of the limit).

    Emax = 0.9V/(r*ln((r+a)/r)); Al limit 290 kV/in; r_min = 0.1875 in -> Emax = 170 kV/in

    safetymaterialsdee dg-353

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Aluminum=290 kV/inch ... We settled on a minimum radius of R=.1875 inches ... Emax=170 kV/inch

    2010cycconf_TPONTER_beam_ionsource.pdf — p. 8

    Tabletop: The edge-radius rule the builder needs when pushing dee voltage to 5-13 kV: radius all dee and stem edges so the enhanced edge field stays under ~half the material's breakdown value.

  354. Support the dee against the dummy dee with machinable-ceramic spacer strips (Houghton used four, ~2.5 x 0.77 x 0.18 cm) setting a 0.635 cm acceleration gap; the earlier glass insulators were destroyed by a discharge.

    gap = 0.635 cm; 4 ceramic strips 2.53 x 0.77 x 0.18 cm

    deematerials dg-354

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Four machinable ceramic strips, each roughly 2.53 cm long, 0.77 cm wide and 0.18 cm thick, hold the two dees together at the appropriate separation gap of 0.635 cm.

    Houghton College physics thesis (Haas) — p. 2, 52

    Tabletop: Machinable ceramic (Macor-class) spacers are the spark-tolerant choice for holding the reference machine's dee-to-dummy-dee gap, replacing glass or plastic.

  355. Design the chamber, dee, dummy dee and filament to disassemble with screws rather than glue or solder - the 2006 Houghton chamber's glued glass insulation could not be repaired after a dee-to-wall spark, forcing a complete rebuild.

    chamberdeefabrication dg-355

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    This design strategy made it impossible to fix a single component of the apparatus, such as the insulation, without replacing the entire piece.

    Houghton College physics thesis (Haas) — p. 47

    Tabletop: Mark II should assume sparks WILL damage insulators eventually; screw-together modularity turns a total rebuild into a one-part swap.

  356. Vent every blind screw hole in the dee (Houghton drilled a No. 55 side hole into each) so trapped air/water doesn't slowly outgas into the vacuum.

    No. 55 drill (~1.3 mm) side vent per screw hole

    vacuumdeefabrication dg-356

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The screw holes need to be vented so that they do not trap air or water and slowly outgas when the dee is placed in the vacuum chamber.

    Houghton College physics thesis (Haas) — p. 52

    Tabletop: Directly applicable to any screwed-together Mark II dee: unvented blind holes are virtual leaks that cap the achievable base pressure.

  357. Insulate the filament (1-3 V DC) from the dee, which sits at 1-2 kV RF in this machine class, with a ~0.18 cm machinable ceramic plate; barrel connectors epoxied to the ceramic carry the leads.

    dee RF 1-2 kV vs filament 1-3 V; 0.18 cm ceramic insulator

    ion-sourcedeematerials dg-357

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the RF voltage on the dee is typically between 1 and 2 kV, far greater than the 1-3 V DC placed across the filament. Thus, the filament and wires must be adequately insulated from the dee

    Houghton College physics thesis (Haas) — p. 54

    Tabletop: Matches the reference machine's ~1.3 kV operating point today; at their planned 5-13 kV the same geometry needs proportionally more ceramic creepage distance.

  358. Build the Dee/dummy-Dee pair from one 1.27 cm thick, 0.6 cm wide aluminium ring of 15.6 cm OD, cut into a 7.8 cm Dee and a 3.2 cm dummy Dee separated by 0.635 cm ceramic spacers, skinned with 0.13 cm sheet and supported on three KF-16 feedthroughs at 120 degrees.

    ring 15.6 cm OD, 1.27 cm thick; Dee 7.8 cm wide, dummy 3.2 cm; accelerating gap 0.635 cm; skins 0.13 cm; 3 supports at 120 deg

    deechamberfabrication dg-358

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Ceramic spacers hold the Dee and Dummy Dee apart with a gap of 0.635 cm. The entire Dee electrode assembly is supported by three KF-16 electrical feedthroughs through ports at 120 degrees from each other.

    we1pb01.pdf — p. 2

    Tabletop: Direct fabrication template; the single-Dee-plus-dummy topology halves the RF feedthrough problem versus two live Dees.

  359. Electric-field defocusing near the center loses roughly 90% of starting ions to the dee surfaces; reduce the loss by raising dee voltage so ions make fewer turns and accumulate less phase shift.

    higher V_dee -> fewer turns -> smaller phase slip and center loss

    beam-dynamicsdee dg-359

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    some 90% of the initial supply of ions are lost to the dee surfaces. The loss may be reduced by increasing the dee voltage, thus reducing the number of turns an ion makes

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4357145) — p. 18

    Tabletop: Directly applicable: at 1.3 kV the reference machine's protons make many turns; the single biggest transmission lever for Mark II is more dee volts, not more source current.

  360. Cool dees by furnace-brazing flattened copper tubing to thin (1/8 inch) copper dee plates rather than machining internal channels; it performs as well and is far cheaper, with flow concentrated along the accelerating edge where heating peaks.

    deefabrication dg-360

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The sides of the second set of dees are 1/8 in. copper with five loops of 7/8 in. copper tubing flattened and furnace brazed ... Both designs have proved satisfactory but the latter is much easier and less expensive.

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4357145) — p. 50

    Tabletop: At 1.3 kV the builder needs no water; if a Mark II dee runs kilowatt-class RF, soldered-on flattened tubing along the dee lip is the proven cheap construction.

  361. Perforate the peripheral walls of dees and liner so the dee interior pumps fast, and face surfaces the stray beam can strike with graphite to protect copper and limit induced radioactivity.

    deevacuummaterialssafety dg-361

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The peripheral walls of the dees are perforated to permit high pumping speed. Graphite plates are attached to the inside of the dees ... to protect the copper from the stray proton beam.

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4357145) — p. 50, 7

    Tabletop: Perforation transfers directly (pressure inside an unvented dee can be much worse than gauge pressure); graphite armor matters only if Mark II reaches activation-capable energies.

  362. Prefer oil diffusion pumps over mercury for accelerator columns: mercury vapor promotes autoelectronic (field-emission) discharges from high-voltage electrodes, and fast pumping is needed for steady discharge conditions.

    vacuumion-source dg-362

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Fast pumping is required and it is desirable to use oil rather than mercury diffusion pumps as mercury seems to promote autoelectronic discharges from the electrodes.

    259.full (1).pdf — p. 259-260

    Tabletop: Moot for pump choice today, but the underlying rule stands: condensable metal vapors on HV electrodes trigger field emission; keep electrode surfaces free of conductive films.

  363. A canal-ray (obstructed glow) proton source produces maximum proton output at a discharge voltage of about 20 kV; only a small fraction of discharge current becomes protons, so run 10-100 mA of discharge to get ~1 mA of beam (about 5%).

    optimum discharge ~20 kV; I_beam/I_discharge ~ 1 mA / 20 mA = 5%

    ion-source dg-363

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the maximum current is produced from a discharge running at about 20,000 volts... the current collected by the Faraday cylinder F into which it can penetrate is of the order of 1 milliampere with 20 milliamperes in the discharge.

    259.full (1).pdf — p. 260-261

    Tabletop: Sets the historical proton-conversion baseline: expect percent-level proton yield from a gas discharge and budget discharge power accordingly.

  364. Keep the anode-cathode annular gap small (~4 mm) so no discharge can build up in the gap; the discharge then concentrates naturally on the cathode canal hole, and cathode/tube parts may run red-hot and radiate their heat.

    anode-cathode radial clearance ~4 mm (below discharge maintenance distance at operating pressure)

    ion-source dg-364

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The space between the two steel tubes is too small for a discharge to build up there and it concentrates naturally on the hole in the cathode.

    259.full (1).pdf — p. 260-261

    Tabletop: The 'gap smaller than the dark space' principle is how the builder can force their source discharge to localize at the extraction aperture rather than wander.

  365. A fresh hydrogen discharge beam is largely molecular H2+ ions; only after extended running does it become nearly all protons, so condition the source before assuming beam species, and verify with magnetic analysis.

    H2+ of energy E behaves like two protons of E/2 each: disintegration threshold doubles, curve rises twice as steeply

    ion-sourcebeam-measurement dg-365

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    At first this beam consists very largely of molecular ions, but after running for some time it changes over and becomes nearly all protons

    259.full (1).pdf — p. 261-262, 269

    Tabletop: Critical for p-B11: an unconditioned source delivers H2+ that behaves as half-energy protons, silently killing the expected alpha yield at fixed magnetic rigidity.

  366. Degas an accelerating column by running a hydrogen discharge at 20-60 kV at the highest possible current density for about half an hour; after pumping out, the tube holds 200 kV stably, and thereafter ~30 min of morning running restores steady state.

    conditioning discharge 20-60 kV, ~30 min -> holds 200 kV

    vacuumion-source dg-366

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    admitting hydrogen till it was possible to run a discharge at about 20-60 kilovolts... on pumping out the hydrogen it is usually found that the tube is quite hard and stable up to 200,000 volts.

    259.full (1).pdf — p. 265

    Tabletop: A concrete glow-discharge conditioning schedule the builder can scale for dee and extraction electrodes that must hold voltage without sparking.

  367. If measured beam current is very low even close to the ion source (the large-turn-spacing region where probe masking cannot be the cause), suspect meager ion production rather than RF voltage or focusing.

    ion-sourcebeam-measurement dg-367

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    one should be suspicious of the ion source if the measured beam current is very low in the region close to the ion source, i.e. the regime of large turn spacing

    ion_source_studies_part_1.pdf — p. 1

    Tabletop: A triage rule for the reference machine's low-current debugging: measure current at small radius first; if it's already low there, more RF power won't fix it - the source will.

  368. Run the ion source as a low-voltage hot-cathode arc: 2-3 A discharge at 100-150 V, cavity pressure ~1e-2 mm Hg maintained through the exit hole, gas flow ~2 cm3/min (STP); expect ~0.5 mA resonant beam from such a source.

    arc 3 A @ 100 V; electron beam ~2 A; gas 2 cm3/min atm; cavity ~1e-2 mm Hg; resonant beam ~0.5 mA

    ion-source dg-368

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    arc current, 3 amp; arc voltage drop, 100 volts; electron beam from exit hole, 2 amp; gas flow, 2 cm3/min at atmospheric pressure. The resonant ion beam pulled from such a source ... might be about 0.5 ma.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 175-178

    Tabletop: These operating points scale down gracefully; the key architecture point - a differentially pumped cavity at ~1e-2 torr feeding a chamber at 1e-5 - applies at any size.

  369. Heat the source cathode with DC or ~100 kHz AC, never mains-frequency AC, to avoid vibration damage from the magnetic field; keep oxygen out of the gas (it erodes the cathode) and expect 100-200 hr filament life.

    cathode: heavy W or Ta rod; heating dc or ~100 kc; life 100-200 hr

    ion-sourcematerials dg-369

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The heating power is either dc or high-frequency ac (~100 kc) to avoid damage from vibration in the magnetic field at low frequencies. Cathode life is ... materially shortened by traces of oxygen.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 177-178

    Tabletop: A 60 Hz-heated filament in a 0.59 T field literally shakes itself apart; DC heating and clean hydrogen are cheap reliability.

  370. Design for operating pressure ~2e-5 mm Hg with source gas flowing (base <1e-6); the ion-source gas load, not outgassing, sets the working pressure, so put pumping speed close to the dees.

    MIT: 2400 l/s on 2000 l volume; base <1e-6 mm Hg, operating ~2e-5 mm Hg with D2 flow

    vacuumion-source dg-370

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    With no gas flow, chamber pressures of better than 1 x 10-6 mm Hg are obtained. With the deuterium gas flow from the ion source, the operating pressure is about 2 x 10-5 mm Hg.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 198

    Tabletop: The builder should expect an order-of-magnitude pressure rise when hydrogen flows; low-2e-5 territory while running is normal and workable, not a leak.

  371. Heat the spiral filament ion source with high-frequency AC rather than DC or mains AC, to avoid the self-generated J x B forces tearing the spiral apart in the main magnetic field.

    ion-sourcefabrication dg-371

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The filament is heated to incandescence by a high-frequency a-c power supply. The high-frequency is used to minimize self-destructive magnetic effects in the spiral filament.

    The Iowa State University 1.5 MeV Undergraduate Cyclotron — p. 7

    Tabletop: Concrete fix for a failure mode the builder will hit at 0.6-1.7 T with a hairpin/spiral filament: filament life is a chronic tabletop problem.

  372. Penning-source housekeeping numbers: gas consumption 0.2-0.6 sccm, source pressure 1-10 Pa, ignition needs 3-5 kV even if the running arc is 0.3-1.3 kV, extraction 5-25 kV, anode (chimney) apertures 1x25 to 1.5x45 mm with cathode spacing 6-25 cm in big machines.

    gas 0.2-0.6 sccm; p_source = 1-10 Pa; V_ignition = 3-5 kV; V_arc = 0.3-5 kV; V_extraction = 5-35 kV

    ion-sourcevacuum dg-372

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Operating Data of Penning Ion Sources: Arc voltage 0.3-1.3 / 1-5 kV; Ignition volt. 3-5 kV; Gas pressure 1-10 Pa; Gas consumption 0.2 sccm.

    Wolf (ed.), Handbook of Ion Sources — p. 101

    Tabletop: The reference machine's MFC should be sized and calibrated around the 0.1-1 sccm range, and the arc supply must tolerate a several-kV open-circuit ignition transient before folding back to run voltage.

  373. Match structural metals to their real vacuum temperature limits: stainless to ~1000 C (alloys with Ta/Mo above 900 C!), Mo to 2000 C (goes brittle, use TZM), Ta to 2600 C, W to 3400 C but nearly unmachinable, W-Re alloys are formable filament stock, graphite to 3500 C but outgasses and holds a memory effect.

    service limits: Cu 600 C, Ti 800 C, SS 1000 C, Mo 2000 C, Ta 2600 C, Re 3150 C, W 3400 C, graphite 3500 C

    materialsion-sourcefabrication dg-373

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Stainless steel is an excellent material up to about 1000 C... It forms low-melting alloys with tantalum and molybdenum above 900 C... Tungsten... has the highest melting point of about 3400 C and is best suited for filaments.

    Wolf (ed.), Handbook of Ion Sources — p. 355

    Tabletop: Do not clamp Ta filament legs directly in stainless fixtures near the hot zone; use Mo or graphite intermediate parts in the Mark II chimney.

  374. Pick hot-zone insulators by temperature and outgassing: quartz and Macor to ~1000 C, boron nitride excellent to 1200 C but absorbs water and outgasses badly (bake gently first), alumina to 1400 C is the workhorse; BN releases nitrogen above 1500 C.

    quartz 1000 C; Macor ~1000 C; BN 1200 C (1500 C max, decomposes); alumina 1400 C; zirconia 1600 C but conducts above 1000 C

    materialsion-sourcevacuum dg-374

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Boron nitride is an excellent material for most applications for temperatures up to 1200 C... It outgasses badly and tends to absorb water, which can destroy the parts when heated too fast.

    Wolf (ed.), Handbook of Ion Sources — p. 356

    Tabletop: BN filament insulators in a home source must be pre-baked and brought up to arc power slowly the first time after air exposure, or they crack and gas up the chamber.

  375. Space-charge-limited extraction current density follows Child-Langmuir in practical units: j[mA/cm^2] = 1.72*sqrt(q*/u)*U[kV]^1.5/d[mm]^2 -- for protons at 10 kV across a 5-mm gap that is ~2.2 mA/cm^2, far above a hobby cyclotron's needs.

    j[mA/cm^2] = 1.72*sqrt(q*/u)*(phi[kV])^(3/2)/(d[mm])^2

    ion-sourcebeam-dynamics dg-375

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    In more practical units, this equation can be rewritten: j[mA/cm2] = 1.72 * sqrt(q*/u) * phi[kV]^(3/2) / d[mm]^2.

    Wolf (ed.), Handbook of Ion Sources — p. 376-377

    Tabletop: Confirms the reference machine's nA beams are nowhere near space-charge limits; if extraction is weak the problem is geometry/plasma matching, not the Child-Langmuir ceiling.

  376. Design extraction optics around an aspect ratio (aperture radius : gap) of S ~ 0.5, which gives a per-aperture current limit I[mA] = 0.703*sqrt(q*/u)*U[kV]^1.5 and minimum divergence; the plasma density must then be matched to the field or the beam over/under-focuses.

    S = r/d ~ 0.5; I[mA] = 0.703*sqrt(q*/u)*phi[kV]^(3/2); divergence w0 = 0.5*(r/d)*(1 - 1.67*Pi_normalized) for round apertures

    ion-sourcebeam-dynamics dg-376

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The assumption of a certain aspect ratio (aperture radius to electrode separation). A good aspect ratio is on the order of S = 0.5.

    Wolf (ed.), Handbook of Ion Sources — p. 379

    Tabletop: For the puller gap in Mark II: make the source-slit half-width about half the slit-to-puller distance, then tune arc density (not geometry) until the beam is parallel.

  377. Size thermionic cathodes with the Richardson formula and treat temperature as the only real knob: a 10% temperature change swings emission roughly 10-fold, so regulate filament heating current tightly.

    j_sat = A*b*T^2*exp(-e*phi/kT) A/cm^2, A = 120.4 A/cm^2K^2; W: phi = 4.54 V, A*b = 60; Ta: phi = 4.12 V, A*b = 60; thoriated W (Th on W): phi = 2.63 V, A*b = 3.0

    ion-source dg-377

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The increase of the saturation current with temperature is very strong; a 10% change in temperature corresponds to a 10-fold increase of 20% to a 100-fold increase.

    Wolf (ed.), Handbook of Ion Sources — p. 38-39

    Tabletop: The reference machine's hydrogen filament source lives or dies on filament temperature stability; a constant-current supply with fine adjustment is worth more than raw power.

  378. Budget filament heater power from radiation: refractory-metal filaments radiate roughly 20 W/cm^2 of surface at 2000 K, and nearly all input power leaves as radiation rather than end conduction, so the surrounding chimney/anode must take that heat.

    P_rad ~ 20 W/cm^2 at 2000 K (W, Ta, Mo similar); filament V ~ sqrt(d)*l, I ~ d^1.5, independent of length

    ion-source dg-378

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Most of the power put into a filament is radiated and very little is lost through the ends. Most high-temperature metals show similar radiation behavior (~20 W/cm2 at 2000 K).

    Wolf (ed.), Handbook of Ion Sources — p. 39

    Tabletop: A few cm^2 of hot filament dumps tens of watts into the reference machine's source body; the hood/chimney around the filament needs a conductive heat path to the pole or water cooling.

  379. Run refractory filaments at the lowest temperature that gives enough emission -- evaporation lifetime is savage: a 1-mm W wire lasts ~8,300 h at 2500 K but ~46 h at 2900 K; a 1-mm Ta wire ~7,000 h at 2400 K but ~350 h at 2600 K; lifetime scales linearly with wire diameter, and Ta (the easiest refractory to form) embrittles in hydrogen.

    W: 2500 K -> 0.30 A/cm^2, 8.3e3 h (1 mm); 2700 K -> 1.6 A/cm^2, 500 h; 2900 K -> 7.3 A/cm^2, 46 h. Ta: 2400 K -> 0.65 A/cm^2, 7.0e3 h; 2600 K -> 2.7 A/cm^2, 350 h. Life proportional to diameter

    ion-sourcematerials dg-379

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The increase of temperature for higher electron output is limited by the increasing evaporation of cathode material, which decreases the cathode lifetime. Tables 1.2 and 1.3 give the respective data for W and Ta.

    Wolf (ed.), Handbook of Ion Sources — p. 41-42

    Tabletop: For Mark II, a fatter filament run cooler at ~0.1-1 A/cm^2 buys weeks of run time instead of days; treat used Ta hairpins as brittle after hydrogen exposure.

  380. Discharge-type sources with good confinement reach >=50% gas efficiency (multicusp: >50% for hydrogen), while poorly confined sources run 10-20%; every neutral that escapes the chimney loads the main vacuum, so gas efficiency is a vacuum-design parameter.

    gas efficiency: multicusp/e-bombardment <=50% (H2 >50%); plasmatron family 10-20% to 50%

    ion-sourcevacuum dg-380

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Gas efficiency: >50% for hydrogen and higher for other gases.

    Wolf (ed.), Handbook of Ion Sources — p. 57, 69, 110

    Tabletop: At 0.2 sccm feed and 50% efficiency only ~0.1 sccm of H2 leaks into the chamber; doubling source gas efficiency is worth as much as doubling pump speed for keeping the beam path at low pressure.

  381. Expect only 10-100 h filament life in a working arc source; the proven quiet-arc template (Freeman) is 40-70 V at 1-3 A with a massive 2-mm Ta/W cathode rod heated by ~130 A, and since erosion concentrates at the positive filament end, periodically reversing DC heater polarity extends life (AC evens wear but adds energy spread).

    filament life 10-100 h; Freeman window: V_arc = 40-70 V, I_arc = 1-3 A, 2-mm-dia rod cathode, I_heat ~ 130 A, B ~ 0.01 T; reverse heater polarity at ~half-life

    ion-source dg-381

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The arc current is 1 to 3 A and the arc voltage just 40 to 70 V... The lifetime of the source is given by the lifetime of the filament, which is between 10 and 100 h... Changing the polarity of the filament... improves cathode lifetime.

    Wolf (ed.), Handbook of Ion Sources — p. 73

    Tabletop: For Mark II: a thick rod cathode instead of thin wire is the cheapest lifetime upgrade, plus a DPDT reversing switch on the heater and an arc-hours log.

  382. Standard extraction/exit slit for slit-type arc sources is about 2 mm wide by 40 mm long; going longer (up to 90-100 mm) degrades current-density uniformity along the slit because of the voltage drop along the cathode.

    slit ~ 2 x 40 mm typical; 100 x 5 mm max realized

    ion-source dg-382

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The extraction slit is usually about 2 mm wide and about 40 mm long. Larger slits are possible, such as 90 mm, but... the current density is not uniform along the long slit.

    Wolf (ed.), Handbook of Ion Sources — p. 74, 76

    Tabletop: For a cyclotron chimney only the few-mm of slit facing the dee gap matters; a ~1-2 mm wide slit is the proven starting width before puller optimization.

  383. PIG/Penning discharges split into two useful regimes: cold-cathode (arc >1 kV at 0.5-5 A) and hot-cathode (arc <1 kV at 1-50 A); the magnetic field barely matters above a minimum of ~0.1 T, and arc voltage rises as gas flow is cut until the arc goes unstable.

    cold cathode: V_arc > 1 kV, I = 0.5-5 A; hot cathode: V_arc < 1 kV, I = 1-50 A; B_min ~ 0.1 T; high-pressure regime 0.1-100 Pa

    ion-source dg-383

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The cold cathode PIG source with arc voltages above 1 kV and currents between 0.5 and 5 A, and the hot cathode PIG source with arc voltages below 1 kV and currents between 1 and 50 A.

    Wolf (ed.), Handbook of Ion Sources — p. 81-82

    Tabletop: The reference machine's cyclotron field (>0.1 T at the center) already satisfies the PIG minimum, so a Mark II internal PIG source can trade the fragile filament for a self-heated cathode running a sub-kV, multi-ampere arc.

  384. Extracted current from a PIG source is proportional to arc current, at roughly 10-100 (mA/cm^2) of extracted current density per ampere of arc for extraction through the anode slit -- so beam scaling is done with the arc supply, not the extraction voltage.

    j_extracted ~ (10-100 mA/cm^2) per A of arc current; ion current density at cathodes is 5-10x that at anode

    ion-source dg-384

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The total extracted current of a PIG ion source is proportional to the arc current, and for extraction through the anode, about 10 to 100 (mA/cm2)/A.

    Wolf (ed.), Handbook of Ion Sources — p. 82

    Tabletop: With a ~1 mm^2 chimney slit, even a 1-A arc gives ~0.1-1 mA available at the slit, orders of magnitude above the reference machine's nA beams; source output will not be the bottleneck.

  385. Cold-cathode PIG arcs are limited to about 1 kW per cathode before uncontrolled thermionic emission sets in; a cathode is worn out when its sputter-erosion crater depth reaches about the anode bore radius, after which the discharge goes unstable.

    P_arc(cold) < ~1 kW per cathode; end of life: crater depth ~ anode bore radius; Ti best cold-cathode material, Ta if run hot

    ion-source dg-385

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The arc power for cold cathode operation is limited to about 1 kW per cathode... The cold and hot cathodes are worn out when the erosion crater's depth reaches around the anode bore radius.

    Wolf (ed.), Handbook of Ion Sources — p. 84-85

    Tabletop: Gives a concrete inspection criterion: measure the cathode pit depth against the chimney bore each time the source is pulled, and machine spare cathode buttons in advance.

  386. For long life use an indirectly heated block cathode: an auxiliary filament bombards the cathode's rear with ~1-kV electrons so cathode temperature is set independently of the arc, and the cathode can be burned down completely without instability -- the standard cyclotron internal-source upgrade path.

    e-bombardment heating: 0-2 kV / 0-2.5 A onto cathode rear; filament itself 50-150 A at 2-8 V

    ion-source dg-386

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Electrons emitted from a filament and accelerated to about 1 kV heat the cathode from the rear side... The lifetime of the heated cathode exceeds that of cold or hot cathodes.

    Wolf (ed.), Handbook of Ion Sources — p. 86, 101

    Tabletop: A Mark II source can keep a small filament hidden behind a Ta block cathode, out of the hydrogen plasma, converting filament sputtering into slow self-sputtering of a thick block.

  387. Expect the open-filament arc to run 0.5-2 A at 100-500 V at ~1e-4 mm Hg; strike it at 0.5-1 A and 100-200 V, and set filament emission to 10-20 mA at 200-300 V bias under high vacuum before admitting gas.

    arc: 0.5-2 A @ 100-500 V @ ~1e-4 torr; emission set-point 10-20 mA @ 200-300 V

    ion-source dg-387

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    at normal operating pressures of 10^-4 mm Hg, between 1/2 to 2 amps at 100 to 500 volts will be required

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 6, 10

    Tabletop: Directly applicable operating envelope for a simple hot-filament source at the reference machine's scale.

  388. Admit hydrogen so tank pressure rises by about 1e-4 mm above base while watching arc current; control flow with a long-taper needle valve, a thread-leak, or a heated palladium leak.

    delta-P(H2) ~ +1e-4 torr over base pressure

    ion-sourcevacuum dg-388

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    hydrogen may be admitted to the tank, 'opening' the valve until the tank pressure rises by another 10^-4 mm, meanwhile watching the arc current

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 6, 10

    Tabletop: Directly applicable gas-flow set-point; the reference machine's parker metering valve fills the needle-valve role.

  389. Use an ion source filament of ~0.025-inch tungsten (about 25 A at a few volts) instead of fragile automobile-lamp filaments, and float the filament supply across a storage battery to filter ripple that vibrates the filament.

    0.025 in W filament ~ 25 A dc at a few volts

    ion-source dg-389

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    an automobile headlight filament has been used, but the breakage has been high ... perhaps .025 in. tungsten ... A .025 in. tungsten filament requires about 25 amps d.c.

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 6-7

    Tabletop: Directly applicable filament sizing; the modern equivalent of the battery filter is a well-filtered DC (not raw rectified) filament supply to stop magnetically driven filament vibration.

  390. Shield the ion-source filament from the dee's RF field with a small metal 'chimney' tube (1/4 in) and let the dee field extract ions through a small side hole facing the gap.

    1/4 in chimney tube over filament, side extraction hole

    ion-source dg-390

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    A quarter-inch tube called a 'chimney' sits on top of the filament, which shields it from the electric field of the dee. Ionized hydrogen is drawn out of a small hole.

    we1pb05.pdf — p. 3

    Tabletop: A proven upgrade from a bare filament for Mark II: better-defined source position, less RF loading of the plasma.

  391. Beam current improved an order of magnitude (10 -> 70 pA) by running higher frequency, lower H2 partial pressure (2.2e-6 vs 1.5e-5 torr), lower base pressure, and a much smaller filament bias (-6 V vs -100 V) - gas scattering and source conditions dominate over RF power.

    6.04 MHz, H2 2.2e-6 torr, -6 V filament -> 70 pA vs 3.55 MHz, 1.5e-5 torr, -100 V -> 10 pA

    ion-sourcevacuumbeam-measurement dg-391

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Higher frequency, lower H2 and base pressure, lower filament voltage

    2010cycconf_YULY_houghton.pdf — p. 17-18

    Tabletop: For the reference machine's current-hunting: before adding RF watts, cut chamber pressure and re-optimize filament bias - Houghton's 7x gain cost zero watts.

  392. Make the inner grid diameter about one-fifth of the chamber diameter and keep geometric transparency above 92%; three loops of 0.114 mm tungsten wire on a 4.2 cm sphere give 99.2% transparency.

    d_grid ~ D_chamber/5; transparency = 1 - (pi*d_grid*N_loops*d_wire)/(4*pi*r^2) >= 0.92

    ion-sourcefabrication dg-392

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    fusion efficiency is enhanced by transparency of at least 92 percent (Donovan). The inner grid is 99.18 percent transparent with three loops

    Kovalchick, Deuterium Fusion Using IEC — p. 19-20

    Tabletop: The transparency bookkeeping (wire cross-section vs aperture area) is the same calculation the builder needs for any grid, mesh, or slit that their beam must pass repeatedly.

  393. Choose grid/electrode wire for high melting point, low sputter yield, and HIGH work function (to suppress parasitic thermionic electron current); the supply cannot tell an ion arriving from an electron leaving, so every emitted electron steals ion current from the same supply budget.

    I_supply = i_ion + i_electron at fixed P_ext = V*I; maximize ion fraction by high-work-function, cool grid

    ion-sourcematerials dg-393

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    A power supply cannot differentiate between an ion reaching the cathode grid and an electron leaving it (they both appear as positive current on the ammeter).

    Miley & Murali, Inertial Electrostatic Confinement (IEC) Fusion — p. 135, 144

    Tabletop: When the builder meters 'beam current' anywhere near a hot cathode, part of it is electrons; a high-work-function collector surface and magnetic electron suppression keep the nA readings honest.

  394. Thermal limit of a wire electrode: maximum steady current before sagging is I = A*eps*sigma*T^4/V (black-body balance); a 10-cm stainless grid (A~76 cm^2, eps~0.15, sag at ~1500 K) can only handle ~9.5 mA at 200 kV, so stainless caps usable power.

    I_max = A*eps*sigma*T_safe^4 / V; SS: melt ~1800 K, sag ~1500 K, eps ~0.15

    ion-sourcematerials dg-394

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Assuming that sagging occurs at ~1,500 K and equating the black body radiation rate to the input power... This gives 9.5 mA of ion current at 200 kV.

    Miley & Murali, Inertial Electrostatic Confinement (IEC) Fusion — p. 145

    Tabletop: Same balance sizes any wire electrode, probe, or beam stop in the reference machine's chamber: compute AeσT^4 at the material's sag temperature and keep beam-power deposition below it.

  395. W-25%Re is the sweet-spot electrode alloy: melting ~2800 K, low sputter yield, spot-weldable and formable (unlike pure W); a stainless grid lasted under a week at power while the W-25Re grid ran 30-130 kV at 30-180 mA for >1,000 h and survived over 2 years.

    W-25%Re: T_melt ~ 2800 K; validated 30-130 kV, 30-180 mA, >1000 h; pure W spot-welding needs Ni foil interlayer (Ni then limits temperature)

    ion-sourcematerialsfabrication dg-395

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The stainless steel wires previously used by Murali lasted for under a week depending on the power load. In contrast, with the W-25%Re alloy, the grid lasted for over 2 years.

    Miley & Murali, Inertial Electrostatic Confinement (IEC) Fusion — p. 145-146

    Tabletop: W-Re thermocouple wire is commercially available in small quantities and is the best upgrade for any sputtered electrode in the reference machine's source: W durability with Ta-like workability.

  396. DC glow discharges are organized by the pressure-distance product pd, not pressure alone; the glow regime runs ~300-1500 V at mA-level currents, and nearly the whole applied voltage drops in the few-mm cathode sheath.

    breakdown V = f(p*d) (Paschen); glow: 300-1500 V, mA currents; cathode fall occupies first few mm

    ion-sourcevacuum dg-396

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The product of pressure and distance between the electrodes (pd) is a better parameter to characterize the discharge... The voltage is mostly in the range between 300 and 1500 V, but... the current is generally in the mA range.

    Miley & Murali, Inertial Electrostatic Confinement (IEC) Fusion — p. 86-88

    Tabletop: When the builder scales chamber geometry or pressure for the p-B11 test cell, keep pd constant to preserve the discharge; and remember all sputtering damage happens at the cathode sheath edge.

  397. Know the V-I ladder of a low-pressure DC discharge -- background/saturation, Townsend dark discharge, corona at sharp points, breakdown, normal glow (V roughly constant over decades of current), abnormal glow, then glow-to-arc when the cathode overheats -- and note the hysteresis: the glow persists below its striking condition once lit.

    sequence: dark -> Townsend -> breakdown -> normal glow (V ~ const) -> abnormal glow -> arc; hysteresis on the way back down

    ion-source dg-397

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    A hysteresis effect occurs; wherein instead of retracing the path... the discharge maintains itself in the normal glow regime... at considerably lower currents... Only then does it make the transition back to the Townsend regime.

    Miley & Murali, Inertial Electrostatic Confinement (IEC) Fusion — p. 89-91

    Tabletop: Explains why the reference machine's source may need a several-kV kick to strike but then runs at a few hundred volts, and why current-limited (ballasted) supplies are mandatory to stop glow-to-arc runaway.

  398. In a gridded low-pressure device the ion mean free path sets ignition: at 2 mTorr the ion mfp is ~7 cm and striking voltages reach tens of kV, at 20 mTorr the mfp is ~0.7 cm and striking is easy; typical hydrogen/deuterium operation is 2-15 mTorr with breakdown at 5-50 kV.

    lambda_ion ~ 7 cm @ 2 mTorr, ~0.7 cm @ 20 mTorr (H2/D2); V_strike rises as p falls; operating window 2-15 mTorr

    ion-sourcevacuum dg-398

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The ion mean free path at 2 mTorr is ~7 cm, while at 20 mTorr it is around 0.7 cm... The striking voltage increases with decreasing pressure.

    Miley & Murali, Inertial Electrostatic Confinement (IEC) Fusion — p. 92, 94

    Tabletop: For any glow-driven ion supply in the p-B11 experiment, pressure is the ignition control: strike at higher pressure, then throttle the MFC down to the running point.

  399. A transparent wire cathode breaks down at ~3x lower pd than a solid cathode at the same voltage, because ions recirculate through the grid; below ~0.5 Torr-cm the discharge self-organizes into microchannels ('Star mode') whose effective transparency far exceeds geometric transparency -- so use large grid openings rather than fine mesh.

    pd(solid)/pd(grid) ~ 3 at fixed V_strike; Star mode below ~0.5 Torr-cm; rigid grids practical only to ~95% geometric transparency

    ion-source dg-399

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    For fixed Vs, the value of (pd) is seen to be about three times higher for both the spherical and the planar solid-cathode discharges than for the transparent grid-type cathode discharges.

    Miley & Murali, Inertial Electrostatic Confinement (IEC) Fusion — p. 94-96

    Tabletop: If the builder builds an IEC-style p-B11 test stand, a few large openings aligned with the beam axis beat a fine mesh: fewer grid hits, higher effective transparency, longer grid life.

  400. To ionize low-pressure gas (1-10 microns) for a beam-mode device, add a hot filament electron emitter just outside the main electrode structure biased about +200 V with respect to ground.

    filament bias ~ +200 V, located outside outer grid

    ion-source dg-400

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    it might be necessary to include a filament or other source of electrons to ionize the deuterium at low pressures. This filament should be placed just outside of the outer grid system and biased slightly positive (~200 volts)

    The Farnsworth–Hirsch Fusor — p. 7

    Tabletop: Matches the reference machine's hydrogen filament source philosophy: a modest positive bias (order 100-200 V) on/near an emitter sustains ionization at pressures where a self-sustained discharge dies.

  401. Electrically shield (insulate) the support structure of a negatively biased electrode so ions bombard only the intended electrode, not its stalk and feedthrough.

    ion-sourcefabrication dg-401

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Care must be exercised to electrically shield (insulate) the inner grid metallic support structure so that ions will not bombard that portion of the apparatus.

    The Farnsworth–Hirsch Fusor — p. 7

    Tabletop: Same rule protects the reference machine's Faraday cup stalk and source supports: unshielded biased metal collects spurious current and sputters.

  402. Do not expect filament bias voltage (tested around -90 V) to move beam current; on the Houghton machine it had no significant effect.

    beam current insensitive to filament bias (tests near -90 V)

    ion-source dg-402

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    It appears that filament bias has no effect on the beam current.

    Houghton College physics thesis (Fuller) — p. 48-49

    Tabletop: Saves tuning time: spend effort on dee voltage and pressure, not filament bias, when hunting current.

  403. With an internal fill-gas ion source there is an optimal chamber pressure band (about 1e-5 to 3e-5 Torr on the Houghton machine): current first falls then rises as pressure is lowered, and the very lowest pressures starve ionization.

    operating band ~1-3e-5 Torr; highest raw current seen ~1e-4 Torr but with badly broadened resonances

    ion-sourcevacuum dg-403

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    If there is too little gas, less ionization will occur... Too high a pressure and the ionized particles will likely interact with gas inside the dee and fall out of resonance.

    Houghton College physics thesis (Fuller) — p. 51-52

    Tabletop: Gives the builder a target pressure window and the expected non-monotonic current-vs-pressure curve to map on their own machine.

  404. Add deliberate clearance between the filament and the chamber lid - Houghton milled a 0.3 cm deep circular depression into the lid specifically to prevent a repeat filament-to-lid discharge.

    0.3 cm milled recess

    chamberion-source dg-404

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    To make room for a filament and to avoid another electrical discharge from the filament to the lid, a 0.3 cm deep circular depression was milled out of the bottom of the upper lid.

    Houghton College physics thesis (Haas) — p. 50

    Tabletop: In the reference machine's tight pole-gap geometry, check every HV-to-ground clearance near the median plane; milling relief pockets is cheaper than chasing sparks later.

  405. Run the chamber between 1e-6 and 1e-4 Torr of hydrogen: below that there is too little gas to ionize, above it neutral collisions shorten the mean free path and the resonance peaks broaden and shift; peak current (~0.1 uA) came at ~1e-4 Torr.

    operating pressure 1e-6 to 1e-4 Torr; best current 0.1 uA at ~1e-4 Torr; typical running 2e-5 Torr

    vacuumion-sourcebeam-measurement dg-405

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The pressure in the chamber has a large effect on the beam current obtained, and typically needs to be in the range from 1e-6 to 1e-4 Torr for the cyclotron to operate.

    we1pb01.pdf — p. 5

    Tabletop: Directly sets the gas-handling operating window for the reference machine and explains a common 'no beam' failure at too-good vacuum.

  406. Support and connect a floating PIG anode with two 0.5 mm stainless wires fed through alumina tubes sealed with ceramic epoxy (Ceramabond) into the cathode body; a third stainless tube serves as gas inlet.

    ion-sourcefabrication dg-406

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the anode floats inside the cathode body, being supported only by the two stainless steel wires that protrude through the alumina tubes and out the back of the cathode body.

    1maPIGionsource (1).pdf — p. 1-2

    Tabletop: An amateur-grade insulated feedthrough scheme (alumina tube + Ceramabond) the builder can reuse for chimney anodes or filament leads inside the Mark II.

  407. A cold-cathode PIG built from an iron cathode body, ~3 kG SmCo permanent magnet, folded 0.13 mm stainless sheet anode, and iron faceplate with a 6.4 mm axial aperture delivers a continuous 1 mA H+ beam at 1 mTorr with 5.4 kV and 32.4 W.

    3 kG SmCo; 5.1 cm iron cathode body; 6.4 mm faceplate hole; 1 mA H+ at 1 mTorr, 5.4 kV, 32.4 W

    ion-source dg-407

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    generate a plasma discharge that yields a continuous 1 mA beam of positively charged hydrogen ions at 1 mTorr of pressure. This operating condition requires 5.4 kV and 32.4 W

    1maPIGionsource (1).pdf — p. 1-3

    Tabletop: A directly copyable permanent-magnet source recipe for the Mark II external or test-stand source at exactly hobby machining tolerances.

  408. Current-limit a PIG discharge with a series resistor (here 100 kOhm, 100 W) and always report/log the actual anode-to-cathode voltage, not the power-supply setpoint, since the resistor drops significant voltage during operation.

    V_source = V_supply - I_discharge * R_ballast; R = 100 kOhm, 100 W

    ion-source dg-408

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Because the 100 kOhm current-limiting resistor develops a voltage drop during source operation, the ion source voltage (anode-to-cathode voltage) is reported instead of the power supply voltage.

    1maPIGionsource (1).pdf — p. 2

    Tabletop: Directly applicable to the reference machine's filament/arc supply metering; logging supply volts instead of electrode volts corrupts any operating-point map.

  409. In a compact source-in-chamber setup the pressure inside the ion source is only about 2x the chamber pressure, so simply backfilling the chamber can substitute for direct gas injection into the source.

    P_internal ~ 2 x P_chamber (small chamber, direct injection)

    ion-sourcevacuum dg-409

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the pressure internal to the ion source is only approximately a factor of 2 larger than the chamber pressure... source operation has also been achieved by simply backfilling the chamber.

    1maPIGionsource (1).pdf — p. 2

    Tabletop: The reference machine's MFC feed into the source chimney matters most when the main chamber is well-pumped; in a small chamber the distinction between injection and backfill largely disappears.

  410. A PIG discharge ignites easily at 1 kV or less; usable beam appears from ~600 V (0.3 mA discharge, 21 uA target) and grows monotonically with voltage to the design point.

    H2, 1 mTorr: 580 V -> 0.3 mA disch / 20.8 uA target; 5.4 kV -> 6.0 mA / 1.5 mA

    ion-source dg-410

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the plasma discharge ignites easily at 1 kV or less for all cases and produces a continuous positively charged ion beam.

    1maPIGionsource (1).pdf — p. 2-3

    Tabletop: Tens-of-uA proton output at under 1 kV anode drive is ample for the reference machine's nA-scale accelerated beam; a multi-kV arc supply is not required to start.

  411. Expect extracted (target) current to be roughly 20-25% of PIG discharge current; scale beam current by raising pressure or discharge voltage, both of which raise discharge current.

    I_target/I_discharge ~ 0.25 (H2), 0.21 (He); 1.5 mA target at 6.0 mA discharge, 5.4 kV

    ion-sourcebeam-measurement dg-411

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the source has a current utilization efficiency (ratio of target to discharge current) of 25% and requires 32.4 W of power.

    1maPIGionsource (1).pdf — p. 3

    Tabletop: Gives the builder a sanity check: nA-to-uA beams need only uA-to-mA class discharges; if their beam/arc ratio is far below ~20% the extraction geometry is losing beam.

  412. For DC post-acceleration of a PIG beam, place a negatively biased suppressor electrode ~2.5 cm downstream of the source faceplate and the target ~7.6 cm beyond it; this focused a 1 mA H+ beam at only 0.4 mTorr and 10.5 W of source power with up to -30 kV acceleration.

    suppressor at 2.5 cm, target at +7.6 cm, both biased negative w.r.t. grounded cathode; 1 mA at 0.4 mTorr, 10.5 W

    ion-sourcebeam-dynamics dg-412

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    at a pressure of 0.4 mTorr and 10.5 W PIG source power, a continuous 1 mA positive hydrogen ion beam has been focused onto the target and accelerator voltages up to -30 kV have been investigated.

    1maPIGionsource (1).pdf — p. 3

    Tabletop: Template for a bench extraction test stand to characterize the Mark II source before it goes into the magnet.

  413. An internal cold-cathode PIG source is a low-maintenance choice: the Rutgers source runs more than 40 hours between servicings.

    >40 h service interval

    ion-source dg-413

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The ion source is an internal cold cathode Penning Ion Gauge (PIG) source that operates in excess of 40 hours before requiring service.

    82375909.pdf — p. 2

    Tabletop: Benchmarks source lifetime for Mark II; hot filaments burn out far faster than a cold-cathode PIG at this scale.

  414. Separate the source's gas-fed discharge region from the main vacuum with a tight-fitting boron nitride insulator; 2.5 sccm of H2 into the chimney holds the main chamber near 4e-5 Torr against a good pump (base 8e-7 Torr).

    2.5 sccm H2 -> 4e-5 Torr chamber (base 8e-7 Torr); BN insulator isolates ~1e-5 Torr region

    ion-sourcevacuum dg-414

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    With a gas flow rate of 2.5 cc/min of hydrogen, the pressure in the main vacuum chamber is around 4e-5 Torr.

    Forringer, Edward Russell.pdf — p. 17-29

    Tabletop: A direct benchmark for the reference machine's MFC-vs-chamber-pressure curve; large deviations from ~1.5e-5 Torr per sccm (at similar pumping speed) indicate leaks or conductance problems.

  415. A cold-cathode PIG needs only a ~3 kV current-limited supply to strike and run: after striking, the arc voltage drops to whatever sustains the set current; the 1.9-3.8 mm cathode-anode gap is not a critical parameter.

    strike supply 3 kV / 1 A current-limited; running arc voltage < 3 kV; gap 0.075-0.150 in non-critical

    ion-source dg-415

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The cathode anode gap was between 0.075 (1.9 mm) and 0.150 (3.8 mm), and is not a critical parameter for the source's operation.

    Forringer, Edward Russell.pdf — p. 19

    Tabletop: Relaxes the reference machine's machining tolerances on the Mark II source gap and sizes the arc supply: a 3 kV current-limited unit suffices.

  416. Water-cool the cathode rod and anode base of an internal PIG - copper parts melted when the source was run without cooling - and prepare cathode faces by sanding with 100-grit paper to a uniformly rough surface for reliable arc striking.

    ion-sourcefabrication dg-416

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Water cooling for the cathode rod and the anode base are essential (some copper parts were melted when the ion source was run without proper cooling).

    Forringer, Edward Russell.pdf — p. 19-20

    Tabletop: At the reference machine's much lower arc powers passive/conductive cooling may suffice, but the sanded-cathode arc-striking trick transfers directly.

  417. For reference, hot-filament internal sources run far harder than cold-cathode PIGs: Livingston and Jones heated a U-shaped tantalum filament with ~400 A, ran 2-6 A of arc, and extracted 150 mA of protons through a 129 mm2 slit with a 12 kV puller across a 3.3 mm gap.

    Ta filament ~400 A heater; arc 2-6 A; 150 mA extracted at 12 kV, 3.3 mm source-puller gap, 129 mm2 slit

    ion-source dg-417

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Their cathode was a U-shaped tantalum filament, heated with about 400 amps... able to extract 150 mA using a puller voltage of 12kV and a source-puller gap of about 0.13 (3.3 mm).

    Forringer, Edward Russell.pdf — p. 3-4

    Tabletop: Brackets the design space above the reference machine's filament source: proton output scales with arc current and slit area over 3+ orders of magnitude, so their nA needs are met with sub-ampere arcs.

  418. Chimney slit width is the dominant knob on an internal PIG's output: doubling the slit from 0.25 mm to 0.51 mm (both 5.0 mm tall, 10 degree chamfer) raised beam current ~4.4x (52 to 230 uA at 50 mA arc) at the cost of ~1.7x radial emittance.

    0.010 in slit: 52 uA, 27 mm-mrad radial; 0.020 in slit: 230 uA, 47 mm-mrad (50 mA arc, 3.0 sccm, ~40 kV puller)

    ion-sourcebeam-dynamics dg-418

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The chimney with the larger slit produces a beam with a larger emittance. However, the beam is also of higher intensity.

    Forringer, Edward Russell.pdf — p. 66-69

    Tabletop: Tells the builder exactly what to expect when they widen their Mark II chimney slit: current scales faster than linearly with width, emittance grows more slowly - widen until the machine acceptance is filled.

  419. A DC extraction test stand characterizes an internal source before installation: a puller with 12.7 mm radius of curvature holds 50 kV across a 5.0 mm minimum source-puller gap (~10 kV/mm design margin); a 2.9 mm gap held about 25 kV.

    R_puller = 12.7 mm, gap 5.0 mm -> 50 kV; gap 2.9 mm -> ~25 kV (roughly 10 kV/mm)

    ion-sourcefabrication dg-419

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    This puller was designed for the ion source test stand to hold 50 kV... The minimum source to puller gap is 0.196 (5.0 mm).

    Forringer, Edward Russell.pdf — p. 68, 75

    Tabletop: Sets the reference machine's dee-tip/puller gap voltage budget: with clean electrodes, plan on order 10 kV per mm of gap and generous edge radii.

  420. Prefer a slit chimney over a hole chimney for beam quality: the slit gives a flat plasma boundary and converging beam, while a hole (1.19 mm, 60 degree chamfer) gives a concave boundary, a diverging beam, ~50% larger normalized radial emittance, and half the luminosity at equal arc current.

    hole chimney: 0.66 mm-mrad normalized radial vs 0.44 for slit; normalized luminosity 129 vs 264 A/(m2-sr) at 50 mA arc

    ion-sourcebeam-dynamics dg-420

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    an approximately flat plasma boundary provides the best match to the experimental beams emerging from the 'slit' style chimneys... while a concave plasma boundary... for the 'hole' style chimney

    Forringer, Edward Russell.pdf — p. 73-76, 91-107

    Tabletop: Decides the Mark II chimney aperture style: cut a tall narrow slit, not a drilled hole, if beam brightness and predictable optics matter.

  421. Raising PIG arc current raises beam current sub-linearly: for the 0.25 mm slit, 50 to 450 mA arc gave 52 to 227 uA of beam while beam/arc efficiency fell from 1.0e-3 to 0.5e-3 and emittance stayed flat; luminosity still climbed 1.7 to 7.1 A/(cm2-sr).

    I_beam/I_arc drops 1.0e-3 -> 0.5e-3 over 50-450 mA arc; luminosity 1.7 -> 7.1 A/cm2-sr; emittance ~constant

    ion-sourcebeam-dynamics dg-421

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the general trend of increasing arc current producing increased beam current as expected... there was no noticeable change in the emittance of the beam for different currents

    Forringer, Edward Russell.pdf — p. 77-78, 81

    Tabletop: For the builder: cranking arc power buys current with diminishing returns but does not spoil beam quality below ~230 uA - space charge is negligible at their nA-uA scale.

  422. Keep hydrogen flow at or above ~2 sccm: at normal flows (2-6 sccm, arc 50-350 mA, arc voltage under 3 kV current-limited) the cold-cathode PIG beam contained no detectable H2+, but at 0.5 sccm the arc jumped to voltage-limited mode and molecular ions appeared.

    flow >= 2.0 sccm -> pure proton beam; 0.5 sccm -> mode shift (3.5 kV limit, arc drops to 90 mA) + H2+

    ion-source dg-422

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    hydrogen gas flow rates greater than 2.0 cc/min) no H2+ ions were observed. We were able to observe H2+ ions by lowering the gas supply to 0.5 cc/min.

    Forringer, Edward Russell.pdf — p. 79-80

    Tabletop: Directly actionable on the reference machine's MFC: starving the source of gas silently changes beam species; their flow setpoint should stay above the arc-mode transition.

  423. When simulating orbits from an internal PIG, start ions on the plasma boundary with a plasma temperature of ~35,000 K (central starting energy ~4.5 eV); this reproduces measured emittance for both slit and hole chimneys.

    T_plasma ~ 35,000 K; E_start ~ 4.5 eV; flat boundary (slit) / concave boundary (hole)

    ion-sourcebeam-dynamics dg-423

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the plasma temperature that provides the best match for experimental beams is approximately 35,000 K (resulting in a central starting energy of 4.5 eV).

    Forringer, Edward Russell.pdf — p. 91-107

    Tabletop: Gives the builder the initial-condition recipe for any first-turn orbit simulation of their Mark II central region.

  424. Use a fine-taper metering valve with a vernier handle for gas admission (Series 20: Cv 0.029, 0.055 in orifice, 3-degree stem taper, 9 +/-1 turns open) so flow settings are repeatable.

    Series 20: Cv=0.029, orifice 0.055 in, taper 3 deg, 9+/-1 turns; Series 30: Cv=0.16, orifice 0.125 in, taper 9 deg, 10+/-1 turns

    ion-sourcevacuum dg-424

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Vernier knob for repeatable flow settings ... Flow Coefficient (Cv): 0.029 (Series 20) ... Stem Taper: 3 deg ... Turns to Open: 9 (+/-1)

    parker_metering_valve.pdf — p. 1-2

    Tabletop: The 3-degree-taper Series 20 spread over 9 turns gives the fine, repeatable hydrogen admission an ion source needs; log turns-open as the process setpoint.

  425. Never use a metering valve as the shut-off: Parker states these valves are not for positive shut-off (use a separate bubble-tight valve in series), and pressure is limited to 1000 psig upstream, 500 psig downstream.

    max 1000 psig operating (downstream limited to 500 psig); elastomer limits: Buna-N -10 to 250 F

    ion-sourcevacuumsafety dg-425

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Not recommended for positive shut-off. If bubble-tight shut-off required, the use of a Series HR Metering Valve is suggested.

    parker_metering_valve.pdf — p. 2

    Tabletop: Put an isolation valve between the gas bottle and the metering valve; forcing the tapered stem closed to seal will ruin the calibrated taper and still leak into the vacuum system.

  426. Run the hot-cathode source arc chamber in graphite (86-inch: 0.563-in OD graphite tube), feed 2-3 cc/min of hydrogen, and expect arc conditions of 0.5-1.5 A at 100-300 V with a 0.062 x 2.5 inch exit slit.

    H2 flow 2-3 cc/min; arc 0.5-1.5 A @ 100-300 V; slit 0.062 in x 2.5 in

    ion-sourcematerials dg-426

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The rate of flow required during operation is from 2 to 3 cc/min ... Electrons are accelerated from the filament into the arc chamber by a 100 to 300 volt potential, the normal arc current being 0.5 to 1.5 amperes.

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4357145) — p. 62, 64

    Tabletop: Arc V-I and few-cc/min gas flow transfer almost unchanged to a small chimney source; graphite chimney/slit parts resist sputtering far better than copper or steel.

  427. Make the source slit geometry adjustable and treat alignment of filament-to-defining-slot, arc slit, accelerating slit, and magnetic field as the critical tune: the filament must fully cover the defining slot and the slot edge sits tangent to the arc-slit plane.

    ion-source dg-427

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The alignment of the ion source with the magnetic field and with the accelerating slits is critical and is carefully adjusted to obtain best performance.

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4357145) — p. 64

    Tabletop: Directly applicable: build Mark II's source mount with repeatable rotation/translation adjustment from outside vacuum; source-to-puller alignment is worth more beam than any power knob.

  428. Regulate arc voltage and arc current as two independent servo loops - hold arc voltage constant via the arc supply and hold arc current constant by trimming filament heating.

    loop 1: V_arc = const (arc supply); loop 2: I_arc = const (filament temperature)

    ion-source dg-428

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Arc voltage and arc current can each be varied independently ... This regulates the filament temperature and thus the arc current, which is then held constant regardless of arc voltage.

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4357145) — p. 66

    Tabletop: Directly applicable control philosophy, trivially implemented today with two small feedback supplies; a constant-current arc is what makes beam current reproducible shot to shot.

  429. Machine face-seal grooves for vacuum to the Parker chart: for a 1/8 in. (0.139) cross-section ring use gland depth 0.101-0.107, squeeze 20-30%, vacuum groove width 0.158-0.164, groove radius 0.010-0.025.

    W=.139+/-.004: L=.101-.107, squeeze .028-.042 (20-30%), G(vacuum)=.158-.164, R=.010-.025; W=.210: L=.152-.162, G=.239-.244; W=.275: L=.201-.211, G=.309-.314

    sealsvacuumfabrication dg-429

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    201 through 284 / 1/8 / .139 +/-.004 / .101 to .107 / .028 to .042 / 20 to 30 / .177 to .187 / .158 to .164 / .010 to .025

    Design chart 4-3 for O-ring face seal glands.pdf — p. 1

    Tabletop: Directly hands the mill the numbers for every lid and port groove on the Mark II chamber; note the vacuum groove width is narrower than the liquid-service column.

  430. Finish O-ring sealing faces to 16 RMS for vacuum and gas service (32 RMS is acceptable only for liquids), with groove sidewalls at 63 RMS and a 0-5 degree sidewall angle.

    sealing face 16 RMS (vacuum/gas), 32 RMS (liquid); groove walls 63 RMS; sidewall taper 0-5 deg; break corners approx .005 rad

    sealsvacuumfabrication dg-430

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Surface finish X: 32 for liquids, 16 for vacuum and gases. Finishes are RMS values.

    Design chart 4-3 for O-ring face seal glands.pdf — p. 1

    Tabletop: A fly-cut or turned finish on the chamber lid seat should be specified/checked to 16 RMS; a rougher face is a common reason a 1e-6 Torr system stalls in the 1e-5s.

  431. Locate a face-seal groove by the diameter the pressure pushes the ring toward: for internal (outward) pressure dimension groove OD = mean O-ring OD; for external pressure (vacuum chambers) dimension groove ID = mean O-ring ID, tolerance +1% of ID but not more than +0.060.

    external pressure (vacuum): H_i = mean O-ring ID, tol +1% ID (max +0.060); internal pressure: H_o = mean O-ring OD, tol -1% OD (max -0.060)

    sealsvacuumfabrication dg-431

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    For External Pressure (inward pressure direction) dimension the groove by its inside diameter (Hi) and width: (H)i = Mean I.D. of O-ring

    Design chart 4-3 for O-ring face seal glands.pdf — p. 1

    Tabletop: For an evacuated chamber atmospheric pressure pushes the ring inward, so the groove ID (not OD) is the controlled dimension when laying out the lid groove.

  432. Provide pumping speed of at least 1 liter/sec (at 1e-5 mm Hg) per liter of chamber volume, and size the roughing pump to reach diffusion-pump backing pressure in 15-20 minutes.

    S >= 1 (l/s)/liter of volume at 1e-5 torr; roughing time to backing pressure 15-20 min

    vacuum dg-432

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    A good rule of thumb is to provide a pumping speed of at least 1 liter/sec at 10-5 mm Hg per liter of volume ... 15 to 20 min is considered a good design figure.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 197-198

    Tabletop: For a ~30-50 liter tabletop chamber the SI100 (~100+ l/s class) comfortably beats the 1 l/s-per-liter rule - margin that matters because source gas load dominates.

  433. Use a double-gasket seal with a pump-out connection between gaskets on large or troublesome flanges so tightness can be tested quickly and a leak can be pumped away in service.

    sealsvacuum dg-433

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    A double-gasket seal is frequently used with a pump-out connection to the space between gaskets. This arrangement makes it possible to test the seal for vacuum-tightness quickly and with certainty.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 200

    Tabletop: Worth adopting on the Mark II main lid: a guard-vacuum groove turns the worst leak hunt into a valve twist.

  434. For static vacuum seals use face or dovetail grooves with heavy squeeze; increasing squeeze from 15% to 50% reduces helium leak rate dramatically, and above ~30% squeeze vacuum grease adds little further benefit.

    squeeze 15% -> 30% -> 50% gives steeply decreasing He leak rate; grease benefit large at 15%, small at 30%, undetectable at 50%

    sealsvacuum dg-434

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    increasing the squeeze reduced the leak rate dramatically... at 50% squeeze the beneficial effect of the grease was not detectable.

    O-Ring+Vacuum+Sealing.pdf — p. 3-4

    Tabletop: Justifies cutting Mark II grooves at the deep end of the squeeze range (25-30%) rather than greasing the rings harder; grease is a crutch for light squeeze.

  435. Estimate O-ring permeation leak rate with L = 0.7*F*D*P*Q*(1-S)^2, where F is gas permeability of the elastomer, D ring ID in inches, P differential in psi, Q a squeeze/lubrication factor (~1.35 dry at 20% squeeze), S fractional squeeze.

    L(std cc/s) = 0.7 F D P Q (1-S)^2; F in std cc-cm/(cm^2 s bar), D in inches, P in psi

    sealsvacuum dg-435

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    L = .7FDPQ(1-S)2 where: L = Approximate leak rate of the seal, std. cc/sec.

    O-Ring+Vacuum+Sealing.pdf — p. 5

    Tabletop: Lets the builder compute the permeation floor of their 10-inch Viton lid seal and check whether O-ring permeation, not leaks, sets their ultimate pressure.

  436. Avoid tool marks perpendicular to the O-ring sealing line; the ideal vacuum-flange finish has a circular lay (concentric with the ring), since a radial scratch is a built-in leak path.

    sealsfabricationvacuum dg-436

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    care being taken to insure that there are no machine or tool marks perpendicular to the seal... The ideal surface finish for any vacuum seal flange has a circular lay

    O-Ring+Vacuum+Sealing.pdf — p. 5

    Tabletop: Face the lid seat on a lathe (concentric lay) rather than fly-cutting or hand-sanding radially; never sand a groove crosswise to remove a blemish.

  437. Vacuum weight loss at 1e-6 Torr over two weeks is under 0.2% for butyl (0.18%), fluorocarbon (0.07-0.09%) and low-loss silicone, versus 1-3.5% for nitrile - avoid nitrile near optics, insulators, or RF surfaces.

    % weight loss, 336 h @ ~1e-6 Torr, 21 C: butyl 0.18, neoprene 0.13, fluorocarbon 0.07-0.09, silicone 0.03-0.31, EPDM 0.39-0.92, nitrile 1.06-3.45, polyurethane 1.29

    sealsmaterialsvacuum dg-437

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Vacuum Level: Approximately 1 x 10-6 torr ... Butyl .18 ... Nitrile 1.06 ... Nitrile 3.45 ... Fluorocarbon .07

    O-Ring+Vacuum+Sealing.pdf — p. 6

    Tabletop: At exactly the reference machine's operating pressure: cheap Buna-N rings will slowly deposit oily film on feedthrough insulators and dee stems; Viton's 0.1%-class loss is why it is worth the money.

  438. Pick low-permeability elastomers for vacuum: butyl is best (He permeability 6.5e-8 std cc-cm/cm2-s-bar), Viton fluorocarbon is close (12.7e-8) and adds 205 C capability, while silicone is ~37x worse (238e-8) and should be avoided as a vacuum seal.

    He permeability x1e-8 std cc-cm/cm2-s-bar @77F: butyl 6.5, neoprene 6.5, nitrile 8.0, fluorocarbon 12.7, EPDM 19.7, fluorosilicone 143, silicone 238

    sealsmaterialsvacuum dg-438

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Butyl 6.5 @ 77F ... Fluorocarbon 12.7 @ 77F ... Silicone 238.0 @ 77F

    O-Ring+Vacuum+Sealing.pdf — p. 7

    Tabletop: Confirms Viton is a sound choice at 1e-6 Torr; if helium leak checking becomes routine, remember He walks through silicone and fluorosilicone.

  439. Make alpha spectroscopy measurements with source-to-detector spacing of 1.5-2 times the detector diameter and vacuum better than 100 microns Hg (10 Pa).

    spacing = 1.5-2 x detector dia; P < 100 um Hg (10 Pa)

    detectorsbeam-measurementvacuum dg-439

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Alpha resolution measurements should be made with a detector source spacing equal to 1.5 to 2 times the detector diameter and under good vacuum (< 100 microns HG or 10 Pa).

    Canberra PIPS detector manual — p. 1

    Tabletop: For his ~8 mm active-diameter PIPS, that is 12-16 mm standoff; closer spacing degrades resolution through wide-angle entrance-window losses.

  440. Never exceed a diffusion pump's critical forepressure (25-75 Pa, i.e. 0.2-0.6 Torr, design-dependent); above it the jets collapse and inlet pressure rises uncontrollably, and at maximum throughput the tolerable forepressure drops to ~3/4 of its normal value.

    critical forepressure 25-75 Pa; at max throughput reduce limit to ~0.75x; boiler pressure ~200 Pa

    vacuum dg-440

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    This maximum value called the 'critical forepressure,' ranges from 25-75 Pa (0.2-0.6 Torr)... The critical forepressure should never be exceeded.

    O'Hanlon, A User's Guide to Vacuum Technology — p. 232-233

    Tabletop: Size and maintain the SI100's backing pump so the foreline stays well under ~0.2 Torr even during beam-gas loads; a tired rotary pump silently pushes the foreline over the cliff and dumps oil vapor into the chamber.

  441. Budget unbaked, uncleaned stainless steel at ~1e-5 Pa-m/s (~7.5e-9 Torr-L/s-cm2) after 10 h of pumping; reduce it 10-100x (cleaning, mild 40-80 C bake) for high vacuum, and 1e4-1e5x (150 C bake) for UHV.

    q(304 SS, unbaked, 10 h) ~ 1e-5 Pa-m/s; HV needs 10-100x reduction; UHV needs 1e4-1e5x; unbaked systems ~1e-6 Pa base, UHV bake ~150 C

    vacuummaterialschamber dg-441

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The outgassing rate of unbaked, uncleaned stainless steel is of order 10-5 Pa-m/s after 10 h of pumping... reduced by a factor of 10-100... to be suitable for high vacuum

    O'Hanlon, A User's Guide to Vacuum Technology — p. 308

    Tabletop: Multiply the Mark II internal area by 1e-5 Pa-m/s and divide by delivered pumping speed to predict the 10-hour base pressure before drilling a single hole.

  442. Compress Viton O-rings 15-20% of chord diameter (Kalrez max 12%); aim for initial contact pressure of at least 13 kg/cm2 for 60-75 Shore gaskets - a 3.2 mm ring at 75 Shore develops about 2.7 kg per cm of ring length.

    compression 15-20% (Viton), <=12% (Kalrez); min contact pressure ~13 kg/cm2; seal force ~2.7 kg/cm for 0.318 cm ring @75 Shore

    sealsvacuum dg-442

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    O-rings are typically compressed 15-20% of their diameter... the general criterion for high vacuum sealing to be a minimum initial contact pressure of 13 kg/cm2

    O'Hanlon, A User's Guide to Vacuum Technology — p. 337-338

    Tabletop: The 2.7 kg/cm figure sizes the lid bolting: a 10-inch-circumference seal needs on the order of 200+ kg of clamping just for the ring, before atmospheric load helps.

  443. An unbaked Viton O-ring outgasses ~1e-3 Pa-m/s initially; a 4-h 150 C vacuum bake plus 12 h pumping drops it to 4e-7 Pa-m/s (2500x), but re-exposure to air reloads it with water.

    Viton: 1e-3 Pa-m/s unbaked -> 4e-7 Pa-m/s after 4 h @150C + 12 h pumping; solvent washing is ineffective

    sealsvacuummaterials dg-443

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    An unbaked Viton O-ring will have an initial outgassing rate of 10-3 Pa-m/s... After a 4-h bake at 150C and 12 h of pumping, this value is reduced to 4x10-7 Pa-m/s.

    O'Hanlon, A User's Guide to Vacuum Technology — p. 340

    Tabletop: Pre-baking the Viton rings in a small vacuum oven before assembly is one of the cheapest order-of-magnitude improvements available to a diffusion-pumped 1e-6 Torr system.

  444. Do not grease static elastomer seals: grease traps gas pockets that release as pressure bursts; if a scratched main-door flange forces it, apply the thinnest possible film with a lint-free cloth, and always wear gloves since finger oils have high vapor pressure.

    sealsvacuum dg-444

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Grease is not needed to make a static seal between an elastomer and a metal surface. It will cause pressure bursts as trapped gas pockets are released.

    O'Hanlon, A User's Guide to Vacuum Technology — p. 340

    Tabletop: Counters the amateur habit of greasing everything; on a clean 16 RMS seat with proper squeeze, dry Viton seals better and cleaner.

  445. For a small diffusion-pumped system, cross over from roughing to high-vacuum pumping at ~100-150 mTorr (10-15 Pa): below that an oil-sealed rough pump backstreams (up to ~70x more oil at 1.3 Pa than at high pressure), above it the diffusion pump overloads.

    crossover ~10-15 Pa (100-150 mTorr) for small chambers with oil-sealed roughing; viscous flushing suppresses backstreaming above ~15 Pa

    vacuum dg-445

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    one should not rough a chamber with an oil-sealed mechanical pump below a pressure of circa 10-15 Pa (100-150 mTorr), otherwise oil backstreaming would contaminate the chamber... the '100-mTorr rule' is valid [for small systems]

    O'Hanlon, A User's Guide to Vacuum Technology — p. 379-381

    Tabletop: The reference machine's chamber is exactly the 'prototypical small system': valve over to the SI100 at ~100 mTorr, don't let the rotary pump grind down to 10 mTorr first.

  446. Systematic leak hunting: verify the blanked-off rough pump first, then pump sections sequentially to isolate the bad one; helium-spray external checks start at the TOP of the chamber with small flow, check welds and seals first, and use alcohol (which freezes in a leak) to temporarily plug one leak while checking neighbors.

    vacuumfabrication dg-446

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    External leak checking with helium should begin at the top of the chamber; only a small helium flow rate is necessary... Welds and seals are the most common leak sites

    O'Hanlon, A User's Guide to Vacuum Technology — p. 467-470

    Tabletop: Helium rises - spraying from the bottom up floods every joint at once and destroys localization on a chamber with many ports.

  447. Distinguish a leak from outgassing with a rate-of-rise test: valve off the pump and plot pressure vs time - a real (molecular) leak gives a linear rise indefinitely, outgassing rolls over toward a plateau set by vapor pressures.

    Q = V*dP/dt; leak: dP/dt = const; outgassing: dP/dt decreasing to plateau

    vacuum dg-447

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    A molecular leak causes a linear increase in pressure with time. Outgassing causes the pressure to rise to a steady-state value

    O'Hanlon, A User's Guide to Vacuum Technology — p. 468-469

    Tabletop: First diagnostic to run whenever Mark II won't reach base pressure - it needs only the existing gauge and a stopwatch, and decides whether to reach for the helium bottle or the bakeout tape.

  448. Helium permeates a typical Viton O-ring in about 20 minutes, so during MSLD leak checking of an elastomer-sealed system the He background creeps up and won't fall until the gaskets degas - take a break rather than chase phantom leaks, and never leak check during bakeout.

    He permeation time through Viton gasket ~20 min at room temperature; much faster hot

    vacuumseals dg-448

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The permeation time is about 20 min for a typical Viton O-ring... First, do not attempt to leak check the system during baking.

    O'Hanlon, A User's Guide to Vacuum Technology — p. 469-470

    Tabletop: On an all-Viton chamber, spray briefly and wait; a slowly rising He signal minutes after spraying is gasket permeation, not a leak at the last joint sprayed.

  449. On an RGA, an air leak shows O2 at m/z=32 alongside N2 at 28 (ratio ~4:1 N2:O2); a big 18 peak with falling rate-of-rise is water outgassing - this single scan separates 'open the chamber' from 'keep pumping'.

    air leak signature: m/z 28 with 32 present; water outgassing: dominant 18 (17) with decreasing rise rate

    vacuumbeam-measurement dg-449

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Air leaks are discerned by the presence of oxygen at m/z = 32... Outgassing and water line leaks each can produce a large peak at m/z = 18, but they can be distinguished by the rate of rise.

    O'Hanlon, A User's Guide to Vacuum Technology — p. 471

    Tabletop: A used RGA head is arguably the single best diagnostic upgrade for Mark II - one spectrum replaces a day of guessing.

  450. No structure can beat the aperture limit: molecular-flow conductance of any opening is at most 11.6 L/s per cm2 for room-temperature air, and any real tube delivers only a fraction a (transmission probability) of that.

    C(L/s) = 11.6*A(cm2) for a thin aperture; C = 11.6*a*A for a real duct; long round tube a ~ 4d/(3l)

    vacuumchamber dg-450

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the molecular conductance per unit area of any structure in molecular flow has a maximum value [11.6 L/(s-cm2) for air at 22C]

    O'Hanlon, A User's Guide to Vacuum Technology — p. 48-50

    Tabletop: Sets the ceiling on what the SI100 can actually pump through the chamber port: a 4-inch (81 cm2) opening passes at most ~940 L/s, and a baffled elbow far less - size the pump port as large and short as possible.

  451. Room-temperature outgassing of water from metals falls off roughly as 1/t for the first ~10 hours of pumping, so published outgassing rates are meaningless without their timestamp (1 h and 10 h values differ ~10x).

    q = q_n / (t/t_n)^a, a = 0.7-2, typically 1, valid ~first 10 h

    vacuummaterials dg-451

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Room temperature outgassing data for most gases sorbed on metals, including water vapor, show the outgassing rate to vary inversely with time, at least for the first 10 h

    O'Hanlon, A User's Guide to Vacuum Technology — p. 80-81

    Tabletop: Explains why the chamber keeps improving overnight without any leak being fixed, and why comparing pump-down curves is only fair at equal elapsed times.

  452. One adsorbed monolayer is ~1e15 molecules/cm2, and at 1e-6 Torr a clean surface re-covers with a monolayer in ~2.2 s (at 1e-9 Torr, ~2200 s) - at high vacuum the walls, not the volume, hold essentially all the gas.

    monolayer ~1e15 molecules/cm2; monolayer time ~2.2 s @1e-6 Torr, 2.2e3 s @1e-9 Torr; at 1e-6 Torr surface/volume molecule ratio ~500

    vacuummaterials dg-452

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Rule of thumb - one monolayer consists of ~1e15 molecules (atoms) per cm2

    USPAS, Particle Accelerator Vacuum Engineering (lecture slides, 2004) — p. 42-43

    Tabletop: Explains why pump-down history and surface cleanliness dominate over chamber volume: the reference machine's chamber volume empties in seconds, the walls take days.

  453. A rate-of-rise test doubles as a proof test: measure Q = V(P2-P1)/(t2-t1) after isolating the vessel; a straight line means a real external leak (constant flow), a decreasing slope means outgassing or a virtual leak (internal, decaying source).

    Q = V*(P2-P1)/(t2-t1) Torr-L/s; real leak: constant pressure rise; virtual leak/outgassing: decreasing rise

    vacuum dg-453

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Real Leaks: external, constant flow, constant pressure rise. Virtual Leaks: internal, decreasing flow, decreasing pressure rise.

    USPAS, Particle Accelerator Vacuum Engineering (lecture slides, 2004) — p. 429-433

    Tabletop: The decreasing-vs-constant slope distinction also flags virtual leaks from unvented hardware, which a helium sprayer can never find from outside.

  454. Elastomer-sealed flange systems (ANSI/ISO/KF) are realistically good to ~1e-6 Torr (rated 1e-8) and limited to ~150 C bakes; if a joint must ever be baked hotter or hold UHV, design in a metal seal (Conflat copper 300+ C) from the start.

    elastomer flanges: rated 1e-8 Torr, better suited to 1e-6 Torr, 150 C max; metal seals (CF/VATSEAL) bakeable to 300 C

    vacuumsealsfabrication dg-454

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Vacuum rated to 1 x 10-8 Torr (better suited to 1 x 10-6 Torr). Temperature rating is dependent on which elastomer o-ring is used (usually 150C)

    USPAS, Particle Accelerator Vacuum Engineering (lecture slides, 2004) — p. 443-446

    Tabletop: Matches the reference machine's observed 1e-6 range with Viton - it is the natural floor of an all-elastomer system; a CF port or two on Mark II (gauge, RGA) buys headroom cheaply.

  455. When helium leak checking: calibrate the detector against a standard leak before and after, use a low-flow tracer probe, keep helium away from elastomers, and bag/tape suspect regions to localize; specify leaks quantitatively (e.g. MSLD sensitivity 2e-10 atm-cc/s) and never as 'vacuum tight'.

    typical MSLD sensitivity spec: 2e-10 atm-cc He/s; ASTM E432, E479, E493, E498, E499, F97

    vacuumfabrication dg-455

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Avoid phrases like; leak tight, vacuum tight, good to 10-8 Torr, good for ultrahigh vacuum, etc.

    USPAS, Particle Accelerator Vacuum Engineering (lecture slides, 2004) — p. 456-464

    Tabletop: When farming out Mark II welds or buying used hardware, write the acceptance spec as a number (e.g. no single leak >1e-9 atm-cc/s He) - 'vacuum tight' is unenforceable.

  456. Use published outgassing data comparatively, not absolutely: at 1 h under vacuum, aluminum ~80, unpolished stainless ~266, electropolished stainless ~66, slightly rusty mild steel ~58,520 (all x1e-10 mbar-L/s-cm2); after 4 h all clean metals converge to single digits.

    1h/4h desorption (1e-10 mbar-L/s-cm2): Al 80/7, Cu mech-polished 47/7, OFHC raw 266/20, SS unpolished 266/20, SS electropolished 66/5, rusty mild steel 58520/199

    vacuummaterials dg-456

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Stainless Steel (unpolished) 266 [1 hr] 20 [4 hrs]... Mild Steel, slightly rusty 58,520 199 (mBar-l/sec-cm2 x 10-10)

    USPAS, Particle Accelerator Vacuum Engineering (lecture slides, 2004) — p. 49

    Tabletop: The 200x penalty for rusty mild steel is the argument for keeping any exposed magnet pole faces inside the chamber plated, painted with vacuum-compatible coating, or clad in stainless.

  457. Generic cleaning sequence for vacuum components: mechanical clean, solvent degrease (acetone for tape/ink), detergent wash, water rinse between every bath, DI rinse to >2 Mohm resistivity, dry with filtered N2, then protect in lint-free wrap; a bakeout is the final step, and even glow-discharge-cleaned parts still need a 200 C bake.

    DI rinse spec: >=2e6 ohm resistivity (hot 65 C final rinse); SS acid pickle 50% HNO3 + 5% HF

    vacuumfabricationmaterials dg-457

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Mechanical Cleaning; Degreasing or Solvent Cleaning; Detergent Cleaning; Chemical Etch; Electrolytic Polishing; High Pressure Spray; Bake-out

    USPAS, Particle Accelerator Vacuum Engineering (lecture slides, 2004) — p. 497-513

    Tabletop: Scaled down: acetone wipe, hot detergent wash, DI rinse, N2 or oven dry, gloves-only handling afterward gets most of the professional benefit for chamber internals.

  458. A virtual leak is trapped atmospheric gas bleeding out through a blind path; its gasload decays as Q = Pa*V/(e*t), and the classic culprits are unvented screws in blind tapped holes, double welds enclosing a void, and unvented double O-rings - vent (drill or slot) every trapped volume.

    Q_Lv = Pa*V/(e*t) (Torr-L/s), Pa = trapped pressure, V = trapped volume (Santeler, NASA SP-105)

    vacuumfabricationchamber dg-458

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    A virtual leak is a volume of trapped atmospheric gas that leaks into the vacuum vessel through holes or cracks that do not go all the way through the vessel wall. [Examples:] Unvented Screw, Two Welds in Series, Unvented Double O-rings

    USPAS, Particle Accelerator Vacuum Engineering (lecture slides, 2004) — p. 59-63

    Tabletop: Every internal socket-head screw in the Mark II (dee supports, ion source mounts) needs a vent hole, a slotted thread, or a vented washer; a slot machined in the O-ring groove floor serves the same purpose.

  459. O-ring seal design for accelerator vacuum: prefer face seals, use as heavy a squeeze as possible, consider lubrication only when heavy squeeze is impossible, expect heavy flange construction to react the squeeze, and use two O-rings with a guard vacuum between them to drastically cut permeation.

    guard vacuum example: 760 Torr across 1st ring reduced to 1e-2 Torr across 2nd ring (DARHT-II: 15 mTorr guard, 5e-8 Torr design pressure)

    sealsvacuum dg-459

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Face-type o-ring seals are recommended. Use as heavy a squeeze as possible... Two o-rings in series can drastically reduce permeation.

    USPAS, Particle Accelerator Vacuum Engineering (lecture slides, 2004) — p. 71-74

    Tabletop: If Mark II targets below ~5e-7 Torr with elastomers, a double O-ring lid groove pumped by the existing roughing pump (guard at ~15 mTorr) removes the permeation floor for the cost of one extra groove and a hose barb.

  460. Set the vacuum requirement so the mean free path is at least an order of magnitude longer than the total spiral flight distance; compute flight distance from dee voltage (e.g. ~300 m for 2 MeV at 1 kV/gap), giving ~2e-3 torr adequate for a fast machine but far better vacuum needed at low dee voltage.

    MFP >= 10 * flight path; l = kT/(P*sigma); 2e-3 torr -> ~5 km MFP

    vacuumbeam-dynamics dg-460

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    An acceptable vacuum would allow for a mean free path an order of magnitude larger than the expected flight distance.

    22thesis10.pdf — p. 9-11

    Tabletop: The quantitative vacuum spec for Mark II: total path length ~ (final energy)/(energy per turn) x orbit circumference; halving dee voltage doubles path length and tightens the pressure requirement proportionally.

  461. Vacuum-weld discipline: make seam welds continuous and only on the atmosphere side, and stagger-weld internal bracing, so trapped volumes (virtual leaks) cannot form.

    vacuumfabricationseals dg-461

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Seam welds are continuous, with welding only on the atmosphere side. The internal braces are stagger welded to keep virtual leaks at a minimum.

    Argonne 60-inch cyclotron report — p. 7

    Tabletop: Standard practice worth enforcing on any welded Mark II chamber or fitting: no vacuum-side seal welds, no closed pockets.

  462. Diagnose breakdown sites by their fingerprints: arcs leave starburst patterns and craters at the initiation point (starbursts cluster at particle sites), so post-mortem inspection of electrodes locates the actual weak spot.

    vacuummaterials dg-462

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the frequency with which starbursts appeared at particle sites, I have concluded that particles cause breakdown

    WernerThesis_hv_vacuum.pdf — p. 46, 78

    Tabletop: When Mark II sparks, a loupe inspection for starbursts/craters tells the builder exactly where the field problem is instead of guessing from outside the chamber.

  463. Electrode material choice is secondary for HV holdoff - if contaminant particles are present they, not the substrate (Nb, Cu, Au, or their oxides), set the breakdown voltage; oxide layers hundreds of angstroms thick made no measurable difference.

    materialsvacuum dg-463

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    if there are contaminant particles, then they, and not the substrate material, determine the breakdown voltage.

    WernerThesis_hv_vacuum.pdf — p. 84

    Tabletop: The builder can keep aluminum dees rather than exotic electrodes: cleaning and conditioning matter, native oxide does not.

  464. Mild bake-out helps holdoff: cathode sites held 95 MV/m at 100 C with no field emission, but the same sites at room temperature showed field emission from ~40 MV/m and broke down near 90 MV/m - adsorbed gas/water degrades HV performance.

    at 100 C: no FE at 95 MV/m; at 22 C: FE onset ~40 MV/m, breakdown ~90 MV/m

    vacuummaterials dg-464

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Both sites reached 95 MV/m at 100 C with no evidence of field emission ... At room temperature (22 C), field emission began near 40 MV/m, and breakdown occurred around 90 MV/m

    WernerThesis_hv_vacuum.pdf — p. 96

    Tabletop: A gentle heat-lamp or heater-tape bake of the dee assembly before HV runs should measurably raise the reference machine's sparking threshold.

  465. Attain about 1e-5 mm Hg before starting, tolerate no worse than ~1e-3 mm Hg during RF bakeout, and expect cyclotron operation at 1e-4 mm Hg or below with RF and source on.

    base ~1e-5 torr; bakeout ceiling ~1e-3 torr; operation <= 1e-4 torr

    vacuum dg-465

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    a preliminary vacuum of about 10^-5 mm hg should be attained; during 'bakeout' pressure should not exceed ~10^-3 mm. Operation as a cyclotron can be attempted with a pressure of 10^-4 mm or less

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 6

    Tabletop: Directly applicable pressure targets; matches the regime the builder already operates in and sets the Mark II spec.

  466. Solvent-wash all tank parts before final assembly to remove organic matter; organics (grease, cutting oil, rubber) are the usual cause of a tank that will not bake out.

    vacuumfabricationmaterials dg-466

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    preliminary washing of the parts in CCl4 is recommended to remove organic matter

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 9

    Tabletop: Directly applicable (use modern solvents, not CCl4); degrease every Mark II part that sees vacuum.

  467. Run a short, fat (3 in diameter) pump duct straight down from the chamber to maximize conductance - essential to hold ~1e-7 Torr base while continuously injecting hydrogen for the ion source.

    3 in dia straight vertical duct; base ~1e-7 Torr with gas load

    vacuum dg-467

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    a 3 inch diameter tube in the corner can extend directly downwards to a vacuum pump underneath. This design choice maximizes vacuum conductance.

    we1pb05.pdf — p. 2

    Tabletop: Pumping a gas-fed cyclotron is conductance-limited; Mark II should place the pump under the chamber with the largest, straightest duct possible.

  468. Make thin vacuum-chamber lids workable inside a tight magnet gap by supporting them with internal steel rods/posts that carry the atmospheric load, instead of thickening the plates.

    vacuumchamberfabrication dg-468

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Steel supporting rods allow thin top and bottom plates to minimize thickness

    2010cycconf_cyckids.pdf — p. 6-7

    Tabletop: Every millimeter of lid steel is a millimeter of magnet gap; internal posts (placed outside the beam plane) let the builder close the Mark II gap without a lid that dishes under vacuum.

  469. Run new vacuum hardware hot deliberately to degas it: initial operation raises pressure for minutes, after which pressure plunges below the starting point once the electrode surfaces are cleaned.

    vacuum dg-469

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    You can hasten the process by running the fusor to degas the inner surfaces. This sends the pressure upward, but after a few minutes it starts to drop

    The Farnsworth–Hirsch Fusor — p. 5-6

    Tabletop: Same conditioning applies to the reference machine's chimney and dee surfaces: schedule a beam-on bake-in run and expect pressure excursions before stable operation.

  470. For fusion-grade cleanliness, pump to ~1e-6 Torr base pressure first, then backfill with deuterium through fully evacuated lines to 1-10 microns operating pressure.

    base ~1e-6 Torr; operate at 1-10 micron D2 backfill

    vacuum dg-470

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    To fully clean the system of residual gases, an initial base pressure of around 1e-6 Torr is necessary. A leak valve is then used to backfill the chamber with deuterium to a pressure in the range of 1 to 10 microns.

    The Farnsworth–Hirsch Fusor — p. 6

    Tabletop: The base-pressure-then-backfill discipline is exactly the reference machine's MFC workflow; a 100:1 ratio of operating to base pressure keeps beam-gas composition dominated by the feed gas.

  471. A 1e-6 torr operating vacuum via diffusion pump plus liquid-nitrogen cold trap (roughing to 1e-3 torr mechanically) is the proven recipe at the 15 cm, few-hundred-keV scale; monitor with thermocouple gauges above 1e-3 torr and an ion gauge below.

    rough to ~1e-3 torr, diffusion+trap to ~1e-6 torr; TC gauge >=1e-3, ion gauge to 1e-8

    vacuum dg-471

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    an Innovac R220 diffusion pump and Kurt J Lesker TNR6XA150QF cold trap are used, which can lower the pressure to about 1e-4 Pa (1e-6 torr)

    Houghton College physics thesis (Loucks) — p. 41-43

    Tabletop: Matches the reference machine's scale exactly: 1e-6 torr base bled up with hydrogen for the source is the working point of every successful machine in this peer group.

  472. Match the chamber to the magnet: a 2.54 cm thick aluminium ring of 9.9 cm outer / 8.5 cm inner radius with 0.65 cm lids, ten KF-16 ports epoxied in at equal angles, and a Viton O-ring groove in the lids gives a workable 2e-6 Torr tabletop chamber.

    wall ring 2.54 cm thick, r_out 9.9 cm, r_in 8.5 cm; lids 0.65 cm; 10 x KF-16; Viton O-ring; base 2e-6 Torr

    chambervacuumsealsfabrication dg-472

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    A 2.54 cm thick ring with an outer radius of 9.9 cm and an inner radius of 8.5 cm was milled from 6061 T6 aluminium ... Ports were made in the chamber wall using ten KF-16 flanges, which were secured using Hysol Loctite 1C vacuum epoxy

    we1pb01.pdf — p. 2

    Tabletop: A complete, copyable chamber spec for an 8-inch-pole machine, including the epoxy-in-flange trick that avoids welding.

  473. Seal large flanges with a continuous square-section rubber gasket in a groove sized so the metal faces land metal-to-metal; the metal contact gives alignment and the gasket cannot be over-crushed.

    groove volume >= gasket volume; metal-to-metal closure

    sealsvacuumfabrication dg-473

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    continuous square rubber gaskets located in grooves in the faceplates of sufficient cross section to accommodate the entire gasket under pressure. The resulting metal-to-metal contact ... has proved very satisfactory.

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4357145) — p. 41

    Tabletop: Directly applicable to Mark II chamber lids and faceplates; grooved captive gaskets beat flat sheet gaskets for repeatable sealing and alignment.

  474. Backfill and purge with dry air: injecting dry air at the mechanical pump outlet replaces a refrigerated inlet trap, and venting the tank only with dry air markedly shortens the next pumpdown.

    vacuum dg-474

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    a steady stream of dry air injected into the outlet side of the pump cylinder could eliminate the need for a refrigerated vapor trap ... dry air is used in the tank in order to minimize the amount of moisture

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4357145) — p. 44

    Tabletop: Directly applicable: vent the Mark II chamber with dry nitrogen or desiccated air, never room air, and water-vapor pumpdown time drops dramatically.

  475. Do not switch on a hot-filament ionization gauge until pressure is below ~0.5 micron, mount it where conductance to pumps and to tank are comparable so it reads representative pressure, and give its filament some magnetic shielding.

    ion gauge on only below ~5e-4 torr

    vacuumdetectors dg-475

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the ion gauge is not turned on until the tank pressure is less than 0.5 microns ... the wall of the manifold provides the tube filament with some protection from the magnetic field

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4357145) — p. 45

    Tabletop: Directly applicable gauge practice near a stray-field-rich H-frame magnet.

  476. Add a Penning (Philips) gauge alongside the ion gauge: it is rugged, works as a pressure interlock, and doubles as a sensitive indicator of hydrogen-flow changes; mount its axis normal to the magnet field it borrows.

    vacuumdetectors dg-476

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    far more rugged than the triode ion gauge and sensitive to small changes in pressure; but it is probably not as accurate in reading absolute pressure.

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4357145) — p. 46

    Tabletop: Directly applicable: a cheap Penning head is the right always-on interlock and gas-flow monitor for Mark II, with the ion gauge kept for absolute readings.

  477. Benchmark chamber tightness by rate-of-rise: the 280 ft^3 ORNL system held 0.00015 micron/sec with pumps valved off; scale that expectation to your volume.

    rate-of-rise spec ~ 1.5e-7 torr/s on 280 ft^3 (leak load ~ 1.2e-3 torr-L/s)

    vacuum dg-477

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Rate of rise on tank assembly 0.00015 microns/sec

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4357145) — p. 46

    Tabletop: Scale by volume: an equally tight ~30 L Mark II chamber would show ~4e-5 torr/s; measure rate-of-rise after every re-seal as the standard leak health metric.

  478. For vacuum service pick elastomers on three axes - low gas permeability (butyl best, fluorocarbon good, silicone/fluorosilicone worst), low vacuum weight loss, and good compression-set resistance - and use up to 40% squeeze with a correspondingly wider groove.

    vacuum squeeze up to 40% with increased groove width; postcure Viton/silicone compounds to drive off volatiles before service

    sealsmaterialsvacuum dg-478

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Employing a seal squeeze of up to 40% inhibits media flow through the seal... because of the decreased groove depth, increased groove width is essential.

    seal-design-guide.pdf — p. 84

    Tabletop: Endorses going beyond Parker's 30% on critical static vacuum joints if the groove is widened to take the displaced volume; 'postcuring' is the vendor name for the pre-bake O'Hanlon recommends.

  479. In a group of bolts, earlier-tightened bolts relax as later ones compress the joint (elastic interaction, creep of loaded surfaces), which can nearly eliminate their tension - tighten flange bolt circles in a cross pattern and in multiple passes, re-checking the first bolts.

    fabricationseals dg-479

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    As we tighten the rest of the bolts the joint is further compressed, and the previously tightened bolts tend to relax and lose some of their preload. In some cases, this can virtually eliminate our bolt tension.

    Fastenal Technical Reference Guide — p. 26

    Tabletop: On the Mark II lid, a single-pass tightening leaves the first-torqued sector under-clamped and is a classic cause of an O-ring leak that 'moves' with each reassembly.

  480. When machining an extra-shallow gland to get heavy squeeze, widen the groove enough to accommodate the full O-ring volume, or the ring will be crushed instead of sealed.

    sealsfabrication dg-480

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    when an extra-shallow gland is desired in order to increase the squeeze, it must be made wide enough to accomodate the full O-ring volume.

    O-Ring+Vacuum+Sealing.pdf — p. 1-2

    Tabletop: If Mark II grooves are cut for 30% squeeze, groove cross-section area must still exceed ring cross-section area - check fill before cutting.

  481. Use dovetail grooves only where the ring must be retained (vertical faces, lids that open); they cost more to machine, need the sharp-corner radius R held closely, and Parker sizes them for less squeeze (16-27%) with metal-to-metal flange contact.

    Dovetail: 66 deg walls; W=.139 -> L=.111-.113, G=.113-.117, squeeze 20%, R=.010; radius R is critical - too small damages ring, too large causes extrusion

    sealsfabrication dg-481

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Radius R is CRITICAL. Insufficient radius will potentially cause damage to the O-ring during installation, while excessive radius may contribute to extrusion.

    O-Ring+Vacuum+Sealing.pdf — p. 10

    Tabletop: Worth it for a hinged or frequently-removed lid where the ring falls out during assembly; otherwise plain rectangular face grooves are cheaper and more tolerant.

  482. Avoid welding lids onto a thin flat vacuum chamber: weld shrinkage warped the whole frame; grinding off the weld and sealing with a flat Viton gasket fixed it - prefer demountable elastomer seals for flat chambers.

    chambersealsfabrication dg-482

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    after the welding, the bottom plate contracted so much that it bent the whole frame out of shape... seal the bottom plate against the frame using a flat Viton ring.

    we1pb05.pdf — p. 2-3

    Tabletop: A fabrication trap the builder can skip entirely: o-ring/flat-gasket both lids, weld nothing flat and thin.

  483. Stretch a groove-mounted O-ring 1-5% on its ID (2% ideal); more than 5% stretch thins the cross-section, accelerates aging, and loses seal compression.

    O-ring ID = groove diameter / (1 + stretch), stretch 0.01-0.05, ideal 0.02; CS reduction ~ f(% stretch)

    seals dg-483

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    This stretch should be between 1%-5% with 2% as the ideal in most applications. A stretch greater than 5% is not recommended.

    seal-design-guide.pdf — p. 11

    Tabletop: When picking the AS-568 size for a non-standard groove (dee-stem feedthrough, viewport), size so the ring sits at ~2% stretch rather than swimming or straining.

  484. Never let the O-ring volume exceed the gland volume (crush seals excepted, where fill should still stay under 95% of the gland void) - thermal expansion or swell with a 100% -filled gland destroys the seal or the hardware.

    V_oring(max, incl. tolerances) < V_gland(min); crush seals: V_oring <= 0.95 * V_gland

    sealsfabrication dg-484

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The maximum volume of the O-ring should never surpass the minimum volume of the gland... the O-ring volume does not exceed 95% of the gland void.

    seal-design-guide.pdf — p. 14-16

    Tabletop: Check fill arithmetic including worst-case ring tolerance before machining; Viton heated by RF or magnet proximity expands ~16e-5/C and needs that free volume.

  485. Static gland sealing faces tolerate 64-128 RMS but 32 RMS is preferred (16 RMS for vacuum/gas); compress static seal cross-sections 10-40% and dynamic seals only 10-30%.

    static faces: 32 RMS preferred (64-128 tolerable), 16 RMS vacuum/gas; static squeeze 10-40%, dynamic 10-30%

    sealsfabrication dg-485

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    a finish of 32 micro-inches RMS is preferred... Static seal cross sections are generally compressed from 10% to 40%, whereas dynamic seals are from 10% to only 30%.

    seal-design-guide.pdf — p. 19, 61

    Tabletop: For a rotating or sliding shaft feedthrough (target manipulator), back off to <=30% squeeze and a 16-32 RMS shaft finish, or friction will shred the ring.

  486. Handle O-rings like precision parts: clean the gland of all debris, lightly coat the ring with a compatible lubricant (never a lubricant of the same chemistry as the ring - like dissolves like), cover threads/sharp edges with tape during installation, and remove twists.

    sealsfabrication dg-486

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Do not use a lubricant composed of the same material as the O-ring because 'like' will dissolve 'like.' For example, a silicone lubricant should not be used with a silicone O-ring.

    seal-design-guide.pdf — p. 20, 109

    Tabletop: Silicone vacuum grease on Viton is fine; silicone grease on a silicone ring (or hydrocarbon grease on Buna-N) slowly destroys it.

  487. To run a standard round O-ring in a non-round (rectangular) face-seal groove, keep every inside corner radius at least 3x the O-ring cross-section diameter and match ring centerline length to groove centerline length.

    inside corner radius >= 3 * O-ring CS diameter; O-ring ID = (groove CL length / 3.14) - O-ring CS

    sealsfabrication dg-487

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    In order to use a standard round O-ring, the inside corner radius of the groove should not be less than three times (3X) the O-ring cross-section diameter.

    seal-design-guide.pdf — p. 84

    Tabletop: Directly applicable to a racetrack or rectangular lid/port on Mark II: a 1/8 in. cord ring needs >=3/8 in. corner radii or it will bunch and leak at the corners.

  488. Size the deflector with septum radius increment dR ~ 0.15R (0.1R needs less voltage but a long channel; 0.2R risks breakdown), and taper the channel gap from ~1/8 in at entry to ~1/2 in at exit to accommodate divergence.

    V_d ~ (2T/e)*d*(1/R - 1/(R+dR)); MIT 16 MeV, d=0.3 in: dR=0.1R -> 47 kV, dR=0.2R -> 87 kV; typical dR=0.15R

    beam-dynamicschamber dg-488

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    A typical figure, used in the MIT cyclotron, is a dR of 0.15R. The deflector gap is usually tapered ... Spacings as small as 1/8 in. can be used at the entry slit, opening to 1/2 in. or greater at the exit.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 180-181

    Tabletop: Scaled to 160 keV the same geometry needs only ~500-900 V on the deflector - an easy supply; keep the entry slit no wider than the turn separation.

  489. Choose 304L (not 304) stainless for welded vacuum chambers - the low-carbon grade is the standard vacuum choice for weld integrity - and remember TIG/MIG joint design, cleanliness, and (for aluminum) high weld speed control distortion and leaks.

    materialsfabricationchamber dg-489

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    304L SS, most commonly used in vacuum, a little more expensive... Joint design is critical from vacuum, metallurgical and distortion standpoints. Cleanliness is essential.

    USPAS, Particle Accelerator Vacuum Engineering (lecture slides, 2004) — p. 355-360

    Tabletop: For Mark II chamber welds specify 304L filler and pipe where possible; carbide precipitation in plain 304 welds is a known source of micro-leak porosity.

  490. Verify chamber lid thickness with the fixed-edge circular plate deflection formula (Roark): a 10 cm radius aluminum lid only 3.5 mm thick deflects under 1 mm at full vacuum; use higher-yield 7075-T6 (505 MPa) rather than 6061-T6 (275 MPa) for lids.

    delta_center = -q*a^4/(2D)*(L14-L11), D = E*t^3/(12(1-v^2)); 7075-T6 yield 505 MPa vs 6061-T6 275 MPa

    chambermaterialsfabrication dg-490

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    a lid with radius 10 centimeters and thickness of 3.5 millimeters would undergo less than 1 mm of deflection when covering a chamber with internal pressure of 1e-3 Torr

    22thesis10.pdf — p. 12

    Tabletop: Gives the builder the actual formula for trading Mark II lid thickness against magnet gap - a few mm of 7075 plate suffices at 8-12 inch chamber diameter if the edge is well supported.

  491. Everything inside a strong cyclotron field must be magnetically transparent - aluminum, copper, brass - since ferromagnetic parts distort the field and disrupt measurements.

    materialschamber dg-491

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    all cyclotron components must be made of magnetically transparent materials such as aluminum, copper, or brass

    22thesis10.pdf — p. 9

    Tabletop: Standard but easily violated rule: screws, feedthrough bodies, and detector hardware inside the reference machine's gap should be checked with a hand magnet before installation.

  492. Design for maintenance access from day one: ANL mounted the dee assembly on a rail carriage so the entire dee system rolls out of the chamber for service, and put diffusion pumps on wheels.

    chamberfabrication dg-492

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the VTO box and obround are mounted on a motor-driven carriage which operates on a rail system. This permits the removal of the dee heads... to facilitate maintenance.

    Argonne 60-inch cyclotron report — p. 6-7

    Tabletop: At tabletop scale this means: chamber slides out of the gap, dee removable through a lid, pump cart disconnectable - the difference between a research tool and a sealed monument.

  493. p-B11 disintegration alphas were first detected at ~60-70 keV proton energy (thin film ~70 kV, thick target not appreciable below 60 kV), with yield rising steeply toward 200 kV, and maximum alpha range of 4.7 cm in air; thick-target Li appears from ~30 kV for comparison.

    B threshold(observed) ~60-70 kV at ~50 uA and 0.7 sr; max alpha range 4.7 +/- 0.15 cm air

    detectorsbeam-dynamics dg-493

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    It is seen that particles are detected at about 70 kv. and the numbers increase more rapidly with increase of bombarding energy than with the lithium film.

    259.full (1).pdf — p. 266-270

    Tabletop: Proof that p-B11 alphas are observable far below the 675 keV resonance if the builder integrates tens of uA-hours with large solid angle - and that their alphas stop in under 5 cm of air (vacuum path to PIPS required).

  494. Check that beam probes/collectors are thinner than the local turn spacing: at 10 kV Vp-p and 1.0 T the turn spacing near r = 4 in is only 0.04 in, so a 0.06-in-thick RF shield on the collector tip masks real beam.

    dr = V_gain/(2E_total) * r; Rutgers: dr = 0.04 in at r = 4 in for 10 kVp-p, 1.0 T

    beam-measurementbeam-dynamics dg-494

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the ion revolution turn spacing near r = 4 inches, in a B-field of 1.0T will be just 0.04 inches, which is smaller than the 0.06 inch RF shield of the tip

    ion_source_studies_part_1.pdf — p. 1

    Tabletop: At the reference machine's ~1.3 kV dee voltage turn spacing is even smaller, so a bare, grooved copper collector (no thick shield) is essential or the probe reads zero while beam exists.

  495. Entry-slit width is set by the turn separation Delta-r/R = V_rf/T (energy gain per turn over total energy); make the septum and deflector radially adjustable because calculated positions are only approximate.

    dr/R = (1/2)(dT/T) = V_rf/T per turn (two gap crossings); MIT: dr ~ 0.1 in at extraction

    beam-dynamicsfabrication dg-495

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The limit at the entry is set by the dr between successive turns at this radius ... it is desirable to have adjustable controls on deflector spacing and location which can be trimmed empirically.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 181-183

    Tabletop: With 2.6 kV/turn on 160 keV, the reference machine's turn spacing at extraction is ~1.6% of R (~1.3 mm at 3.2 in) - build the septum mount with mm-scale radial adjustment.

  496. Expect at best ~25 percent of circulating (resonant) beam to survive extraction under optimum tuning, and plan routine operation at less; internal probe targets see several times the extracted current.

    extraction efficiency <= ~25% (MIT: 150 uA extracted of ~600 uA circulating; routine 80-100 uA)

    beam-dynamicsbeam-measurement dg-496

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Emergent beam intensities up to 25 per cent of the resonant beam intensity have been obtained under optimum conditions ... practical operating intensities would in this case be limited to 80 or 100 ua.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 182

    Tabletop: Judge the Mark II first on internal-probe current at full radius; a 4:1 ratio between internal and extracted beam is historically normal, not a failure.

  497. Protect the septum from beam power: slot it on the median plane about one beam-height wide (MIT: two 0.020-in tungsten strips with edges 1/8 in apart, silver-soldered to a curved water-cooled copper bar) so most of the beam passes instead of striking metal.

    septum: 0.020-in W strips, median-plane slot ~ beam height (1/8 in at MIT)

    materialsbeam-dynamicsfabrication dg-497

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the septum is formed of two strips of tungsten, 0.020 in. thick and 12 in. long and with the edges spaced 1/8 in. apart. Each strip is silver-soldered to a copper bar bent to the correct curvature.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 184

    Tabletop: At the reference machine's microamp/keV beam power the thermal problem vanishes, but the slotted-septum geometry still maximizes transmitted current into the channel.

  498. Relativistic detuning budget: a 10 MeV proton is only ~1% heavier, but that 1% frequency shift accumulated over hundreds of turns is what caps fixed-frequency cyclotrons near 20 MeV - irrelevant below ~1 MeV.

    dm/m ~ T/(938 MeV); cyclotron limit ~20 MeV

    beam-dynamics dg-498

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    once the particle has been accelerated to 10 MeV the mass has been changed by about 1%, which has a frequency shift of 1%.

    perm_magnet_cyclotron.pdf — p. 12, 21

    Tabletop: Reassurance with numbers: at the reference machine's 100 keV-1 MeV scale, relativistic detuning is ~0.01-0.1% and can be ignored in Mark II design.

  499. Turn-to-turn orbit separation is dR = (R/2)*(2*q*V0*sin(phi_s)/T) - it shrinks as energy grows (100 kV dee, R=1 m, 20 MeV gives only 4.4 mm), which is what makes septum extraction hard late and easy never.

    dR = (R/2)*(2*q*V0*sin(phi_s)/T)

    beam-dynamics dg-499

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The separation for non-relativistic ions is dR = (R/2) (2qVo sin phi_s/T)... Eq. (15.3) implies that dR = 0.44 cm.

    ParticleAccelerators8275.pdf — p. 527

    Tabletop: Lets the builder compute whether their probe or a future septum can distinguish final turns: at 150 keV, R~9 cm and 5 kV/turn gives dR ~ 3 mm - workable.

  500. Design the p-B11 experiment around the 675 keV resonance: the fitted alpha yield coefficient A0 rises from 0.91 mb/sr at Ep=0.15 MeV to 218 mb/sr at 0.65 MeV - a factor of ~240 - so every keV of proton energy toward 650-675 keV multiplies count rate.

    A0(0.15 MeV)=0.91 mb/sr; A0(0.30)=20.8; A0(0.49)=114; A0(0.65)=218 mb/sr

    detectorsbeam-dynamics dg-500

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    0.15 0.91 +/- 0.015... 0.65 218.42 +/- 0.55

    B11_reaction_spraker.pdf — p. 360

    Tabletop: The master rate table for the reference machine's PIPS count-rate prediction across their entire 150-675 keV window; it quantifies exactly what reaching the resonance is worth.

  501. Size an electrostatic deflector from Vd/d = (2T/e) * dR/(R(R+dR)): peeling a 0.472 MeV proton beam from R = 4 in to 4.5 in with a 0.291-in channel requires ~32.5 kV on the electrode.

    Vd/d = (2T/e)*(dR)/(R*(R+dR)); B=0.976 T, T=0.472 MeV, d=0.291 in -> Vd = 32.5 kV

    beam-dynamicsbeam-measurement dg-501

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Vd = 32.531 kV

    2010cycconf_TPONTER_beam_ionsource.pdf — p. 6

    Tabletop: Gives the builder the extraction-voltage scale for Mark II: deflector kV requirements scale linearly with beam energy, so a ~100 keV beam needs only ~7 kV in the same geometry.

  502. In fixed-frequency magnet scans expect harmonic beam peaks at fields of B/n for odd n - Houghton observed H+/3, H+/5, H+/7, H2+/9 etc. - so label every peak with species and harmonic number before claiming fundamental beam.

    resonance at B/n, n odd (ion accelerated on every nth RF cycle)

    beam-measurementbeam-dynamics dg-502

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    H2+/9 H+/7 H+/5 H+/3 H+ H2+

    2010cycconf_YULY_houghton.pdf — p. 15-18

    Tabletop: Prevents misidentifying beam in the reference machine's B-field sweeps: a peak at one-third the expected field is the same ion on the 3rd harmonic, not a new species.

  503. Fusion rate climbs steeply with grid voltage at roughly constant current: 10 cpm at -16 kV rising to 130 cpm at -31 kV (~13x for a 2x voltage increase) at 13-18 mTorr and ~10 mA, so buy voltage headroom before current headroom.

    BF3 moderated counter: 16 kV -> 10 cpm; 25 kV -> 60-100 cpm; 31 kV -> 130 cpm

    detectorsbeam-dynamics dg-503

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    At -25 kV, 8 mA, and 16 mtorr, neutron levels were 60 cpm. This measurement confirmed that nuclear fusion was achieved.

    Kovalchick, Deuterium Fusion Using IEC — p. 45-46

    Tabletop: Same lesson as p-B11 cross-section curves: yield is exponential-ish in particle energy, so for the builder every extra 10% beam energy buys far more counts than 10% more current.

  504. Neutron yield in Hull's fusors scaled roughly two orders of magnitude per ~10 kV of drive: 22 kV gave 1e3 n/s, 33 kV gave 1e5 n/s, 45 kV gives >6e5 n/s - invest in voltage, vacuum cleanliness, and gas handling before anything else.

    22 kV -> 1e3 n/s; 33 kV -> 1e5 n/s; 45 kV -> 6e5 n/s

    detectorsbeam-dynamics dg-504

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    It was limited to low level output by its 22kv internal supply. 103 n/sec... a 33 kilovolt supply. 105 n/sec... currently produces in excess of 600,000 neutrons per second

    Hull, An Easy to Build IEC Fusor — p. 36-39

    Tabletop: Reinforces the energy-over-current rule for the builder: sub-Coulomb-barrier reaction rates reward every extra keV exponentially.

  505. Recognize the phase-slip failure signature: once the accumulated phase difference reaches pi/2 the ion gains nothing at the gap and beyond that it loses energy and spirals back inward, so beam current drops abruptly to near zero past a particular radius.

    phase difference > pi/2 -> deceleration; beam current collapses beyond that radius

    beam-dynamicsbeam-measurement dg-505

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    If many ions in the beam fall out of phase before reaching maximum Dee radius, the beam current will drop suddenly to near zero beyond whatever radius the ions tend to reach

    Houghton College physics thesis (Morrow, 2015) — p. 28, 57

    Tabletop: Diagnostic rule: a sharp cutoff in the radial current profile means phase slip, not wall collisions - which points at field shape/Dee voltage rather than focusing.

  506. Identify beam species by sweeping magnet current at fixed RF: resonances appear at B and at B/n for odd n (B/3, B/5), so H+, H2+ and He+ each show up several times in a magnet scan - a cheap mass spectrometer for the internal beam.

    f = n f' = n (eB/(2 pi m n)), n odd; e.g. He+ B/3 resonance at 320 mT for 3.68 MHz

    beam-measurementbeam-dynamics dg-506

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    for a fixed frequency f, resonances will occur for lower magnetic fields, e.g. B/3 and B/5, corresponding to an odd multiple of a lower frequency

    we1pb01.pdf — p. 4-5

    Tabletop: Practical commissioning technique: the builder can confirm they are accelerating protons (not H2+ or contaminants) with only a magnet current sweep and an electrometer.

  507. The circulating beam is not continuous: ions populate only about 40 degrees of the 360-degree RF cycle, so average current understates peak current by roughly 9x.

    bunch width ~40 deg of RF cycle

    beam-dynamicsbeam-measurement dg-507

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Frame-by-frame analysis... revealed that ions nominally populate 40 degrees of the 360 degree RF cycle in our cyclotron.

    82375909.pdf — p. 9

    Tabletop: Sets expectations for pulsed diagnostics and duty-factor arithmetic on any measurement the builder makes with fast instrumentation.

  508. Suppress secondary electrons from a current-measuring target by immersing it in a stray magnetic field and insulating it (here with an ebonite sleeve); the microammeter then reads the true ion current.

    beam-measurement dg-508

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The stray magnetic field over T effectively prevents the escape of secondary electrons, so that the current measured is the true ion current.

    259.full (1).pdf — p. 262

    Tabletop: The reference machine's Faraday cup inside the cyclotron fringe field gets free secondary-electron suppression; outside the field it needs an explicit suppressor bias or magnet.

  509. For alpha counting close to a target, place a thin mica window ~1 cm from the beam spot on a minimal-shadow grid to capture a large solid angle (~0.7 sr), and calibrate absorber stack and dead space against a known polonium alpha source (range 3.80 cm air at 15 C, 760 mm).

    window at 1 cm, solid angle ~0.7 sr; Po alpha range reference 3.80 cm

    detectorsbeam-measurement dg-509

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    a mica window W, 1 cm in diameter and supported on a grid which subtends the smallest possible area... The solid angle obtained in this way is approximately 0.7.

    259.full (1).pdf — p. 262-265

    Tabletop: The close-geometry, calibrate-with-a-known-alpha-source method is exactly how the builder should commission their PIPS geometry before hunting p-B11 alphas.

  510. Diagnose acceleration radially with an insertable probe on a sliding seal: beam-current vs probe radius, and the width of beam marks on the probe edge, map both resonance quality and the vertical envelope.

    beam-measurement dg-510

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    One technique has been to measure the width of the region of induced radioactivity on the leading edge of probes inserted to different radial locations.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 174-167

    Tabletop: A radial probe (the reference machine's shielded Faraday cup on a linear feedthrough) is the workhorse diagnostic; falling current at some radius localizes where field shape loses the beam.

  511. For absolute field calibration use proton NMR: B(gauss) = 234.82 x f(MHz); Hall probes are ~1 percent devices and temperature-sensitive, search-coil fluxmeters are relative instruments.

    B(gauss) = (234.82 +/- 0.13) * f(Mc/s); Hall: InAs plate, ~20 mV per kG at 0.2 A

    beam-measurement dg-511

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The frequency for resonance can be measured and reduced to magnetic field through the relation B = (234.82 +/- 0.13)f where B is in gauss and f is in megacycles per second.

    Livingston & Blewett, Particle Accelerators — p. 286-287

    Tabletop: 5.9 kG corresponds to 25.1 MHz proton NMR; the machine's own resonance (f, e/m) also gives the average field to ~0.5%, a free sanity check.

  512. Benchmark resolution with a pulser: pulser line width should be about 5 keV narrower than the alpha resolution (warranted 11 keV FWHM here), and system noise is about 3 times the pulser FWHM.

    FWHM_pulser ~ FWHM_alpha - 5 keV; noise ~ 3 * FWHM_pulser; certificates: electronic 5.5-5.6 keV, alpha 10.9-11.0 keV FWHM (241Am 5486 keV, 0.5 us shaping)

    detectorsbeam-measurement dg-512

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Pulser line width should be about 5 keV (FWHM) narrower than Alpha Resolution ... the noise level which is approximately 3 times the pulser line width (FWHM).

    Canberra PIPS detector manual — p. 1-3

    Tabletop: A pulser check separates electronics noise (grounding, RF pickup from the 9 MHz drive) from true detector degradation without risking source contamination.

  513. Put a negatively biased retarding grid in front of the Faraday cup (potentiometer-adjustable) to drive secondary electrons back into the cup and read true beam current.

    beam-measurement dg-513

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    A retarding grid attached to the front of the Faraday cup will eliminate loss of secondary electrons... The grid will be at some negative potential.

    perm_magnet_cyclotron.pdf — p. 24

    Tabletop: Slightly better-engineered alternative to the 9 V cup bias; easy to add to the reference machine's beam probe.

  514. Find the beam by rocking either RF frequency or magnet current through resonance with the probe pushed in near the center, then withdraw it while re-optimizing arc, filament, and RF on the beam-current reading.

    beam-measurement dg-514

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    either one rocked back and forth until a current peak is indicated on the target probe. The probe may be pushed in closer to the center to facilitate locating this resonance.

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 11

    Tabletop: Directly applicable commissioning procedure; starting the search at small radius relaxes the resonance tolerance enormously.

  515. Authenticate a beam by the sharpness of the current peak versus RF tuning and magnet current and by its sensitivity to hydrogen pressure; background (non-orbit) currents are broad and insensitive.

    beam-measurement dg-515

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the authenticity of the beam should be checked by the sharpness of resonance as a function of r.f. tuning and magnet current, as well as by its sensitivity to hydrogen gas pressure

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 11

    Tabletop: Directly applicable; a 'beam' that stays constant while you detune B or RF is ion leakage to the probe, not orbiting protons.

  516. Give the target probe a high resistance to ground and protect its meter with RF chokes and bypasses; expect a few microamperes on a small machine (the 6-inch gave 7 uA).

    6-inch machine: ~7 uA internal beam

    beam-measurementdetectors dg-516

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The six-inch cyclotron has indicated a 7 microampere beam, at a frequency corresponding to about 800 kv protons.

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 11

    Tabletop: Directly comparable scale; microamp-level internal beam is a realistic Mark II expectation and the choke-protected probe is the right pickup.

  517. For final proof of acceleration use a nuclear signature: fuse LiF onto a stainless probe tip and look for prompt gammas from proton bombardment of Li and F.

    LiF target fused on stainless block; p+Li / p+F gamma emission

    beam-measurementdetectors dg-517

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    a convenient target substance would be LiF which, when bombarded with protons, will emit gammas from Li ... The target may be prepared by simply fusing a small amount of LiF onto a small stainless steel block

    Wouters, General Recommendations for the Design of Small Cyclotrons — p. 11

    Tabletop: Partially applicable: the p-Li gamma resonance needs ~440 keV, above the reference machine's 160 keV; a Mark II reaching 0.5 MeV could use exactly this LiF-on-probe gamma check with their gamma detector.

  518. Sub-resonance p-B11 measurements were made with only 0.5-10 nA of protons on target (with ~60-70 keV beam energy resolution); nA-scale beams suffice for alpha spectroscopy given ~1e-4 sr detectors and thin targets.

    0.5-10 nA on target for Ep = 0.15-0.4 MeV data; 100-200 nA at higher energies

    beam-measurementdetectors dg-518

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    At these energies beam intensities varied from 0.5 to 10 nA on target and beam resolution varied from approximately 60 to 70 keV.

    B11_reaction_spraker.pdf — p. 359

    Tabletop: The single most encouraging number in the batch: professional low-energy p-B11 data were taken at exactly the reference machine's nA beam scale.

  519. Report p-B11 yields as total alphas detected per luminosity (counts/(Nt*Np*dOmega)), not as a cross section, because the number of alphas per reaction contributing to the main peak varies with energy (~2.1 at the 675 keV resonance vs ~1.5 at 2.64 MeV).

    X = Counts/(Nt*Np*dOmega) [cm2/sr]; multiplicity in dominant peak: ~2.1 (0.675 MeV), ~1.5 (2.64 MeV)

    detectorsbeam-measurement dg-519

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    simulations show that out of the three emitted a-particles, on average 2.1 a-particles contribute to this peak at the 0.675 MeV resonance

    B11_reaction_spraker.pdf — p. 359-360

    Tabletop: When the builder converts PIPS counts to a 'cross section' they must divide by ~2 alphas per reaction - or better, publish counts-per-luminosity as this paper does.

  520. Normalize alpha yields by integrated beam current and calibrate each detector's relative solid angle with low-energy Rutherford scattering on gold plus a known Am-241 alpha source.

    solid-angle calibration: Rutherford on Au + 241Am source; yield normalization: integrated charge x dOmega

    beam-measurementdetectors dg-520

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The relative solid angles for each detector were measured using low energy Rutherford scattering on gold as well as a known 241Am source.

    B11_reaction_spraker.pdf — p. 360

    Tabletop: The builder already owns the pieces: their Faraday cup/Keithley 617 integrates charge, and an Am-241 check source calibrates PIPS solid angle and energy scale.

  521. A simple energy-spread formula from deflector geometry predicts measured spread well: Rutgers predicted dT = 12.7 keV and measured 13.3 keV on a ~0.5 MeV beam using the phosphor-screen spot width.

    dT = (V*R^2/d) * (eps_r/(R^2 - eps_r^2)); predicted 12.73 keV vs measured 13.3 keV

    beam-measurement dg-521

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    energy at far left: T=.5087 MeV ... dT=13.3 keV ... Theory: dT/2=12.73 keV

    2010cycconf_TPONTER_beam_ionsource.pdf — p. 35-40

    Tabletop: Shows a phosphor screen plus this one formula suffices for energy-spread measurement at student-machine scale - no magnetic spectrometer needed.

  522. Put the discharge/beam current meter in the grounded return leg of the HV supply (e.g., at a center-tapped transformer case) so the ammeter sits at ground potential; include a 10 megohm bleeder and wait 2 minutes after shutdown.

    ammeter in ground return; 10 MOhm bleeder; 100 uA meter movements with shunts/series resistors

    beam-measurementsafety dg-522

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The location of the ammeter in the circuit keeps it essentially at ground potential... Do not omit the 10 meg bleeder resistor.

    The Farnsworth–Hirsch Fusor — p. 8

    Tabletop: The ground-leg metering trick is how the builder can safely log arc and extraction currents on the Mark II without floating instruments at kV.

  523. Bias the beam collector (a 9 V battery suffices) to suppress secondary-electron emission; unbiased collectors read falsely high beam current.

    +9 V collector bias

    beam-measurement dg-523

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The beam current measured was lower with the addition of the voltage bias... the bias reduces the emission of secondary electrons, resulting in a more accurate measurement.

    Houghton College physics thesis (Fuller) — p. 55-56

    Tabletop: A one-component fix for honest current numbers on any Faraday-cup measurement the builder makes.

  524. Bias the internal target/Faraday collector to about +9 V when measuring beam current, otherwise secondary electrons leaving the target corrupt the reading.

    +9 V (battery) bias on target vs grounded target comparison

    beam-measurementdetectors dg-524

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    A +9 V bias can be applied to the target using a battery to reduce the effect of secondary electrons on beam current measurements ... secondary electrons are created in significant numbers on the target.

    we1pb01.pdf — p. 4-5

    Tabletop: One battery fixes a systematic error in the main diagnostic the builder has; also gives a way to separate true beam from secondaries.

  525. Accept that beam current falls with target radius and that the honest headline number for a small machine is small: Houghton's best was ~0.1 uA at a B/3 resonance and only 3 pA at the highest proton energy reached, 160 keV at 796 mT and 12.1 MHz.

    0.1 uA best (B/3 resonance); 3 pA at 160 keV, 796 mT, 12.1 MHz; 400 keV theoretical needs more magnet current, cooling, and higher RF frequency

    beam-measurementcyclotron-general dg-525

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The highest proton energy obtained so far is about 160 keV, with a 3 pA peak near the correct magnetic field of 796 mT for 12.1 MHz.

    we1pb01.pdf — p. 5

    Tabletop: Calibrates expectations exactly at the reference machine's operating point (~160 keV) and names the three things that gate the next factor of 2-3: magnet current, cooling, RF frequency.

  526. Take multi-kW beams on grazing-incidence water-cooled targets so the power spreads over a long footprint (86-inch: 41.7 kW on a 6 x 10 inch aluminum grazing target).

    grazing incidence spreads P_beam over ~L/sin(theta)

    materialsbeam-measurement dg-526

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    operating steadily for some time with 500 ua of 23 Mev protons on a 6 by 10 inch water-cooled aluminum target of the grazing-incidence type

    Oak Ridge / AEC report (OSTI 4357145) — p. 24

    Tabletop: Overkill at the reference machine's ~mW beam power, but the geometry trick transfers if Mark II ever puts tens of watts on a probe tip: tilt the target.

  527. Use a rotating multi-faced target (three faces at 45 degrees, each with a 1.2 cm x 1 mm recess for pressed powder) on a water-cooled stem so faces are shielded from each other's sputtering and targets can be compared without breaking vacuum or alignment.

    3 faces at 45 deg; recess 1.2 cm dia x 1 mm deep; water-cooled rotating stem

    fabricationdetectors dg-527

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    By having only three faces any one face is completely shielded from the material sputtered from that which is in the beam

    259.full (1).pdf — p. 262

    Tabletop: A boron target plus a blank plus a calibration face on one rotatable holder would let the builder switch targets and measure background without venting.

  528. Pump the chamber for 10-15 minutes before applying detector bias to drive off surface moisture, then wait about 30 seconds after biasing for the detector to stabilize.

    detectors dg-528

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    it is a good idea to evacuate the chamber for 10 to 15 minutes before applying bias. This will remove excess surface moisture ... It is recommended to wait 30 seconds to stabilise the detector.

    Canberra PIPS detector manual — p. 1

    Tabletop: Interlock the PIPS bias supply to chamber vacuum in the beam-diagnostics routine; biasing a humid detector raises leakage and can damage the junction.

  529. Clean a PIPS face only by blowing dry gas then swabbing with high-quality isopropyl alcohol (never methyl alcohol), and dry under vacuum 15 minutes or at 50 C for an hour before re-biasing; cleaning will not cure leakage or radiation damage.

    detectors dg-529

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    use a cotton ball dampened with a good quality isopropyl alcohol; Do not use methyl alcohol ... put under vacuum for 15 minutes or heat to 50 C for an hour to remove residual moisture before applying bias.

    Canberra PIPS detector manual — p. 1

    Tabletop: The ~500-angstrom implanted window scratches easily; in a chamber with pump oil and target debris this is the only sanctioned cleaning procedure.

  530. Use leakage current as the detector health metric: about 10 nA at 20 C is nominal for these diodes, and leakage doubles for roughly every 5 C rise, so temperature-correct before comparing to the certificate.

    I_leak(T) ~ I_leak(20C) * 2^((T-20)/5); certificate value 10 nA at 20 C

    detectors dg-530

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Remember that leakage current doubles for about 5 C rise in temperature and take this into account when you compare your measurement to that of the factory.

    Canberra PIPS detector manual — p. 1-3

    Tabletop: A detector near warm cyclotron hardware can legitimately read several times 10 nA; only a rise beyond the temperature-corrected value indicates radiation damage or contamination.

  531. Operate the BKPD 50-11-500 PIPS at its recommended +130 V bias (full depletion +110 V) and never exceed the +150 V maximum bias.

    V_rec = +130 V; V_full_depletion = +110 V; V_max = +150 V; depletion 500 um, chip 501 um, 8000 ohm-cm

    detectors dg-531

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Recommended bias voltage +130 Volts ... Full depletion bias voltage +110 Volts ... Maximum bias voltage +150 Volts

    Canberra PIPS detector manual — p. 2-3

    Tabletop: The reference machine's two detectors (S/N 98343/98344) have only 20 V of headroom above recommended bias; a supply glitch to 150+ V risks breakdown, so use a current-limited, capped supply.

  532. Match electronics speed to the detector: thin silicon detectors (10-300 um) deliver their charge in 100 ps to 30 ns, so microsecond-scale shaping integrates the full charge and only noise considerations, not collection time, set the shaping constant.

    collection time: Si 10-300 um: 100 ps - 30 ns; thick (cm) Si/Ge: 1-10 us

    detectors dg-532

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    (10 ... 300 um thick): 100ps-30ns. Thick (~cm) Si or Ge detector: 1-10us

    detectorlectures_7.pdf — p. 2

    Tabletop: The reference machine's PIPS collects alpha charge in nanoseconds; they can choose shaping time purely for noise optimum without worrying about ballistic deficit.

  533. Signal-to-noise degrades with total input capacitance (detector + cable + stray), and feedback cannot recover it - keep the preamp physically at the detector and minimize cable before the first amplification stage.

    V_signal = Q/C_total; equivalent noise charge grows with C_total; S/N cannot be improved by feedback

    detectors dg-533

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    S/N cannot be improved by feedback. This result is generally valid, i.e. it also holds for active integrators (charge-sensitive amplifiers).

    detectorlectures_7.pdf — p. 24

    Tabletop: For the builder: mount the preamp on the vacuum feedthrough, not at the far end of a coax run - every pF of cable directly worsens alpha energy resolution.

  534. Read out silicon detectors with a charge-sensitive (feedback-capacitor) preamplifier so gain is set by Cf and is insensitive to detector capacitance, which varies with bias voltage in a partially depleted diode.

    Q_signal integrated on Cf; dVout/dQ = 1/Cf independent of C_det

    detectors dg-534

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Detector capacitance may vary within a system or change with bias voltage (partially depleted semiconductor diode)... Amplifier output directly determined by signal charge, insensitive to detector capacitance

    detectorlectures_7.pdf — p. 3-8

    Tabletop: Confirms the standard PIPS chain for the p-B11 experiment: a charge-sensitive preamp at the feedthrough, never a plain voltage amp on the diode.

  535. Estimate front-end noise of a CR-RC shaper from Qn^2 = 12*tau*IB + 6e5*tau/RP + 3.6e4*vn^2*C^2/tau (rms electrons; tau in ns, IB in nA, RP in kOhm, vn in nV/rtHz, C in pF), and pick the shaping time that balances the leakage-current term against the capacitance term; 1 electron = 3.6 eV in Si.

    Qn^2 = 12*tau*IB + 6e5*tau/RP + 3.6e4*vn^2*C^2/tau [rms e-]; w = 3.6 eV/e-h pair (Si)

    detectors dg-535

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    en2 = 12 tau IB + 6e5 tau/RP + 3.6e4 vn2 C2/tau [rms electrons]

    detectorlectures_7.pdf — p. 42

    Tabletop: Lets the builder compute expected keV-scale resolution of their PIPS chain from datasheet numbers before buying a shaping amplifier, and re-optimize tau if leakage rises.

  536. Any particle that can transfer ~20 eV to a silicon atom displaces it; a single 1 MeV neutron transfers 60-70 keV to the recoil and displaces ~1000 atoms, so neutron-producing runs damage silicon detectors far faster than X-rays or electrons (photons below 250 keV cause no displacement at all).

    displacement threshold ~20 eV; 1 MeV n -> 60-70 keV recoil -> ~1000 displaced atoms; photon displacement threshold 250 keV

    detectors dg-536

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    a 1 MeV neutron transfers about 60 to 70 keV to the Si recoil atom, which in turn displaces roughly 1000 additional atoms in a region of about 0.1 um size.

    detectorlectures_7.pdf — p. 49

    Tabletop: The reference machine's PIPS detectors shrug off the cyclotron's X-ray background but must be shielded or retracted during any neutron-producing (e.g., deuterium) runs.

  537. Radiation-induced leakage current grows linearly with fluence, dI = alpha*Phi*(A*d), with alpha ~2e-17 A/cm for 1 MeV neutrons (3e-17 for 650 MeV protons) at room temperature; the leakage current itself is a reproducible dosimeter.

    dI = alpha * Phi * A * d; alpha(1 MeV n) = 2e-17 A/cm, alpha(650 MeV p) = 3e-17 A/cm

    detectors dg-537

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    For 650 MeV protons alpha = 3e-17 A/cm, 1 MeV neutrons alpha = 2e-17 A/cm.

    detectorlectures_7.pdf — p. 51-52

    Tabletop: The builder can track their PIPS bias current on the Keithley 617 as a built-in damage log: any secular rise flags beam or neutron exposure of the detector.

  538. Silicon detector reverse-bias (leakage) current is steeply temperature dependent: cooling from room temperature to 0 C cuts it to about one-sixth, so modest cooling is the cheapest fix for noise from an irradiated or leaky detector.

    I(0 C) ~ I(20 C)/6; activation energy ~1.2 eV (irradiated), 1.15 eV (unirradiated)

    detectors dg-538

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Cooling to 0 C typically reduces the reverse bias current to 1/6 of its value at room temperature.

    detectorlectures_7.pdf — p. 52

    Tabletop: A Peltier or cold-finger on the PIPS mount is a cheap resolution upgrade if leakage-current shot noise ever dominates the reference machine's alpha spectra.

  539. Near 200 keV bombarding energy, the two main p-B11 alphas emerge 150-180 degrees apart with the third particle taking very little energy - a coincidence pair of back-to-back PIPS detectors is a powerful signature at the reference machine's energies.

    alpha-alpha opening angle 150-180 deg at Ep ~200 keV

    detectors dg-539

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the common mode of disintegration is into two [alpha] particles which proceed at angles of 150 to 180 relatively to one another, the third particle receiving very little energy

    B11_reaction_spraker.pdf — p. 357-358

    Tabletop: Two PIPS detectors in near-back-to-back coincidence would give the builder a background-crushing p-B11 signature even at very low count rates.

  540. At the 675 keV resonance the alpha angular distribution is nearly isotropic (|A1|,|A2| a few percent of A0), so PIPS detector angle is uncritical there; significant anisotropy only appears at the 2.64 MeV resonance.

    at 0.65 MeV: A0=218.4, A1=-3.2, A2=6.3 mb/sr (isotropic to ~3%)

    detectors dg-540

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    While the resonance at 0.675 MeV exhibits isotropy, anisotropy can be seen for the resonance at 2.64 MeV

    B11_reaction_spraker.pdf — p. 358-360

    Tabletop: Frees the builder to place their PIPS detectors wherever geometry and shielding are best - solid angle, not angle, is what matters at their energies.

  541. Silicon detectors for p-B11 alphas: place them ~16.5 cm from the target with small solid angles (~2.5e-4 sr each) and thickness sufficient to stop alphas at all energies; expect a large elastically-scattered-proton peak just below 1 MeV alongside the a0 and a1 alpha peaks.

    8 detectors at 30-160 deg, r=16.5 cm, dOmega ~2.5e-4 sr each; proton elastic peak < 1 MeV

    detectors dg-541

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The large peak just below 1 MeV is produced by elastically scattered protons

    B11_reaction_spraker.pdf — p. 358-360

    Tabletop: Warns the builder that their PIPS spectra will be dominated below ~1 MeV by scattered protons - set the alpha discrimination window above that, or use a thin proton-stopping foil.

  542. A workable p-B11 target is ~56 ug/cm2 of isotopically pure 11B on a ~9 ug/cm2 carbon backing; calibrate its thickness in situ via Rutherford-normalized elastic scattering and the energy-broadening of the elastic peak (3.6% systematic achieved).

    target 56 +/- 2 ug/cm2 11B on 9 ug/cm2 C; thickness via elastic alpha scattering at 165 deg, 4.86 MeV

    detectorsmaterials dg-542

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    the target, which was composed of 56 +/- 2 ug/cm2 of isotopically pure 11B deposited on a 9 ug/cm2 carbon backing

    B11_reaction_spraker.pdf — p. 360

    Tabletop: Defines 'thin' for the reference machine's boron target (tens of ug/cm2) and gives two independent thickness checks they can perform with their own detectors.

  543. Detectable D-D fusion requires at least -15 kV on the cathode even though fusion technically begins near 10 kV; plan supplies for 25-30 kV to get statistically clean neutron counts.

    V_threshold(detectable) >= 15 kV; first clean counts here at -25 kV

    detectorssafety dg-543

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    D-D fusion can occur in an IEC device at voltages as little as 10 kV or less, but detectable fusion generally does not occur until voltages are at least 15 kV

    Kovalchick, Deuterium Fusion Using IEC — p. 18

    Tabletop: Calibrates expectations for any sub-threshold nuclear signal at home: being physically above a reaction threshold is not enough; detection thresholds sit well above it.

  544. For thermal-neutron activation or moderated counting, a 3.89 cm (about 1.5 inch) layer of HDPE gives the peak thermal capture rate; back the target (e.g., silver) with a second HDPE slab as a reflector.

    HDPE moderator thickness ~3.89 cm for peak capture; Ag-108 t1/2 2.37 min activation target

    detectors dg-544

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    a peak capture rate is obtained with a 3.89 cm layer of HDPE. This detection method involves positioning the HDPE as close to the neutron source as possible

    Kovalchick, Deuterium Fusion Using IEC — p. 23-24

    Tabletop: If the builder ever cross-checks their PIPS counting with activation or a moderated tube (e.g., for D-D work), this fixes the moderator thickness to build.

  545. For amateur fusion work choose D-D fuel: it needs no NRC license, is cheap, and branches 50:50 to T+p and 3He+n; D-T requires licensing and tritium handling, and 3He is prohibitively expensive.

    D+D -> T + p (50%); D+D -> 3He + n (50%)

    safetydetectors dg-545

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The amateur is limited to the middle or D-D reaction which yields a split 50:50 reaction D+D to T + Proton, D+D to He3 + neutron

    Hull, An Easy to Build IEC Fusor — p. 19-20

    Tabletop: The reference machine's aneutronic p-B11 choice sidesteps even this; but if they ever runs deuterium in the cyclotron, D-D is the only license-free fusion fuel.

  546. Back up electronic neutron detection with a passive fast-neutron bubble detector; an independent, electronics-free integrating detector guards against RF/HV-induced false counts.

    detectors dg-546

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Fast neutron bubble detector acts as backup to electronic detection

    Hull, An Easy to Build IEC Fusor — p. 43

    Tabletop: Same philosophy for p-B11: pair the PIPS/electronics chain with a passive detector (e.g., CR-39 track plastic) immune to the cyclotron's RF pickup.

  547. Prevent stainless-on-stainless thread galling: lubricate the threads (anti-seize), tighten slowly (heat drives galling), avoid prevailing-torque locknuts, and pair materials of different hardness; once galling starts, continued tightening cold-welds the joint.

    fabricationmaterials dg-547

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Thread lubrication is one of the most effective measures to lessen the potential for galling... Heat contributes significantly to thread galling.

    Fastenal Technical Reference Guide — p. 8

    Tabletop: Every stainless bolt into the stainless chamber flange gets anti-seize (outside the vacuum) or silver/moly plating (inside); one galled lid bolt can strand the whole chamber.

  548. Read arc damage patterns as diagnostics: pitting concentrated in the outline of the electrode (not underneath or on top) fingers edge-field breakdown at the electrode perimeter as the failure mode.

    safetymaterials dg-548

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Pitting primarily in the outline of the electrode - not directly underneath or on top.

    2010cycconf_TPONTER_beam_ionsource.pdf — p. 45-47

    Tabletop: When the builder opens the chamber after sparking, the pit geography tells them whether to fix edge radii (perimeter pits) or surface contamination (random pits).

  549. Coat HV electrodes with Aerodag G colloidal graphite: it is conductive, has a low secondary-electron-emission coefficient, and suppresses breakdown; also machine away nearby ground planes to widen the gap.

    materialssafety dg-549

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    We coated the HV electrode with Aerodag G dry lubricant, which is also conductive and has low secondary electron emission coefficient.

    2010cycconf_TPONTER_beam_ionsource.pdf — p. 53

    Tabletop: A cheap surface treatment the builder can apply to deflector or dee edges if they hit breakdown limits near the top of their voltage range.

  550. Any electrode that runs under heavy ion bombardment must be tantalum or tungsten and fusion/resistance welded, not silver-soldered; silver-soldered joints melt within seconds at tens of watts and the electrode stays incandescent long after power-off.

    0.024 in Ta wire replaced 0.030 in SS; grid glowed red at 2 kV x 60 mA (120 W) at 40 microns

    materialsfabrication dg-550

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The grid should be made from tantalum or tungsten wire and be fusion or resistance welded.

    The Farnsworth–Hirsch Fusor — p. 5-8

    Tabletop: Applies to the reference machine's chimney slits, puller edges, and beam stops: anything the beam or arc touches for long runs should be refractory metal with welded, not soldered, joints.

  551. Provide thread engagement of about one nominal bolt diameter in steel (more in soft materials like aluminum), and always make the nut/tapped material the sacrificial member: choose a nut whose proof load meets or exceeds the bolt's tensile strength.

    length of engagement ~ 1.0*d in steel; longer in soft metals; nut proof load >= bolt tensile strength

    fabrication dg-551

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    With conventional steel nut and bolt materials, a length of engagement of about one nominal diameter of the bolt is typical. A longer thread length engagement will be needed when dealing with tapped holes in soft material.

    Fastenal Technical Reference Guide — p. 14

    Tabletop: Tapped holes in aluminum lids or pole pieces need 1.5-2d of thread or inserts; a stripped hole in the finished chamber is far costlier than a longer bolt.

  552. Estimate tightening torque with T = K*d*F, F = 75% of proof load for standard joints (90% for structural); use K ~ 0.20-0.30 dry black, 0.17-0.22 zinc, 0.12-0.16 lubricated - and expect even a perfect torque wrench to scatter preload by 25-30%.

    T = K*d*F; F = 0.75*proof load (std) or 0.90 (structural); K: 0.20-0.30 non-plated, 0.17-0.22 zinc, 0.12-0.16 lubed, 0.11-0.15 cadmium; preload scatter +/-25-30%

    fabrication dg-552

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Torque = K x d x F... F = 75% of bolt material proofload for standard bolts... even perfect input torque can give a variation of preload by as much as 25 - 30 %.

    Fastenal Technical Reference Guide — p. 25-26

    Tabletop: Gives defensible torque numbers for lid bolts and magnet clamp bolts; critically, if a bolt is lubricated but torqued to the dry-K table value, preload can double and snap the bolt.

  553. Do not trust torque values on reused fasteners: the first nut thread carries ~35% of the load and yields to fit its bolt, so on reinstallation friction climbs - a Grade 5 pair that needed 70 ft-lb for 9000 lb clamp needed 95 ft-lb on the 2nd use and 145 ft-lb by the 4th; never reuse any fastener that may have yielded.

    thread load share: 1st ~35%, 2nd ~25%, 3rd ~18%; same-clamp-load torque drift example: 70 -> 95 -> 145 ft-lb over 4 installations

    fabrication dg-553

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    we used an installation torque of 70 ft-lbs to obtain a clamp load of 9000 lbs... By the fourth installation, we required 145 ft-lbs to reach a clamp load of 9000 lbs.

    Fastenal Technical Reference Guide — p. 30

    Tabletop: Lid bolts cycled dozens of times per year drift far from any torque table; for repeatable magnet-gap or flange clamping, replace nuts periodically or control by turn-of-nut instead of torque.

  554. Expect a multi-year build: Iowa State started in 1954 with an undergraduate group and donated industrial materials and got first beam in spring 1957, three years later.

    3 years from start to first beam

    fabrication dg-554

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The project was a long and laborious one, but the efforts were well-rewarded when the first beam was obtained three years later, in the spring of 1957.

    The Iowa State University 1.5 MeV Undergraduate Cyclotron — p. 3

    Tabletop: Schedule reality check for a Mark II and for any educational-accelerator product plan.

  555. Budget realistically before scrounging: a modest small accelerator bought new costs ~$128k (vacuum ~$20k, RF ~$17k, instrumentation ~$41k, magnet ~$15.5k, chamber ~$14k, detectors ~$20k) - which is why surplus procurement is the core amateur skill.

    new-price total ~ $128,500 (2010 dollars)

    fabrication dg-555

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    TOTAL: $128500. Who has >$125k to blow on a very modest strawman small particle accelerator?

    Scientific Equipment Procurement.pdf — p. 2-3

    Tabletop: Calibrates the Mark II budget: every subsystem the builder does not scrounge or fabricate costs thousands new, so design decisions should follow what surplus actually offers.

  556. Buy surplus using a three-line envelope - hard cost cap, minimum performance spec, and required function/condition - then shop the vendor spectrum from sketchy-cheap (Craigslist, eBay, Fair Radio) to legitimate-expensive (Toronto Surplus, Surplus Sales of Nebraska, TestEquity).

    fabrication dg-556

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Cost: Can spend no more than $400. Performance: Want to measure 40MHz sinewaves... Function: Must be in calibration, and nearly bombproof

    Scientific Equipment Procurement.pdf — p. 7-10

    Tabletop: A disciplined method for the Mark II shopping list: define B-field, vacuum, and RF numbers first, then match each to the cheapest vendor tier whose reliability the subsystem can tolerate.

  557. Meter homebuilt HV with a ~10,000:1 high-resistance divider string feeding a low-voltage panel meter, add a high-resistance ballast against surges, and immerse the transformer and rectifier diodes in oil.

    divider ratio ~1:10,000; X-ray transformer + autotransformer, oil-immersed diodes and cap filter

    safetyfabrication dg-557

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    The voltage divider allowed use of a low voltage meter by tapping the divider string at a 10,000 part fraction of the total voltage drop.

    Kovalchick, Deuterium Fusion Using IEC — p. 18-19

    Tabletop: Directly reusable for the reference machine's dee/extraction HV monitoring; a divider-plus-panel-meter is safer and more trustworthy than reading the supply front panel.

  558. A current-limited (neon-sign type, e.g., 12 kV 60 mA) transformer with two HV terminals and case center tap, rectified by microwave-oven diodes, makes a forgiving positive-ground supply; never apply full voltage immediately, and bring voltage up slowly at a few mA.

    NST 12 kV / 60 mA + 2x 12 kV MOT diodes, full-wave; positive terminal grounded

    safetyfabrication dg-558

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    One might choose a 12 kV, 60 mA neon sign transformer and use 2 - 12 kV microwave oven diodes... Never apply full voltage immediately to the fusor!

    The Farnsworth–Hirsch Fusor — p. 5-8

    Tabletop: A scrounger-grade current-limited HV architecture suitable for the reference machine's source-conditioning and glow-discharge cleaning supplies.

  559. Expect and monitor for X-rays once electrode voltages exceed about 18-20 kV; use a Geiger counter at the viewport and a zero-personnel-exposure goal, since fusor/accelerator X-ray output appeared at 18 kV in practice.

    X-ray hazard onset ~18-20 kV on electrodes

    safety dg-559

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    At voltages greater than 20 kV, the resulting x-rays can be hazardous.

    Kovalchick, Deuterium Fusion Using IEC — p. 25, 44

    Tabletop: The reference machine's dee/extraction voltages are below this, but any HV conditioning or future higher-voltage upgrades cross the 18-20 kV line where viewport X-ray monitoring becomes mandatory.

  560. Above roughly 6e5 n/s of D-D output, both light neutron shielding and X-ray shielding become necessary for the operator; below that, distance and time limits suffice.

    shielding threshold ~6e5 n/s (D-D, 2.45 MeV neutrons)

    safety dg-560

    Source, quote & tabletop applicability
    Both light neutron and x-ray shielding are needed beyond this level and the planned fusor V will incorporate these upgrades.

    Hull, An Easy to Build IEC Fusor — p. 39

    Tabletop: Gives the builder a community-vetted numeric line for when a home nuclear device graduates from 'monitored' to 'shielded' - p-B11 alpha work stays far below it.